DIV 26

5/14/2018 DIV 26 - slidepdf.com

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/div-26 1/257

VA – CENTRAL TEXAS HEALTHCARE SYSTEM – WACO, TEXAS

SECTION 26 05 11 – REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTAL LATIONS,

applies to all sections of Division 2 6 .

B . Furnish and install electrical wiri ng, sys tem s, equipment and

accessories in accordance with the specifications and drawin gs.

Capacities and ratings of moto rs, transformers, cabl e, switchboards,

switchg ear, panelbo ards, motor control c ent ers , and other items and

arrangements for the specified items are shown on dra wing s.

C . Electrical service entrance equipm ent (arrangements for temporary and

permanent connections to the power company's syste m) shall conform t o

the power company's requirements. Coordinate fu se s, circuit breakers and

relays with the power company's system , and obtain power company

approval for sizes and settings of these dev ice s.

D. Wiring ampacities specified or shown on the drawings ar e based on copperconduc tors, with the conduit and raceways accordingly size d. Aluminum

conductors are prohibited .

1.2 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A . References to the National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters

Laborat ories, In c. (U L) and National Fire Protection Association (NF PA)

are minimum installation requirement sta ndard s.

B . Drawings and other specification sections shall govern in those

instances where requirements are greater than those specified in the

above standards.

1.3 TEST STANDARDS

A . All materials and equipment shall be lis ted, labeled o r certified by a

nationally recognized testing laboratory to meet Underwriters

Laborat ories, In c. , standards where test standards have been

established. Equipment and materials which are not covered by U L

Standards will be accepted provided equipment and material is li sted ,

lab ele d, certified or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements

of a nationally recognized testing labora tory . Equipment of a class

which no nationally recognized testing laboratory ac cep ts, cert ifies ,

lists, la be ls, or determines to be s af e, will be considered if inspected

or tested in accordance with national industrial standar ds, such as

NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test

reports and definitive shop drawings .

B . Definitions:

1 . Listed; equipment or device of a kind mentioned whi ch:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 1





a . Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which m akes

periodic inspection of production of such equipm ent.

b . States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards

or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified m anne r.

2 . Labeled; equipment or device is whe n:

a . It embodies a valid la be l, sym bol , or other identifying mark of a

nationally recognized testing laboratory such as Underwriters

Laboratories, In c.

b . The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of

such equipment.

c . The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized

standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified ma nner .

3 . Certified; equipment or product is whi ch:

a . Has been tested and found by a nationally recognized testing

laboratory to meet nationally recognized standards or to be safe

for use in a specified mann er.

b . Production of equipment or product is periodically inspected by a

nationally recognized testing laboratory.

c. Bears a la be l, ta g, or other record o f certificat ion.

4 . Nationally recognized testing laborat ory; laboratory which i s

approved , in accordance with OSHA re gulati ons, by the Secretary of

Labor.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)

A . Manufacturers Qualificati ons: The manufacturer shall regularly and

presently p rodu ce, as one o f the manufacturer's principal prod ucts , the

equipment and material specified for this proj ect, and shall h ave

manufactured the item for at least three yea rs .

B . Product Qualification:

1 . Manufacturer's product shall have been in satisfactory operat ion, on

three installations of similar size and type as this pro jec t, for

approximately three yea rs .

2 . The Government reserves the right to require th e Contractor to submit

a list of installations where the products have been in operation

before approva l.

C . Service Qualific ations: There shall be a permanent service organization

maintained or trained by the manufacturer which wi ll render satisfactory

service to this installation within four hour s of receipt of

notification that service is ne eded. Submit name and address of service

organizations.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 2





1.5 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS

A . Materials and equipment furnished sha ll be of current production by

manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such i te ms , for

which replacement parts shall be availab le.

B . When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is req uired, such

units shall be the product of a single manuf acturer.

C . Equipment Assemblies and Components :

1 . Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same

manufacturer.

2 . Manufacturers of equipment assem blies , which include components made

by o th ers , shall assume complete responsibility for the final

assembled unit.

3 . Components shall be compatible with each other and with the tot al

assembly for the intended se rvic e.

4 . Constituent parts which are similar shal l be the product of a single

manufacturer.

D. Factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and

on all wiring diagrams .

E . When Factory Testing Is Specif ied:

1 . The Government shall have the option of witnessing factory te st s. The

contractor shall notify the VA through the Resident Engineer a

minimum of 15 working days prior to the manufacturers making the

factory te sts .

2 . Four copies of certified test reports containing all test data shall

be furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to final inspection and

not more than 90 days after completion of the te sts .

3 . When equipment fails to meet factory test and re-inspection is

required , the contractor shall be liable for all additional expens es,

including expenses of the Governmen t.

1.6 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A . Where variations from the contract requirements are requested in

accordance with Section 00 7 2 0 0 , GENERAL CONDITIONS and Section 01 33

2 3 , SHOP DRA WINGS , PRODUCT DAT A, AND S AMP LES, the connecting work and

related components shall inc lude , but not be limited to additions or

changes t o branch circuits, circuit protective device s, conduit s, wir e,

feede rs, cont rols , panels and installation meth ods.

1.7 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A . Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage

against physical d amage , di rt , moisture, cold and rai n:

1 . During installation, enclosures, equipment, controls, controllers,

circuit protective de vic es, and other like i te ms , shall be protected

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 3





against entry of foreign matt er ; and be vacuum cleaned both inside

and outside before testing and operating and repainting if required.

2 . Damaged equipment shall b e , as determined by th e Resident Engine er,

placed in first class operating condition or be returned to the

source of supply for repair or replacem ent.

3 . Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable

heavy kraft pape r, sheet vinyl or eq ua l.

4 . Damaged paint on equipment and materia ls shall be refinished wit h the

same quality of paint and workmanship a s used by the manufacturer so

repaired areas are not obv iou s.

1.8 WORK PERFORMANCE

A . All electrical work must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC),

NFPA 70 B, NFPA 70 E , OSHA Part 1910 subpart J, OSHA Part 1910 subpart S

and OSHA Part 1910 subpart K in addition to other references required by

contract.

B . Job site safety and worker safety is the responsibility of t he

contractor.

C . Electrical work shall b e accomplished with all affected circuits or

equipment de-en ergize d. When an electrical outage cannot be accomplished

in this manner for t he required w or k, the following requirements are

mandatory:

1 . Electricians must use full protective equipment (i.e., certified and

tested insulating material to cover exposed energized electrical

compone nts, certified and tested insulated to ol s, et c. ) while working

on energized systems in accordance with NFPA 7 0E .

2 . Electricians must wear personal protective equipment while working on

energized systems in accordance with NFPA 7 0E .

3 . Before initiating any wo rk, a job specific work plan must be

developed by the contractor with a peer review conducted and

documented by the Resident Engineer and Medical Center st aff . The

work plan must include procedures to be used on and near the live

electrical equipme nt, barriers to be installe d, safety equipment to

be used and exit path ways .

4 . Work on energized circuits or equipment cannot begin until prior

written approval is obtained from the Director of the Medical Cente r.

D. For work o n existing stat ions , arr ange , phase and perform work to assure

electrical service for other buildings at all t im es. Refer to Article

OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS under Section 01 0 0 0 0 , GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS.

E . New work shall be installed and connected to existing work neatly and

care full y. Disturbed or damaged work shall be replaced or repaired t o

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 4





its prior condi tions , as required by Section 01 0 0 0 0 , GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS.

F. Coordinate location of equipment and conduit with other trades to

minimize interferences.

G. Verify and ensure no interruptions to operation of the basement floo r.

1.9 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS

A . Equipment location shall be a s close as practical to locations shown on

the drawings.

B . Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the NEC for all

voltages specified.

C . Inaccessible Equipme nt:

1 . Where the Government determines that the Contractor ha s installed

equipment not conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance,

the equipment shal l be removed and reinstalled a s directed at n o

additional cost to the Governme nt.

2 . "Conveniently acce ssibl e" is defined as being capable of being

reached without the use of l adde rs, or without climbing or crawling

under or over obstacles such a s , but not limited t o, moto rs, pum ps,

belt guar ds, transformers, piping, ductwork, conduit and raceways.

1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A . In addition to the requirements of the NE C, install an identification

sign which clearly indicat es information required for use and

maintenance of it ems such a s panel boards, cabi nets , motor controllers

(starters), safety s witc hes, separately enclosed circuit break ers,

individual breakers and controllers in switchboa rds, switchgear and

motor control ass embli es, control devices and other significant

equipment.

B . Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin wit h a white core

with engraved let tering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 in ch) hig h. Secure

nameplates with scre ws. Nameplates that are furnished by manufacturer as

a standard catalog i te m, or where other method of identification i s

herein specified, are excepti ons.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A . Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 2 3 , SHOP DRA WING S, PRODUCT D ATA ,

AND SAMPLES .

B . The Government's approval sha ll be obtained for all equipment and

material before delivery to th e job si te . Delive ry, storage or

installation of equipment or material which has not had prior approval

will not be permitted at the job si te .

C . All submittals shall include adequate descriptive literatu re, catalog

cuts, shop drawings and other data necessary for the Government to

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 5





ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with

specification requirements. Catalog cuts submitted for approval shall

be legible and clearly identify equipment being submitted.

D. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies which consist

of more than one item or component shall be made for the system o r

assembly as a who le . Partial submittals will not be considered for

approval.

1 . Mark the submi ttals , "SUBMITTED UNDER SECTION " .

2 . Submittals shall be marked to show specification reference including

the section and paragraph num bers .

3 . Submit each section sepa rately.

E . The submittals shall include the follo wing:

1 . Information that confirms compliance with contract requi rements.

Include the manufacturer's n am e, model or catalog n umb ers , catalog

information, technical data shee ts, shop d rawings, pictures,

nameplate data and test reports as r equired.

2 . Submittals are required for al l equipment anchors and sup ports .

Submittals shall include wei ght s, dimens ions, center of gravi ty,

standard conn ect ion s, manufacturer's recommendations and behavior

problems (e .g. , vibrat ion, thermal expans ion,) associated with

equipment or piping so that the proposed installation ca n be properly

reviewed.

3 . Elementary and interconnection wiring di agrams for communication and

signal syst ems , control system and equipment ass emblie s. All terminal

points and wiring shall be identified on wiring diagr ams.

4 . Parts list which shall include those replacement par ts recommended by

the equipment manufacturer , quantity o f p ar ts , current price and

availability of each pa rt .

F. Ma nual s: Submit in accordance with Section 0 1 00 0 0 , GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS.

1 . Maintenance and Operation Manu als : Submit as required for systems and

equipment specified in the technical sec tion s. Furnish four co pi es ,

bound in hardback b inde rs, (manufacturer's standard bin ders) or an

approved e quivalen t. Furnish one complete manual as specified in the

technical section but in no case later than prior to performance of

systems or equipment tes t, and furnish the remaining manuals prior to

contract completion.

2 . Inscribe the following identification on the cov er: the words

"MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANU AL," the name and location of the

syste m, equip ment, build ing, name of Co ntracto r, and contract numb er.

Include in the manual the n am es , addr esse s, and telephone numbers of

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 6





each subcontractor installing the system or equipment and the local

representatives for the system or eq uipmen t.

3 . Provide a "Table of Content s" and assemble the manual to conform to

the table of c onte nts, with tab sheets placed before instructions

covering the su bjec t. The instructions shall be legible and easily

rea d, with large sheets of drawings folded i n .

4 . The manuals shall includ e:

a. Internal and interconnecting wiring and control diagrams with data

to explain detailed operation and control of the equipme nt.

b . A control sequence describing sta rt-u p, operat ion, and s hutdo wn.

c. Description of the function of each principal item of equi pment.

d. Installation and maintenance instructio ns.

e . Safety precautions.

f. Diagrams and illustrations.

g. Testing metho ds.

h . Performance data .

i . Lubrication schedule including ty pe , gra de, temperature ran ge, and

frequency.

j . Pictorial "exploded" parts list with part num bers . Emphasis shall

be placed on the use of special tools and instrument s. The list

shall indicate sources of sup ply, recommended spare p ar ts , and

name of servicing organi zation.

k. A ppendix; list qualified permanent servicing organizations for

support of t he equi pment , including addresses and certified

qualifications.G. Approvals will be based on complete submission of manuals together with

shop drawings.

H . After approval and prior to i nstallation, furnish the Resident Engineer

with one sample of each of the following:

1 . A 300 mm (12 in ch) length of each type and size of wire and cable

along with the tag from the coils of reels from which the samples

were take n.

2 . Each type of conduit co uplin g, bushing and termination fi tting.

3 . Conduit hange rs, clamps and suppor ts.

4 . Duct sealing compoun d.

5 . Each type of receptacle, toggle switch , outlet b ox , manual motor

star ter, device pla te , engraved na mepla te, wire and cable splicing

and terminating material and single pole molded case circuit br eaker .

6. Each type o f light fixture specified in Section 26 51 0 0 , INTERIOR

LIGHTING or shown on the drawi ngs.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 7





1.12 SINGULAR NUMBER

A . Where any device or part of equipment is referred to in these

specifications in th e singular number (e. g., "the switch"), this

reference shall be deemed to apply to a s many such devices as are

required to complete the installation as shown on the dr awing s.

1.13 PCB EQUIPMENT

A . This project requires the remo val , transport and disposal of electrical

equipment containing Polychlorinated Biphenyl ( PC B) in accordance with

the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA).

B . The equipment for removal is shown on the draw ings .

C . The selective demolition shall be in accordance with Section 01 00 0 0 ,

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

1.14 TRAINING

A . Training shall be provided i n accordance with Ar ticl e, INSTRUCTI ONS, of

Section 01 00 0 0 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.B . Training shall be provided for the particular equipment or system as

required in each associated specification.

C . A training schedule shall be developed and submitted by th e contractor

and approved by th e Resident Engineer at least 30 days prior to the

planned training.

1.15 REFERENCES

A . Commissioning requirements for Electrical Syst ems : Section 01 91 1 3 ,

GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS .

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 11 - 8




SECTION 26 05 13 – MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This section specifies the furn ishing, installation and connection of

the high voltage cable s.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Bedding of cond uits: Section 31 2 0 0 0 , EARTH MOV ING.

B . General electrical requirement and items that are common to more than

one section of Division 2 6 : Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION S.

C . Conduits for high voltage cab les : Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .

D. Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path

for possible ground fault cur rent s: Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND

BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM S.1.3 SUBMITTALS

A . Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 2 3 , SHOP DRAW INGS , PRODUCT

DAT A, AND SAMPLES and Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS.

B . Shop Drawings:

1 . Sufficient informati on, clearly presented, shall be included to

determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2 . Include splice and termination kit information prior to purchase and

installation.

3 . Provide cable minimum bend r adi us, and flammability da ta.

C. Samples:

1 . After approval and prior to instal lation, furnish the Resident

Engineer with a 3 00 mm (12 inc hes) length of each type and size of

wire and cable along with the tag from the coils or reels from which

the samples were t ake n. The sample shall contain the manufacturers

markings.

D. Certifications:

1 . Factory test repo rts: Prior to installation of the c abl es, deliver

four copies of the manufacturers certified NEMA WC 71 or WC 7 4 ,

standard factory test reports to the Resident Eng ine er. Certified

copies of test data shall show conformance with the referenced

standards and shall be approved prior to delivery of cable.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 1





2 . Field Test Rep orts : Test Reports on the following shall be in

accordance with the paragraph entitled “Field Test s for High Voltage

Cables” and include the following te sts :

a. High Potential Tests

b . Dielectric Absorption Testsc. Radiographic Tests

After testi ng, submit four certified copies of each of the graphs

specified under field testi ng, to the Resident Eng ineer. Adequate

information shall be included identifying the cable locations,

types, voltage rating and siz es.

3 . Splices and termin ations, after having been installed and teste d,

deliver four copies of a certificate by the Contractor to the

Resident Engineer which includes the following:

a. A statement that the mater ials, detail drawings and printedinstructions us ed , are those contained in the kits approved for

this contract.

b . A statement that each splice and each termination was completely

installed without any overnight interruption.

c. A statement that field made splices and terminations conform t o

the following requiremen ts:

1 ) Pencil the cable insulation precise ly.

2 ) Connector installations :

a ) Use tools that are designed for the connectors beinginstalled.

b ) Round and smooth the installed connectors to min imize

localized voltage stressing of the insulating materials.

3 ) Remove contaminants from all surfaces within the splice s and

terminations before installing the insulating materials.

4 ) Solder block throughout stranded grounding wires that will

penetrate the splicing and terminating materials.

5 ) Use mirrors to observe the installation of materials on th e

backsides of the splices and terminati ons.

6 ) Eliminate air voids throughout the splices and termina tions.

7 ) Stretch each layer of tape properly during installation.

d. List all of the materials purchased and installed for the spl ices

and terminations for this contract including the material

descripti ons, manufacturer's na me s, catalog numbers and total

quantities.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 2





E . Power Company Ap prova l: Prior to co nstruction, obtain written approval

from the power company that will supply electrical service for t he

following items:

1 . Service entrance ca ble s. Obtain the power company’s written approval

on the submittal papers for the cables before submitting them for VAapproval.

2 . Employees who will splice and terminate the service entrance cabl es.

F. Installer Approval :

1. Employees who install the splices and terminations and test the

cables shall have not less than five years of experience splicing

and terminating cables which are equal to those being spliced and

term inate d, including experience with the materials in the kits.

2 . Furnish satisfactory proof of such experience for each employee who

splices or terminates the cab les .G. Cable Voltage Ratings

1. Medium voltage power cables shall include multiple and single-

conductor cable rated as fol lows :

a ) 5000 Volts shall be used on 4160 3-phase 60hz distribution

systems.

b ) 15000 volts shall be used on 12,470, 13,200 and 13,800V 3 phase

60hz distribution system s.

H. Shipment:

1 . Cable shall be shipped on reels such that cable will be protectedfrom mechanical inj ury . Each end of each length of cable shall be

hermetically sealed and securely attached to the reel.

1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A . Publications listed below (including ame ndment s, adde nda, revis ions,

supplements and er rat a) form a part of this specification to the exten t

refer enced . Publications are referenced in the text by the designation

onl y. Refer to latest edition of publication.

1 . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed

Copper Wire

B . Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engin eers, In c. (IEEE):

386 Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power

Distribution Systems above 600 V

400.2 Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable

Systems

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 3





404 Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded

Cable Joints Rated 2500-500,000 Volts

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

WC 71 Standard for Non-Shielded Cables Rated 200 1-

5000 Volts for Use in the Distribution ofElectrical Energy (ICEA S-96-65 9)

WC 74 5-46 KV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the

Transmission and Distribution of Electrical

Energy (ICEA S-9 3-969)

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70 National Electrical Code (NE C)

E . Underwriters Laboratories ( U L ) :

1072 Medium-Voltage Power Cables

PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE

A . High voltage cable shall be in accordance with the NEC and NEMA WC 71 ,

WC74 and UL 1072 .

B. Shall be single conductor stranded copper conforming to ASTM B3 .

C. Insulation:

1 . Insulation level shall be 133 percent.

2 . Types of insulation:

a. Cable type abbreviati on, EP R: Ethylene propylene rubber

insulation shall be thermosetting, light and heat stabilized.

B. Cable type ab breviation, CC LP: Polyethylene insulation shall be

thermosetting, light and heat stabilized, chemically crosslinked.

c. In wet loca tions , anti-tree CCLP or EPR shall be us ed.

d. Cable type abbre viati on, XLPE cross-linked polyethylene insulated

shielded shall be thermo setti ng, light and heat stabilized

chemically cross-linked.

e. For series type outdoor lighting sy ste ms, install the direct

buri al, series lighting system type cables shown on the drawi ngs.

The cables shall be designed for direct burial whether or not

they are installed in underground raceways.

D. Conductors and insulation shall be wrapped separately with

semiconducting ta pe .

E . Insulation shall be wrapped with non-mag neti c, metallic shielding

except for cables for series type lighting sy stem s.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 4





F. Heavy du ty , overall protective jackets of chlorosulphonated

polyethylen e, neoprene or polyvinyl chloride shall enclose every cab le.

G. Cable temperature ratings for continuous ope rat ion, emergency overload

operation and short circuit operation shall be not less than the N EC ,

NEMA WC71 or NEMA WC74 Standard for the respective cable.H . Manufacturer's name and other pertinent information sha ll be marked or

molded clearly on the overall outside surface of the jac kets , or

incorporated on marker tapes within the cables at reasonable intervals.

2.2 MATERIAL, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A . The materials shall be compatible with the con ductor s, insulations and

protective jackets on the cables and wire s.

B . The splices shall insulate and protect the conductors not les s than the

insulation and protective jackets on the cables and wires that protect

the con ductors . In locations where moisture might be p rese nt, thesplices shall be w atertight. In manholes and handholes the splices

shall be submersible .

C . Splicing and Terminating Fittin gs: Shall be in accordance with IEEE

386, 4 0 4 .

1 . Shall be heavy d uty , pressure type fi ttin gs, which will assure

satisfactory performance of the connections under conditions of

temperature cycling and magnetic forces from available short circuit

currents.

2 . The fittings shall be suitably designed and the proper size for th ecables and wires being spliced and termi nated . Terminations to bu s

shall be with two hole lugs.

3 . Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory fitti ngs have

been inst alle d, contractor shall replace the unsatisfactory

installations with approved fittings at no additional cost to t he

Government.

D. Splicing and Terminating Kits:

1. General:

a . Shall be assembled by the manufacturer or supplier of the

materials and shall be packaged for individual splices and

terminations or for groups of splices and t erminations .

b . Shall consist of materials designed for the cables being spliced

and terminated and shall be suitable for the prevailing

environmental conditions .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 5





c. Shall include detail drawings and printed instructions for each

type of splice and termination being inst alle d, as prepared by

the manufacturers of the materials in the kits.

d. Detail d rawi ngs, and printed instructions shall indicate the

cable ty pe , voltage rati ng, manufacturer's name and catalognumbers for the materials indi cated.

e . Voltage ratings for the splices and terminations shall be not

less than the voltage ratings for the cables on which they are

being installed.

f. Shall include shielding and stress cone materials .

2 . Taped splices and terminations with insulating and semi-conducting

rubber tapes shall withstand 200 percent elongation without

cra cki ng, rupturing or reducing their electric and self-bonding

characteristics by more than 5 perce nt.3 . Epoxy resin kits shall be as follo ws:

a. Compatible with the cable insulations and jackets and make the

splices watertight and submers ible.

b . Thermosetting and generate its own heat so that external fire or

heat will not be required.

c. Set solid and cure in approximately 60 minutes in 21 degree C

(70 degree F ) ambient temperature.

d. Not deteriorate when subjected to o i l, wat er, ga se s, salt wa ter ,

sewage and fungus.e . Furnished in pre-measured qu ant iti es, sized for each splice and

each term inat ion, with two resin components in an easy mixing

plastic bag which will permit mixing the resin without entrapping

air or conta mina nts. Other methods of packaging and mixing the

epoxy resin components will be considered for ap pro val , provided

they include adequate safeguards to assure precise proportioning

of the resin components and to prevent entrapping air and

contaminants.

f. Use snap-together, longitudinally-split, interlocking seam ,transplant mold bodies or taped fra mew ork s, injection fi ttings

and injection gun or pouring equ ipme nt. Completely fill void s

within the splices and termina tions.

E . Pre-molded Rubber Splices and Terminatio ns:

1 . Splices and terminations shall be in accordance with IEEE 3 86 , and

404.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 6





2 . Pre-molded rubber devices shall have a minimum of 3 mm (0.125 inch)

semi-conductive shield material covering the entire housi ng. Test

each rubber part prior to shipment from the factory.

3 . Grounding of metallic shields shall be accomplished by a solder less

connector enclosed in a watertight rubber housing covering theentire asse mbly . The grounding device and splice or terminator sh all

be of same manufacturer to insure electrical integrity of th e

shielded parts.

4 . The pre-molded parts shall be suitable for indo or, outdo or,

submersib le, or direct-burial appl ications.

2.3 MATERIAL, FIREPROOFING TAPE

A . The tape shall consist of a fle xible , conformable fabric of organic

composition coated one side with flame-retardant elastomer.

B . The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion.It shall be arc proof and fir eproof.

C . The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to wa ter , ga se s, salt

wat er, sew age , or fu ngu s. It shall be resistant to sunlight and

ultraviolet light.

D. The finished application shall withstand a 200 ampere arc for not le ss

than 30 seconds.

E . Securing ta pe : Shall be glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18

mm (7 mils ) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide.

2.4 MATERIAL, WARNING TAPE

A. The tape shall be standard, 76 mm (3 inch ) wid e, 4-Mil polyethylene

detectable type with aluminum backing.

B . The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION BURIED

ELECTRIC LINE BEL OW” .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE

A . Installation shall be in accordance with the NE C, and as shown on the

drawings.

B . Contractor shall ensure that radii of bends fitt ings , cable ri ser s, and

other conditions are suitable for the cable and conform with th e

recommendations of the cable manufact urer.

C . Cable shall be installed in underground duct b an ks , in conduit above

and below gr ade ; inside buildin gs, on insulator hoo ks ; on racks in wall

and ceiling mounted cable trays in utility tunnels and ma nho les ; and by

direct burial .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 7





D. Cables shall be secured with heavy duty cable ties in existing or new

trays mounted ho rizontally, where cable rests on tray bottom .

E . Cables shall be secured with PVC coated metallic non-metallic cable

clamps, str aps , han gers , or other approved supporting devices to tunnel

walls, ceil ings , and in new or existing cable trays mounted vertically,where tray bottom is in a vertical pla ne.

F. Contractor shall ensure that all cable tray is properly secured and

supported prior to installing new armored ca bl e. Contractor shall add

new permanent and/or temporary tray support device s as required to

preclude cable tray failure during cable pulling or after cable is

installed.

G. Cable or conductors of a primary distribution system shall be rejected

when installed openly in cable trays or openly racked along int erior

walls; in the same raceway or conduit with AC/DC control circuits or acpower circuits operating at less than 6 00 vo lt s; or in a manner

allowing cable to support its own weight .

H . Use suitable lubricating compounds on the cables and wire s to prevent

damage to them during pul ling -in. Provide compounds that are not

injurious to the cable and wire jackets and do not harden or become

adhesive.

I . Splice the cables and wires only in manholes and accessible ju nction

boxes. Ground shields in accordance with Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING

AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.J. In m anho les, trenches and vaults install the cables on suitable

porcelain insulators with steel cables r ack s. Ground cable racks in

accordance with Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS.

K. In m anho les, underground raceways and other outdoors loca tions:

1 . Seal the cable ends prior to pulling them in to prevent the entry of

moisture.

2 . For ethylene propylene rubber and polyethylene insulated c ab le s, use

bags of epoxy resin that are not less than 6 mm (1 /4 inc h) larger indiameter than the overall diameter of the ca bl e. Clean each end of

each cable before installing the epoxy resin over it.

3.2 PROTECTION DURING SPLICING OPERATIONS

A . Blowers shall be provided to force fresh air into manholes or confined

areas where free movement or circulation of air is obstructed.

Waterproof protective coverings shal l be available on the work site to

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 8





provide protection against moisture while a splice is being made.

Pumps shall be used to keep manholes dry during splicing operations.

Under no conditions shall a splice or termination be made with th e

interior of a cable exposed to moi stu re. Conductor insulation paper

shall be moisture-tested before the splice is m ad e. A manhole ring at

least 150 mm (6 inc hes ) above ground shall be used around the manhole

entrance to keep surface water from entering the man hol e. Unused duc ts

shall be plugged and water seepage through ducts in use shall be

stopped before the splice is start ed.

3.3 PULLING CABLES IN DUC TS, MANHOLES AND UTILITY TUNNELS

A . Medium-voltage cable s shall be pulled into ducts and utility tunnels

with equipment designed for this pu rpos e, including power-driven win ch,

cable-feeding flexible tube gui de, cable gri ps , and lubricants . A

sufficient number of trained personnel and equipment shal l be employedto ensure the careful and proper installation of the c abl e.

B . Cable reel shall be set up at the side of the manhole or tunnel hatch

opening and above the duct or hatch l ev el , allowing the cable to enter

through the opening without reverse bendi ng. Flexible tube guide shall

be installed through the opening in a manner that will prevent the

cable from rubbing on the edges of any structural member.

C . Pulling force for a cable grip on lead-sheathed cable shal l not exceed

manufacturer’s recom mendat ion. A dynamometer shall be used in the

pulling line to ensure that the pulling force is not exce eded . Pullingforce for a nonmetallic-sheathed cabl e shall not exceed the smaller of

4400 Newton (1,000 po und s) or a value computed from the following

equation:

TM = 0.008 X N X CM

Wh ere : TM = maximum allowable pulling tension in Newton poun ds

N = number of conductors in the cable

CM = cross-sectional area of each conductor in square millimeter

circular mils.

D. Cable shall be unreeled from the top of the reel. Payout shall be

carefully cont rolle d. Cable to be pulled shall be attached through a

swivel to the main pulling wire by means of a //pulling ey e/ / suitable

cable grip permitted only on cables less than 60 mm (200 -fe et) long and

less than 50 mm (2 inch es) in diamet er//.

E . Woven-wire cable grip s shall be used to grip the cable end when pulling

small cables and short straight lengths of heavier cab les .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 9





F. Pulling eyes shall be attached to the cable conductors to prevent

damage to the cable structure.

G. Pulling eyes and cable grips shall be used together for nonmetallic

sheathed cables to prevent damage to the cable structu re.

H.

Cables shall be liberally coated with a suitable cable-pullinglubricant as it enters the tube guide or duc t. Grease and oil

lubricants shall be used only on lead-sheathed c ab le s. Nonmetallic

sheathed cables shall be covered with wire-pulling compounds when

required which have no deleterious effects on the cabl e. Rol lers ,

she ave s, or tube guides around which the cable is pulled shall conform

to the minimum bending radius of the cabl e.

I . Cables shall be pulled into ducts at a reasonable speed not in exc ess

of maximum permissible pulling tension specified by the cable

manufacturer. Cable pulling using a vehicle shall not be permitted.Pulling operations shall be stopped immediately with any indication of

binding or obstruction and shall not be resumed until such difficulty

is corr ected . Sufficient slack shall be provided for free movement of

cable due to expansion or contraction .

J. Cable splices made up in manholes or utility tunnels shall be firmly

supported on cable racks as indic ated. No cable splices shall be pulled

in du cts . Cable ends shall overlap at the ends of a section to provide

sufficient undamaged cable for splici ng. Cables to be spliced in

manholes or utility tunnels shall overlap the centerline of t heproposed joint by not less than 600 mm (2 feet).

K . Cables cut in the field shall have the cut ends immediately sealed to

prevent entrance of mo istu re. Nonleaded cables shall be sealed with

rubber tape wrapped down to 75 mm (3 inch es) from the cable en d.

Rubber tape shall be cover-wrapped with polyvinylchloride ta pe . Lead -

Covered cables shall be sealed with wiping metal making a firm bond

with the end of th e sheath or with a disk of lead fitted ov er the end

and wiped to the sheath .

3.4 INSTALLATION, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A . Install the materials as recommended by their manufacturer including

special precautions pertaining to air temperature during installation.

B . Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE), Ethylene Propylene Rubber and

Polyethylene Insulated Ca ble s:

1 . Cables rated 5000 volts or less: Install epoxy resin splices and

terminati ons, or pre-molded rubber splices and terminati ons.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 10





2 . Cables rated more than 5000 vo lts : Install taped splices and

terminati ons, or pre-molded rubber splices and terminat ions.

C . Installation shall be accomplished by qualified personne l trained to

accomplish high voltage equipment instal lati ons. All instructions of

the manufacturer shall be followed in de tai l.D. Splices shall be made in manholes or tunnels except where cable

terminations are specifically indic ated. Splicing and terminating of

cables shall be expedited to minimize exposure and cable deterioration.

E . Cables shall be terminated in pot hea ds. Dry terminations with medium

voltage penn ants , preformed, and hand wrapped stress cones may be used

for terminating ca bl es . Potheads shall be provided with adequate me ans

for making external connections to the cable conductors of single or

multiple conductor ca bl es ; protecting the cable insulation against

moistu re, oi l, or other contaminant; physically protecting andsupporting ca ble s, and maintaining the insulation level of the cab le.

F. Pothead terminations shall be field fabricated from termination kits

supplied by and in accordance with the pothead m anufacturer’s

recommendations for the ty pe , si ze , and electrical characteristics of

the cable .

G. Installation shall include built-up or prefabricated he at or cold

shrink stress-relief con es at the terminals of all shielded cable s and

at the terminals of single-conductor lead-covered c ables rated 15 kV

and a bove , ungrounded.H . Cable splices shall be field fabricated from splicing kit s supplied by

and in accordance with cable manufacturer’s recommendations for the

type, si ze , and electrical characteristics of the cable specified.

Cable splices in manholes shall be located midway between cable racks

on walls of manholes and supported with cable arms at approximately t he

same elevation as the enclosing du ct .

I . Cable splices in the tunnel that are not installed in cable trays sh all

be installed on cable racks or by other approved methods that wi ll

minimize physical stress on the splice con nections. Splices shall besupported at approximately the same elevation as the installed cable

except where space limitations or existing cable length limitations

make this method impractical or impossibl e.

J. Universal demountable splices shall be supported in such manner s o as

to minimize physical stress on the splice connecti ons. Each cable end

termination shall be supported using a pair of saddle type supports

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 11





under the cable end termination and/or cable with a minimum 300 mm ( 12

inch es) and a maximum 75 0 mm (30 in ches ) separation between the

sup port s. Cable end termination and cable shall be secured to the

supports in such a manner as to prevent movement of termination or

cable at the s uppor t. Saddle type supports shall be installed on

galvanized steel framing channel anchored to the wall or securely

fastened to the cable tray or installed by other approved methods.

3.5 MULTIPLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS

A . Multiple-conductor pothead s shall be hermetically sealed cap-nut type

and shall be suitable for the t yp e, si ze , and electrical

characteristics of the ca ble . Potheads shall consist of bells or bodies

with bell caps lids, bushing, cable connectors, lugs, and entrance

fittings.

B . Pothead bells or bodies shall be cast iron aluminum with mountingbrackets as require d, pipe plugs for filings and vent h ol es , machine-

flanged surfaces for bell caps lids, and cable entrance fittings .

Pothead bell caps lids for cables up to 1 30 mm ² (250 Kcmils), 250

amperes shall be cast iron alumi num; and for cables of larger size and

higher current ratings shall be cast aluminum bronze nonmagnetic metal

cas tin g. Bell caps Lids shall have matching machined flanged surf aces

for sealing with gasket and cap-screw connections.

C . Bushings shall be glazed wet-process electrical porcelain insul ators,

factory assembled and hermetically sealed to bell cap lid.D. Cable connectors shall be high-conductivity copper accurately machined

and threaded for internal and external electrical connections. Cross -

sectional and contact area s shall be adequate to carry the full-load

current rating of the conducto rs. Cable connectors shall be solder type

with gasket seal between the connector and bushing.

E . Cable-entrance fittings shall be cast-bronze wiping-sleeve type for

lead-covered ca bl e, and cast-aluminum positive-sealed stuffing boxes

for non-lead-covered ca bl es . Conduit couplings and armor base fittings

shall be cast iro n.

F. Three-conductor potheads with a neutral stud and lug may be used in

lieu of four-conductor potheads in four-wire grounded neutral systems.

G. Potheads shall be completely fille d, leaving no gaps or v oi ds , with an

insulating compound suitable for the type of c abl e, insulatio n, voltage

ra tin g, and ambient operating temperatures in accordance with the

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 12





pothead manufacturer’s rec ommend ations . Pothead parts that do not carry

current shall be gr ounded.

3.6 SINGLE-CONDUCTOR POTHEADS

A . Single-conductor potheads shall be the hermetically sealed cap-nut type

and shall be suitable for the ty pe , si ze , and electricalcharacteristics of the cable spe cifie d. Potheads shall consist of ca st

bodies, bushings, cable connectors, lugs, and entrance fittings .

B . Pothead bodies shall be metal castings with mounting br ack ets , when

require d, pipe plugs for filling and vent ho le s, and machined flanged

surface for cable-entrance fittin g. Bodies shall be cast iron for

cables up to 1 30 mm ² (250 kc mil s) 250 am per es, and cast aluminum

bronze nonmagnetic meta l casting for cable of larger size and higher

current rating s.

C . Bushings shall be glazed wet-process electrical porcelain insu lators,factory assembled and hermetically sealed to the pothead body.

D. Cable connectors shall be high-conductivity copper accurately machined

and threaded for internal and external electrical connections . Cross -

sectional and contract area s shall be adequate to carry the full-load

current rating of the conducto rs. Cable connectors shall be solder type

with gasket seal between the connector and bushing.

E . Potheads shall be completely fi lled, leaving n o gaps or vo id s, with an

insulating compound suitable for the type of c abl e, insulatio n, voltage

ra tin g, and ambient operating temperatures in accordance with thepothead manufacturer’s rec ommend ations . Pothead parts that do not carry

current shall be gr ounded.

3.7 INSTALLATION, FIREPROOFING

A . Cover al l power cables located in m anho les, handholes and junction

boxes with arc proof and fireproof ta pe .

B . Apply the tape in a single la ye r, one-half lapped or as recommended by

the manufacturer. Install the tape with the coated side towards the

cable and extend it not less than 25 mm (one in ch) into each duc t.

C . Secure the tape in place by a random wrap of glass cloth ta pe .

3.8 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION

A . In each manhole and pullbox install permanent tags on each circuit's

cables and wires to clearly designate their circuit identification and

voltage. In manholes the tags shall be the embossed brass type and

shall also show the cable type and voltage ratin g. Position the t ags so

they will be easy to read after the fireproofing is installed.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 13





3.9 INSTALLATION, DIRECT BURIAL CABLE

A . Installation shall be in accordance with the NE C.

B . Tops of the cables shall be :

1 . Not less than 750 mm (3 0 inches ) and not less than shown on the

drawings below the finished g rad e.2 . Not less than 60 mm 75 0 mm (24 inch es) and not less than shown on

the drawings below road and other pavement surfaces.

3 . Do not install them under railroad trac ks.

C . Under road and paved surfa ces, install the cables within bituminous

coat ed, galvanized st ee l, rigid cond uits , not less than 50 mm ( 2 inc h)

trade si ze , with bushings at each end of each conduit ru n.

D. Work with extreme care near existing du ct s, cond uits , cables and other

utilities to prevent any damag e.

E . Cut the trenches neatly and uniformly :1 . Excavating and backfilling is specified in Section 31 20 0 0 , EARTH

MOVING.

2 . Place a 75 mm ( 3 inc h) layer of sand in the trenches before

installing the cab les .

3 . Place a 75 mm (3 in ch) layer of sand over the installed cab les .

4 . Install continu ous, horizon tal, 25 by 2 00 mm ( 1 by 8 inch),

preservative impregnated wood planking three inches above the

installed cables before backfilling.

F. Provide horizontal slack in the cables for contraction during coldweather.

G. Install the cables in continuous leng ths. Splices within cable runs

will not be accept ed.

H . Connections and terminations shall be submersible typ e designed for the

cables being installe d.

I . Warning tape shall be continuously placed 300 mm (12 i nche s) above

buried cable.

3.10 FIELD TESTS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE

A. New Cabl e:

1 . Acceptance tests shall be performed on new and service aged PE X LP E,

PVC and paper cables in accordance with IEEE 400.2 and as specified

herein.

2 . Test new cable after installation, splice s, and terminations have

been ma de , but before connection to equipment and existing ca ble .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 14





3 . Test equipment , labor and technical personnel shall be provided as

necessary to perform the electrical acceptance tes ts . Arranges shal l

be made to have tests witnessed by the Resident En gineer.

B . Service Age Cable:

1 . Maintenance tests shall be performed on service-aged cableinterconnected t o new ca ble . See test voltages belo w.

2 . After new cable test and connection to an existing ca bl e, test the

interconnected ca bl e. Disconnect cable from all equipment that might

be damaged by the test volta ges.

C . Dielectric Absorption T es t: Both new and service aged power cable sh all

be completely isolated from extraneous electrical connections at cable

terminations and joi nts . Safety precautions shall b e obs erved. Each

cable shall be given a full dielectric – absorption test with a 5000v

insulation resistance test s et . Test shall be applied for a long enoughtime to charge the c abl e. Readings shall be recorded every 15 seconds

during the first 3 minutes of test and at 1 minute interv als

thereafter . Test shall continue until three equal readings 1 minute

apart are obtain ed. Minimum readings shall be 200 megohms at an ambient

temperature 20 degrees C (68 degrees F ) . Readings taken at other

temperatures shall be corrected accordingly.

D. High Potential Te st : High potential test shall not be applied to the

XLPE new or service aged ca ble s. All other cables shall be subjected to

the test but only upon successful dielectric absorption test.1 . Leakage current test shall be by high potential dc step volta ge

method.

2 . High potential test shall measure the leakage current from each

conductor to the insulation shie ld. Use corona shi eld s, guard rin gs ,

tapi ng, mason jars, or plastic bags to prevent corona current from

influencing the rea din gs. Unprepared cable shield ends shall be

trimmed back 25 mm ( 1 inc h) or more for each 10 kV of test volta ge.

Upon the successful completion of the high potential test on new and

service aged PE C CL P, PC PVC cables a second dielectric test will berun on the HV cable system to ensure the cables have not been

damaged by the hi-pot test

E . Safety Precautions:

1 . Exercise suitable and adequate safety measures prior t o , duri ng, and

after the high potential te st s, including placing warning sign s and

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 15





preventing people and equipment from being exposed to the te st

voltages.

F. Test Voltages:

1 . New shielded EPR and CCLP cable dc test voltages shall be a s

follows:

Rated Circuit Voltage

Phase-to-Phase Volt

2001-5000

5001-8000

8001-15000

15001-25001

25001-28000

28001-35000

Wire Size

AWG or MCM

8-1000

6-1000

2-1000

1-1000

1-1000

1/0-1000

Test Voltage KV

25

35

65

100

-

-

2 . Existing cable of all types interconnected to a new cable shall b e

tested at 1.7 times the existing cable rated voltage (maintenance

test).

G. High Potential Test Method :

1 . Apply voltage in approximately 8 t o 10 equal ste ps.

2 . Raise the voltage slowly between step s.

3 . At the end of each st ep , allow the charging currents to d eca y, and

time the interval of dec ay.

4 . Read the leakage current and plot a curve of leakage currents versus

test voltage on graph paper as the test progres ses. Read the

leakage current at the same time interval for each voltage ste p.

5 . Stop the test if leakage currents increase excessively or a "kne e"

appears in the curve before maximum test voltage is re ached.

a. For new c abl e, repair or replace the cable and repeat the t es t.

b . For existing cable interconnected to new ca bl e, notify the

Resident Engineer for further instructions.

6. Upon reaching maximum test vo lta ge, hold the voltage for five

min ute s. Read the leakage current at 30 second intervals and plot a

curve of leakage current versus time on the same graph paper as the

step voltage curv e. Stop the test if leakage current starts to ris e,

or decreases and again starts to ri se . Leakage current should

decrease and stabilize for good cab le.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 16





7 . Terminate test and allow sufficient discharge time before testing

the next conductor.

H. Test D at a: Test data shall be recorded and shall include identification

of cable and locat ion, megohm readings versus ti me , leakage current

readings versus tim e, and cable temperature versus ti me .I . Final Acceptance: Final acceptance shall depend upon the satisfactory

performance of the cable under tes t. No cable shall be energized until

recorded test data have been approved by the Resident Eng ine er. Final

test reports shall be provided to the Resident Engineer. Reports shall

have a cover letter/sheet clearly marked with the System n am e, Da te ,

and the words “Final Test Report” Forward to the Resident Engineer for

inclusion in the Maintenance Databas e.

J. Radiographic Te st s: Radiographic tests shall be performed on al l

potheads at the discretion of the Resident Engineer to determine i fvoids exist in the pot head . Unacceptable terminations sha ll be reworked

at no additional expense to the Government.

K . Series Outdoor Lighting Ca bl es : Test the series outdoor lighting system

cables by standard megger methods in lieu of testing by high p otential

methods.

L. The contractor shall furnish the instrume nts, materials and labor for

these test s.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 17





This page intentionally left b lank .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 13 - 18




SECTION 26 05 21 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES (600 VOLTS AND B ELOW)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This section specifies the furn ishing, installation, and connection of

the low voltage power and lighting wiring.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Excavation and backfill for cables that are installed in condu it: per

Civil Engineer and Resident Engin eer.

B . Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of time rated

construction: Section 07 84 0 0 , FIRESTOPPING.

C . General electrical requirements that ar e common to more than one section

in Division 2 6 : Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS.

D. Conduits for cables and wir ing: Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.E . Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path


BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS TEMS .

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A . In accordance with Section 01 33 2 3 , SHOP DRAW INGS , PRODUCT DATA , AND

SAMPL ES, furnish the following:

1 . Manufacturer's Literature and D at a: Showing each cable type and

rating.

2 . Certificate s: Two weeks prior to final inspec tion, deliver to the

Resident Engineer four copies of the certification that the material

is in accordance with the drawings and specifications and has been

properly instal led.



supplements and err ata ) form a part of this specification to the exten t

refer enced . Publications are reference in the text by the basic

designation only. Refer to latest edition of publication.

B . American Society of Testing Material (ASTM):

D2301 Standard Specification for Vinyl ChloridePlastic Pressure Sensitive Electrical Insulating

Tape

C . Federal Specifications ( Fed . Spec.):

A-A-59544 Cable and Wi re , Electrical (Pow er, Fixed

Installation)


MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 21 - 1







E . Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

467 Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors

486C Splicing Wire Connectors

486D Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground

Use or in Damp or Wet Locations

486E Equipment Wiring Terminals for Use with Aluminum

and/or Copper Conductors

493 Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and

Branch Circuit Cable

514B Fittings for Cable and Conduit

1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE AND WIRE (POWER AND LIGHTING)

A . Cable and Wire shall be in accordance with Fe d. Spec . A-A- 5954 4, except

as hereinafter sp ecified.

B . Single Conductor:

1 . Shall be annealed c opper .

2 . Shall be stranded for sizes N o . 8 AWG and l arg er, solid for sizes N o .

10 AWG and small er.

3 . Shall be minimum size N o . 12 A WG , except where smaller sizes are

allowed herein.

C. Insulation:

1 . THW, XHHW, or dual rated THHN-THWN shall be in accordance with UL 4 4 ,

and 83 .

3 . Isolated power system wir ing : Type XHHW with a dielectric constant of

3.5 or less.

D. Color Code :

1 . Secondary serv ice, feeder and branch circuit conductors shall be

color coded as follo ws:

208/120 volt

Black

Red

Blue

Phase

A

B

C

480/277 volt

Brown

Orange

Yellow

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 21 - 2






White Neutral Gray *

* or white with colored (other than gre en) trac er.

a. The lighting circuit “switch legs” and 3-way switch “traveling

wires” shall have color coding unique and distinct ( i. e. pink and

purp le) from the color coding indicated abo ve. The unique color

codes shall be solid and in accordance with the N EC . Field

coordinate for a final color coding with the Resident Engin eer .

2 . Use solid color compound or solid color coating for N o . 12 AWG and

N o . 10 AWG branch circuit conductors and neutral si zes .

3 . Phase conductors No . 8 AWG and larger shall be color-coded using one

of the following method s:

a . Solid color compound or solid color coati ng.

b . Stri pes , ba nd s, or hash marks of color specified ab ove .c. Color as specified using 19 mm (3/4 inc h) wide ta pe . Apply tape in

half overlapping turns for a minimum of 75 mm (three inc hes ) for

terminal poi nts, and in junction box es, pull bo xes , trough s,

manholes, and handh oles. Apply the last two laps of tape with no

tension t o prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are

covered by ta pe , apply tags to cable stating size and insulation

type.

4 . For modifications and additions to existing wiring sy st em s, color

coding shall conform to the existing wiring system.

5 . Color code for isolated power system wiring shall be in acc ordance

with the NEC .

2.2 SPLICES AND JOINTS

A . In accordance with UL 486 A, C , D, E and N EC .

B . Branch circuits (N o. 10 AWG and smaller):

1 . Connector s: Solderl ess, scre w-on , reusable pressure cable ty pe , 600

volt, 105 degree C with integral insu lati on, approved for copper and

aluminum conducto rs.

2 . The integral insulator shall have a skirt to completely cover th e

stripped wires.

3 . The numbe r, si ze , and combination of co nducto rs, as listed on the

manufacturers packaging shall be strictly complied with.

C. Feeder Circu its:

1 . Connectors shall be ind ent, hex sc rew , or bolt clamp-type of high

conductivity and corrosion-resistant material.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 21 - 3






2 . Field installed compression connectors for cable siz es 250 kcmil and

larger shall have not less than two clamping elements or compression

indents per wire .

3 . Insulate splices and joints with materials approved for t he

particular u se , locati on, volt age, and temp erature. Insulate with not

less than that of the conductor level that is being joine d.

4 . Plastic electrical insulating t ap e: ASTM D2304 shall a pply , flame

retard ant, cold and weather re sistant.

2.3 CONTROL WIRING

A . Unless otherwise specified in other sections of these spe cifications,

control wiring shall be as specified for power and lighting wiring,

except the minimum size shall be not less than N o . 14 A WG .

B . Control wiring shall be large enough so that the voltage drop under

inrush conditions does not adversely affect operation of the c ontr ols.

2.4 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND

A . Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used wi th, and shall

not harden or become adhesive.

B . Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power syst ems.

2.5 FIREPROOFING TAPE

A . The tape shall consist of a fle xible , conformable fabric of organic

composition coated one side with flame-retardant elastomer.

B . The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combu stion.

It shall be arc-proof and fire proof.

C . The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to wa ter , ga se s, salt

wat er, sewage , or fungus and b e resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet

light.

D. The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for no t less

than 30 seconds.

E . Securing ta pe : Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm

(7 mi ls) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch ) wid e.

2.6 WARNING TAPE

A. The tape shall be standard, 76 mm (3 inch ) wid e, 4-Mil polyethylene

detectable type.

B . The tape shall be red with black letters indicating “CAUTION B URIED

ELECTRIC LINE BE LOW” .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A . Install in accordance with the N EC , and as specified.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 21 - 4






B . Install all wiring in raceway sys tems , except where direct burial or HCF

Type AC cables are use d.

C . Splice cables and wires only in outlet box es , junction b ox es , pull

boxes, manholes, or handholes.

D. Wires of different systems (i .e . 120 V, 27 7V ) shall not be installed in

the same conduit or junction box syste m.

E . Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the

NEC. Provide split wedge type which firmly clamps each individual cable

and tightens due to cable weig ht.

F. For panelboards, cabinets, wireways, switches, and equipment assemblies,

neatly f orm , tra in, and tie the cables in individual circuit s.

G . Seal cable and wire entering a building from under groun d, between th e

wire and conduit where the cable exits the c ondu it, with a non-hardening

approved compou nd.

H. Wire Pulling:

1 . Provide installation equipment that will prevent the cutting o r

abrasion of insulation during pulling of cables.

2 . Use ropes made of nonmetallic material for pulling feed ers.

3 . Attach pulling lines for feeders by means of either woven baske t

grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the con duc tor s, as

approved by the Resident Engineer.

4 . Pull in multiple cables together in a single cond uit.

I . No more than ( 3) single-phase branch circu its shall be installed in any

one conduit.

J. The wires shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 3 1 0. Neutral

wires, under conditions defined by the NE C, shall be considered curre nt-

carrying conductors .

3.3 SPLICE INSTALLATION

A . Splices and terminations shall be mechanically and electrically se cur e.

B . Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory spl ices or

terminations have been in stalled, remove the devices and install

approved devices at no additional cost to the Governm ent.

3.5 CONTROL AND SIGNAL WIRING INSTALLATION

A . Unless otherwise specified in other sec tion s, install wiring and connect

to equipment/devices to perform the required func tions as shown and

specified.

B . Except where otherwise req uire d, install a separate power supply circuit

for each system so that malfunctions in any system will not affect other

systems.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 21 - 5






C . Where separate power supply circuits are not sho wn, connect the systems

to the nearest panelboards of suitable vo ltag es, which are intended to

supply such systems and have suitable spare circuit breakers or s pace

for installation.

D. Install a red warning indicator on the handle of the branch circuit

breaker for the power supply circuit for each system to preve nt

accidental de-energizing of th e syste ms.

E . System voltages shall be 120 volts or lower where shown on the drawings

or as required by the NEC .

3.6 CONTROL AND SIGNAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A . Install a permanent wire marker on each wire at each termination.

B . Identifying numbers and letters on the wire markers shall correspond to

those on the wiring diagrams used for installing the systems.

C . Wire markers shall retain their markings after cleaning .

D. In each manhole and han dho le, install embossed brass tag s to identify

the system served and function.

3.7 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION

A . In each interior pulbox and junction b ox , install metal tags on each

circuit cables and wires to clearly designate their c ircuit

identification and v oltag e.

B . In each manhole and han dhole , provide tags of the embossed brass t yp e,

showing the cable type and voltage ratin g. Attach the tags to the cables

with slip-free plastic cable lacing uni ts .

3.9 EXISITNG WIRING

A . Unless specifically indicated on the pl an s, existing wiring shall not be

reused for the new insta llati on. Only wiring that conforms to t he

specifications and applicable code s may be reus ed. If existing wiring

does not meet these requ irem ents , existing wiring may not be reused and

new wires shall be installe d.

3.10 FIELD TESTING

A . Feeders and branch circuits shall have their insulation tested after

installation and before connection to utilization devices such as

fixtures, motor s, or appliances.

B . Tests shall be performed by megger and conductors shall test free from

short-circuits and ground s.

C . Test conductor phase-to-phase and phase-t o-ground .

D. The Contractor shall furnish the instrume nts, mater ials, and labor for

these test s.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 21 - 6




SECTION 26 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This section specifies general grounding and bonding requirement s of

electrical equipment operations and to provide a low impedance path for

possible ground fault curre nts.B . “Grounding electrode system” refers to all electrodes required by NE C,

as well as including m ad e, supplementary, lightning protection system

grounding electrodes .

C . The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in t his

specification and have the same mean ing.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General

electrical requirements and items that are common to more than o ne

section of Division 2 6 .

B . Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low Voltage power and lighting wiring.

C . Section 26 41 0 0 , FACILITY LIGHTNING PROTECTION: Requirements for a

lightning protection system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A . Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:



2 . Include the location of system grounding electrode connections and

the routing of aboveground and underground grounding electrode

conductors.

C . Test Repor ts: Provide certified test reports of ground resist ance.

D. Certific ations: Two weeks prior to final inspec tion, submit four copies

of the following to the Resident Engineer :

1 . Certification that the materials and installation is in accordance

with the drawings and specifications.

2 . Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has

been properly installed and tested.


Publications listed below (including am endmen ts, adde nda, revis ions,

supplemen ts, and err ata) form a part of this specification to the

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 1





extent refe rence d. Publications are referenced in the text by the basic

designation on ly. Refer to latest edition of publication.

A . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B1 Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Copper

WireB8 Standard Specification for Concentric-La y-

Stranded Copper Con ductors , Har d, Medium-Hard,

or Soft

B . Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engine ers, In c. (IEEE):

81 IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,

Ground Impe dan ce, and Earth Surface Potentials

of a Ground System

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70 National Electrical Code (NE C)99 Health Care Facilities

D. Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

486A-486B Wire Connectors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A . Equipment grounding conductors shall be UL 83 insulated stranded

copp er, except that sizes 6 mm² (10 AWG ) and smaller shall be solid

cop per . Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment

grounding con ductors , except that wire sizes 25 m m² (4 AW G) and larger

shall be permitted to be identified per NE C.

B . Bonding conductors shall be ASTM B8 bare stranded c opp er, except that

sizes 6 mm ² (10 AWG) and smaller shall be ASTM B1 solid bare copper

wire.

C . Isolated Power Sys tem: Type XHHW- 2 insulation with a dielectric

constant of 3.5 or less.

D. Electrical System G rounding: Conductor sizes shall not be less than

what is shown on the drawings and not less than required by the NE C,

whichever is greater .

2.2 GROUND RODS

A . Copper clad s tee l, 19 mm (3/4-i nch) diameter by 3000 mm (10 fe et) lon g,

conforming to UL 4 67 .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 2





B . Quantity of rods shall be as required to obtain the specified ground

resistance.

C . Self-contained ground ro d( s) using electrolytically enhanced grounding

shall be provided for power system grounding where indicated on t he

dra wing s. The ground rod shall operate by hygroscopically extractingmoisure from the air to activate the electrolytic process improving

perf orma nce. The ground rod system shall be UL listed and have been

manufactured for a minimum of 10 yea rs . The ground rod system shall be

100% self activating sealed and maintenance fr ee . The system shall not

require the addition of chemical or water solutio ns.

D. Electrode unit

1 . The copper ground rod shall consist of 2” nominal diameter hollow

copper tube with a wall thickness of not less than .083”. The tube

shall be permanently capped on the top and bottom . Air breatherholes shall be provided in the top of the tube and drainage hole s

shall be provided in the bottom of the tube for electrolyte draina ge

into the surrounding soil. Shaft configuration: L-shaped Model N o :

K2L-20CS; UL Listing: 467 .

2 . The ground rod shall be filled from the factory with non-hazardo us

Calsolyte to enhance grounding performance.

3 . Ground rod shall be three foot vertical and twenty feet long for

horizontal installati on.

4 . A stranded 4/0 AWG Cu ground wire shall be Cadwelded to the side ofrod for electrode conductor conn ecti on. A clamping “U-bolt” with

pressure plate on the tip end of the tube shall be provided for

testing and temporary connections.

E . Ground Access Box

1 . Provide a precast concrete box with slots for conduit entrance s.

Minimum size shall be ten-inch diameter by twelve hi gh . Provide a

cast ir on , flush traffic rated cover with “breather” sl ot s, XIT

model #XB-12

F. Backfill Material

1 . Natural vol canic , non-corrosive form of bentonite clay grout

backfill material free of polymer sealant. XIT model #L NC .

2 . Shall absorb approximately 14 gallons of water per 50# bag for

optimal 30% solids density.

3 . PH value 8-10 with maximum resistively of 3 ohm-m at 3 0 % solids

density.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 3





G. Manuf acturer: Lyncole XIT Grou nding, 3547 Voyager S T ., Torr ance, CA

90503, Phone 800-962-2 610; or approved e qua l.

H . Ground Wire Termination: Exothermic connection to 4/0 conductor . U-

bolt with pressure plate provided a s test poi nt.

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTSA . Components shall meet or exceed UL 467 and be clearly marked with th e

manufacturer, catalog n umb er, and permitted conductor size(s).

2.4 GROUND CONNECTIONS

A . Below Gr ade : Exothermic-welded type connector s.

B . Above Grade :

1 . Bonding Jump ers: compression type connec tors, using zinc-plated

fasteners and external tooth lockwash ers.

2 . Ground Bu sba rs: Two-hole compression type lugs using tin-plated

copper or copper alloy bol ts and nuts.

3 . Rack and Cabinet Ground Bars: one-hole compression-type lugs using

zinc-plated or copper alloy fasteners.

2.5 EQUIPMENT RACK AND CABINET GROUND BARS

A . Provide solid copper ground bars designed for mounting on the framework

of open or cabinet-enclosed equipment rack s with minimum dimensio ns of

4 mm thick by 19 mm wide (3/8 inch x ¾ inch ) .

2.6 GROUND TERMINAL BLOCKS

A . At any equipment mounting location (e .g . backboards and hinged cov er

enclosures ) where rack-type ground bars cannot be mo unted, provide

screw lug-type terminal block s.

2.7 SPLICE CASE GROUND ACCESSORIES

A . Splice case grounding and bonding accessories shal l be supplied by the

splice case manufacturer when ava ilable. Other wise, use 16 mm ² (6 A WG )

insulated ground wire with shield bonding connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A . Ground in accordance with the N EC , as shown on dr awin gs, and a s

hereinafter specif ied.

B . System Grounding:

1 . Secondary service neu tral s: Ground at the supply side of the

secondary disconnecting means and at the related transformers.

2 . Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from the service

entrance): Ground the secondary neu tral .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 4





3 . Isolation transformers and isolated power system s shall not be

system grounded.

C . Equipment Grou ndin g: Metallic structures (including ductwork and

building steel), enclosures, raceways, junction box es, outlet b oxe s,

cabine ts, machine fra mes , and other conductive items in close proximitywith electrical circuits shall be bonded and grounded.

D. Special Groundi ng: For patient care area electrical power system

groundin g, conform to NFPA 9 9 , and NE C.

3.2 INACCESSIBLE GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A . Make grounding con nect ions , which are buried or otherwise normally

inaccessible (except connections for which periodic testing access is

requir ed) by exothermic wel d.

3.3 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A . Pad Mounted Transforme rs:1 . Provide a driven ground rod and bond with a grounding electr ode

conductor to the transformer grounding pad metal steel.

2 . Ground the secondary neutra l.

B . Lightning Arr est ers : Connect lightning arresters to the equipment

ground bus or ground rods as applicab le.

C . Metallic Co nduit : Metallic conduits which terminate without mechanical

connection to an electrical equipment housing by mean s of locknut and

bushings or ada pter s, shall be provided with grounding bus hings .

Connect bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the equipmentground bus .

3.4 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A . Main Bonding Ju mpe r: Bond the secondary service neutral to the ground

bus in the service equipment .

B . Metallic Pipi ng, Building St ee l, and Supplemental Electrode(s):

1 . Provide a grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC between t he

service equipment ground bus and all metallic water and gas pip e

systems, building ste el, and supplemental or made elec trodes. Jumper

insulating joints in the metallic pip ing. All connections to

electrodes shall be made with fittings that conform to UL 4 6 7 .

2 . Provide a supplemental ground electrode and bond to the grounding

electrode system.

C. Service Disconnect (Separate Individual Enclosure): Provide a ground

bar bolted to the enclosure with lugs for connecting the va rious

grounding conductors .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 5





D. Swit chgear, Switchboa rds, Unit Subs tations, and Motor Control Cen ters :

1 . Connect the various feeder equipment grounding conductors to the

ground bus in the enclosure with suitable pressure connectors .

2 . For service entrance equi pmen t, connect the grounding electrode

conductor to the ground bu s.3 . Connect metallic c ondui ts, which terminate without mechanical

connection to the hou sin g, by grounding bushings and grounding

conductor to the equipment ground b us .

E . Transformers:

1 . Ext eri or: Exterior transformers supplying interior service equipment

shall have the neutral grounded at the transformer secondary.

Provide a grounding electrode at the transformer.

2 . Separately derived systems (transformers downstream from service

equipment): Ground the secondary neutral at the trans form er. Providea grounding electrode conductor from the transformer to the ground

bar at the service equipment.

F. Conduit Syst ems:

1 . Ground all metallic conduit sy stem s. All metallic conduit systems

shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

2 . Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding

con duct or, except that non-metallic feeder condu its which carry a

grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or

building-mounted service entrance equipment need not contain anequipment grounding conductor.

3 . Conduit containing only a grounding con duct or, and which is provided

for mechanical protection of the con ductor, shall be bonded to that

conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

G. Feeders and Branch Circu its : Install equipment grounding co nductors

with all feeders and power and lighting branch circuits.

H. Box es, Cabinets, Enclosures, and Panelboards:

1 . Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pu llb ox, junction

bo x, outlet b ox , device bo x, cabi nets , and other enclosures throughwhich the conductor passes (except for special grounding system s for

intensive care units and other critical units shown).

2 . Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for equipment grounding

conductor termination .

3 . Provide ground bars in panel boards, bolted to the ho using , with

sufficient lugs to terminate the equipment grounding conductors.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 6





I . Motors and St arte rs: Provide lugs in motor terminal box and starter

housing or motor control center compartment to terminate equipment

grounding conductors .

J. Receptacles shall not be grounded through their mounting sc re ws . Ground

with a jumper from the receptacle green ground terminal to the dev icebox ground screw and the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

K . Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the

wiring system when the green ground i s provide d; otherw ise, ground the

fixtures through the conduit syst ems . Fixtures connected with flexible

conduit shall have a green ground wire included with the power wi res

from the fixture through the flexible conduit to the first outlet box.

L . Fixed electrical appliances and equipment shal l be provided with a

ground lug for termination of the equipment grounding conductor.

M. Raised Fl oor s: Provide bonding of all raised floor componen ts.N . Panelboard Bon din g: The equipment grounding terminal buses of the

normal and essential branch circuit panelboards serving the same

individual patient vicinity shall be bonded together with an insulated

continuous copper conductor not less than 16 m m² (10 A W G ) . These

conductors shall be installed in rigid metal c ondui t.

3.5 CORROSION INHIBITORS

A . When making ground and ground bonding con nec tion s, apply a corrosion

inhibitor to all contact sur fac es. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate

for protecting a connection between the metals used.

3.6 CONDUCTIVE PIPING

A . Bond all conductive piping syst ems , interior and exter ior, to the

building to the grounding electrode syste m. Bonding connections sha ll

be made as close as practical to the equipment ground bu s.

B . In operating rooms and at intensive care and coronary care type beds,

bond the gases and suction pi ping , at the o utle ts, directly to the room

or patient ground bu s.

3.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

A . Bond the lightning protection system to the electrical grounding

electrode system.

3.8 ELECTRICAL ROOM GROUNDING

A . Building Earth Ground Bu sba rs: Provide ground busbar hardware at each

electrical room and connect to pigtail extensions of the building

grounding ring.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 7





3.9 WIREWAY GROUNDING

A . Ground and Bond Metallic Wireway Systems as follo ws:

1 . Bond the metallic structures of wireway to provide 100 per cent

electrical continuity throughout the wireway system by connecting a

16 mm ² (6 AW G) bonding jumper at all intermediate metallicenclosures and across all section junctions .

2 . Install insulated 16 mm ² (6 AWG ) bonding jumpers between the wireway

system bonded as required in paragraph 1 ab ov e, and the closest

building ground at each end and approximately every 16 meters ( 50

feet ) .

3 . Use insulated 16 mm ² (6 AWG ) bonding jumpers to ground or bond

metallic wireway at each end at all intermediate metallic enclosures

and cross all section junction s.

4 . Use insulated 16 mm ² (6 AW G) bonding jumpers to ground cable tray tocolumn-mounted building ground plate s (pad s) at each end and

approximately every 15 met ers .

3.10 GROUND RESISTANCE

A . Grounding system resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. Make

necessary modifications or additions to the grounding electrode system

for compliance without additional cost to the Gover nment. Final tests

shall assure that this requirement is me t.

B . Resistance of the grounding electrode system shall be measured using a

four-terminal fall-of-potential method as defined in IEEE 8 1 . Groundresistance measurements shall be made before the electrical

distribution system is energized and shall be made in normally dry

conditions not less than 48 hours after the last r ainfa ll. Resistance

measurements of separate grounding electrode systems shall be made

before the systems are bonded together below gr ad e. The combined

resistance of separate systems may be used to meet the required

resista nce, but the specified number of electrodes must still be

provided.

C . Below-grade connections shall be visually inspected by th e Resident

Engineer prior to backfil ling. The Contractor shall notify the Resident

Engineer 2 4 hours before the connections are ready for inspection .

3.11 GROUND ROD INSTALLATION

A . Install a supplemental ground rod system in compliance with

manufacturer’s instruction or recommendation.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 8





B . Bore minimum 6” diameter h ol e, 6” deeper than the length of rod to be

bur ied . Insure that the top of the copper chemical ground rod will not

come in contact with the metal grate of the protective box or han d-hole

cover.

C . Remove sealing tape from leaching hole s.D. Place chemical ground rod in h ol e, so that the top of unit is about 6”

below grade .

E . Backfill.

F. Lynconite backfill is a specific clay (bentonite cl ay ) included with

the system. Mix each 50# backfill grout material with 14 gallons water

to forma slurry and pour around chemical ground rod up to “bury to here

sticker”.

G. Place protective box in accordance with the drawing s.

H. Remove sealing tape from the top breather holes to acti vate.I . Connect grounding electrode conductor to ground rod pigtail

exothermically (Cadweld or Thermoweld).

J. Bury grounding conductor 30” below gra de . Cover conductor with a small

amount of backfill for protection against corrosion.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 9





This page is intentionally left bl ank.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 26 - 10




SECTION 26 05 33 – RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


conduit, fitt ings , and boxes to form com plete , coordinated, grounded

raceway syst ems. Raceways are required for all wiring unless shown or

specified otherwise .

B . Definitions: The term co ndui t, as used in this specification, shall mean

any or all of the raceway types s pecified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Bedding of cond uits: per Civil Engineer and Resident Engin eer.

B . Mounting board for telephone clos ets: Section 06 10 0 0 , ROUGH CARPENT RY.

C . Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated


D. Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building e nvelope

at penetra tions: Section 07 6 0 0 0 , FLASHING AND SHEET M ETA L.E . Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to

prevent moisture migration into the buildin g: Section 0 7 92 0 0 , JOINT

SEALANTS.

F. Identification and painting of conduit and other de vic es: Section 09 9 1

0 0 . PAINTING.

G. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than


ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .

H . Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path



1.3 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with Section 01 33 2 3 , SHOP DRAW INGS , PRODUCT DATA , AND


A. Shop Drawings:

1 . Size and location of main feeder s;

2 . Size and location of panels and pull boxes

3 . Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural eleme nts.

4 . The specific item proposed and its area of application shall b e

identified on the catalog cuts.

B . Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident

Engineer four copies of the certification that the material is in

accordance with the drawings and specifications and ha s been properly

installed.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 1







supplements and er rat a) form a part of this specification to the extent

refer enced . Publications are referenced in the text by the basic

designation only . Refer to latest edition of publication

B . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


C. Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

1 Flexible Metal Conduit

5 Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings

6 Rigid Metal Conduit

50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit


514A Metallic Outlet Boxes


514C Nonmetallic Outlet Bo xe s, Flush-Device Boxes and

Covers

651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

651A Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit

797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

TC-3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and

Tubing

FB1 Fitt ings , Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies

for Con dui t, Electrical Metallic Tubing and

Cable

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A . Conduit Si ze : In accordance with the NE C, but not less than 13 mm

(1/2 in ch) unless otherwise sh own . Where permitted by the N EC , 13 mm

(1/2 in ch ) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed

lighting fixtures .

B. Conduit:

1 . Rigid galvanized ste el : Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.

2 . Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A , ANSI C80.5.

3 . Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 12 42 ,

ANSI C80.6.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 2





4 . Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 7 9 7 , ANSI

C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 1 05 mm (4 i nch ) and shall be

permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.

5 . Flexible galvanized steel c ondui t: Shall Conform to UL 1 .

6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit : Shall Conform to UL 3 6 0.

7 . Direct burial plastic condu it: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651 A,

heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene ( P E ) .

8 . Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5 .

C. Conduit Fitt ings:

1 . Rigid steel and IMC conduit fitting s:

a . Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514B and ANSI/ NEMA

FB1.

a. Standard threaded c ouplin gs, lock nuts , bush ings , and e lbo ws: Only

steel or malleable iron materials are acc eptable. Integral

retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable .

b . Lockn uts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal

wall of an enclosur e.

c. B ushin gs: Metallic insulating ty pe , consisting of an insulating

insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting.

Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are no t

permitted.

d. Erickson (union-t ype) and set screw type coup lings: Approved for

use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run

where conduit is installed in c oncre te. Use set screws of case

hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in

conduit wall for positive gro und . Tightening of set screws with

pliers is prohibited.

e . Sealing f itting s: Threaded cast iron t yp e. Use continuous drain

type sealing fittings to prevent passage of water v apo r. In

concealed wo rk , install fittings in flush steel boxe s with blank

cover plates having the same finishes as that of other elec trical

plates in the roo m.

2 . Rigid aluminum conduit fitting s:

a. Standard threaded cou pling s, lock nuts , bush ings , and elb ows :

Malleable i ro n, steel or aluminum alloy mater ials; Zinc or cadmium

plate iron or steel fitt ings. Aluminum fittings containing more

than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.

b . Locknuts and bus hin gs: As specified for rigid steel and IMC

conduit.

c. Set screw fitt ings: Not permitted for use with aluminum co nduit .

3 . Electrical metallic tubing fitt ings:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 3






FB1.

b . Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptab le.

c. Couplings and co nnectors : Concrete tight and rain t igh t, with

connectors having insulated th ro ats . Use gland and ring

compression type couplings and connectors for conduit size s 50 mm

(2 inc hes) and smal ler. Use set screw type couplings with four set

screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set

screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to

firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibite d.

e . Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fitting s made of

"pot metal " are prohibited .

4 . Flexible steel conduit fitting s:

a. Conform to UL 5 14B . Only steel or malleable iron materials are

acceptable.

b . Clamp ty pe , with insulated thr oat.

5 . Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings :


FB1.

b . Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptabl e.

c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding co ne , a steel or

plastic compression ri ng, and a gland for tighten ing. Connectors

shall have insulated thro ats.

6. Direct burial plastic conduit fitting s:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC 3.

b . As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

7 . Surface metal raceway fit tin gs: As recommended by the raceway

manufacturer.

8 . Expansion and deflection coup lings :

a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B .

b . Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 in ch) deflection, expans ion, or

contraction in any dire ctio n, and allow 30 degree angular

deflections.

c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit

ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467,

and the NEC code tables for ground co nductor s.

d. Jack et: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, waterti ght, moisture and

heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket

clamps.

D. Conduit Supports :

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 4





1 . Parts and hard ware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion

protection.

2 . Individual Conduit Ha nger s: Designed for the pu rpos e, having a

pre-assembled closure bolt and n ut , and provisions for receiving a

hanger rod.

3 . Multiple conduit (trapeze) hang ers: Not less than 3 8 mm by 38 mm

(1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 12 gage st eel , cold form ed, lipped ch annel s;

with not less than 9 mm (3/8 in ch) diameter steel hanger rods.

4 . Solid Masonry and Concrete Anch ors: Self-drilling expansion shi elds ,

or machine bolt expansion .

E . Outlet , Junction, and Pull Box es:

1 . UL-50 and UL-51 4A.

2 . Cast metal where required by the NEC or sh ow n, and equipped with

rustproof boxes.

3 . Sheet metal bo xe s: Galvanized st eel , except where otherwise s how n.

4 . Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised

covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall.

Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with s urface

style flat or raised cov ers.

F. Wi reway s: Equip with hinged c ove rs, except where removable covers are

shown.

G. Warning Tap e: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm ( 3 in ch) wide tape

detectable ty pe , red with black letter s, and imprinted with “CAUTION

BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW ”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting or Hole s:

1 . Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the st ructural

sections such as ribs or bea ms. Obtain the approval of the Resident

Engineer prior to drilling through structural sections.

2 . Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures

with a diamond core drill or concrete s aw . Pneumatic ha mme r, impact

elect ric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not a llowed , except

where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited

working space.

B . Fire Sto p: Where cond uits , wire ways , and other electrical raceways pass

through fire partitions, fire w all s, smoke partitions, or floor s,

install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against t he

spread of f ir e, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00 ,

FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant o nly .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 5





Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openin gs with

the fire stop materia l.

C . Waterproofing: At fl oor , exterior wall, and roof conduit penetration s,

completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight as

specified in Section 07 92 0 0 , JOINT SEALANT S.


A . In accordance with UL , NE C, as sh own , and as hereinafter specified.

B . Essential (Em erge ncy) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of

other raceway sys te ms , except where specifically "accepted" by NEC

Article 51 7.

C . Install conduit as follow s:

1 . In complete runs before pulling in cables or wir es.

2 . Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit i s not p ermitted. Remove and

replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.

3 . Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height

head room, walkways, or doorways.

4 . Cut square with a hack saw, rea m, remove bur rs , and draw up ti ght .

5 . Mechanically and electrically con tin uous .

6. Independently support conduit at 8’0 ” on cent er. Do not use other

supports i.e ., (suspended cei li ngs , suspended ceiling supporting

membe rs, lighting fixtu res, cond uits , mechanical pipi ng, or

mechanical ducts).

7 . Support within 300 mm (1 f oot ) of changes of di rection , and within

300 mm (1 fo ot ) of each enclosure to which connect ed.

8 . Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage

to prevent entry of deb ris , until wires are pulled i n .

9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.

1 0 . Secure conduits to cab inet s, junction b ox es , pull boxes and outlet

boxes with bonding type lockn uts. For rigid and IMC conduit

installatio ns, provide a locknut on the inside of the enc losure , made

up wrench ti ght . Do not make conduit connections to junction box

covers.

1 1 . Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Sect ion

07 60 0 0 , FLASHING AND SHEET MET AL.

1 2 . Do not use aluminum conduits in wet loc ations .

13 . Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified he rei n, all

conduits shall be installed concealed within finished w al ls , floors

and ceilings.

D. Conduit Bends :

1 . Make bends with standard conduit bending mach ines.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 6





2 . Conduit hickey may be used for slight off se ts , and for straightening

stubbed out condui ts.

3 . Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.

E . Layout and Homerun s:

1 . Install conduit with wiri ng, including ho meru ns, as sh own .

2 . Dev iati ons : Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only

after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted

approved by the Resident Engin eer.

3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. In Concrete:

1 . Conduit : Rigid st ee l, IMC or E MT . Do not install EMT in concrete

slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers .

2 . Align and run conduit in direct line s.

3 . Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following

occurs:

a. Where shown on the structural draw ings.

b . As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to const ructi on, and

after submittal of drawing showing locat ion, si ze , and position of

each penetration.

4 . Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm ( 3

inch es) thick is prohibited.

a . Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness i s

prohibited.

b . Space between conduits in sla bs : Approximately six conduit

diameters apar t, except one conduit diameter at conduit cro ssings .

c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that

there will be a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inc h) of concrete around t he

conduits.

5 . Make couplings and connections watertig ht. Use thread compounds that

are UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground

continuity through the cond uit s. Tightening set screws with pliers is

prohibited.

B . Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Wal ls :

1 . Conduit for conductors above 600 volt s:

a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.

b . Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other typ es in the

same system is prohibited.

2 . Conduit for conductors 600 volts and bel ow:

a. Rigid s te el, IM C, rigid alu minum, or EM T. Different type conduits

mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 7





3 . Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building

lines.

4 . Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 18 00

mm (six fe et ) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box

to the fixture.

5 . Tightening set screws with pliers is pr ohibited.

3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A . Unless otherwise indicated on the dr awin gs, exposed conduit is only

permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.

B . Conduit for conductors above 600 volt s:

1 . Rigid steel or rigid al uminum.

2 . Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other typ es in the same

system is prohibit ed.

C . Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and be low:

1 . Rigid s te el , IM C, rigid aluminum , or E MT . Different type of conduits

mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.

D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lin es .

E . Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with

conduit straps.

F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foo t)

intervals.

G. Surface metal raceway s: Use only where sho wn.

H. Painting:

1 . Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section 09 91 0 0 , PAINTING .

2 . Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety

orange . Refer to Section 09 91 0 0 , PAINTING for preparation, paint

type, and exact co lor . In add ition , paint leg end s, using 50 mm (two

inc h) high black numerals and l ette rs, showing th e cable voltage

rating . Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors

and at maximum 600 0 mm (20 fo ot) intervals in betwee n.

3.5 DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION

A . Exterior routing of Lighting Systems and Other Branch circuits (60 0 Volt

and Less, and 1500 mm (5 f eet ) from the buildings):

1 . Conduit: Thick wall PVC or high density P E , unless otherwise sho wn.

2 . Mark conduit at uniform intervals to show the kind of material,

direct burial typ e, and the UL approval lab el.

3 . Install conduit fittings and terminations as recommended by t he

conduit manufacturer .

4 . Tops of conduits shall be as follows unless otherwise show n:

a. Not less than 600 mm (2 4 inche s) below finished gr ade .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 8





b . Not less than 75 0 mm (30 inch es) below road and other paved

surfaces.

5 . Work with extreme care near existing du ct s, cond uits , cab les , and

other utilities to avoid damaging them.

6. Excavation for conduit bedding and back-filling of trenches is

specified in Section 31 20 0 0 , EARTH MOVI NG.

a. Cut the trenches neatly and unifor mly.

b . Do not kink the condu its.

7 . Seal con duit s, including spare co ndui ts, at building entrances and at

outdoor terminations for equipment with a suitable compound tha t

prevents the entrance of moisture and gase s.

8 . Where metal conduit is s how n, install threaded heavy wall rigid steel

galvanized conduit or type A20 rigid steel galvanized conduit coated

with .5 mm (20 m il ) bonded P VC , or rigid steel or I MC , PVC coated or

standard coated with bituminous asphaltic compound.

9. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 30 0 mm (12 inche s) above

conduits or electric li nes .

B . Exterior routing of lighting systems and other branch circuits (600

volts and less-under buildings slab on grade to 1500 mm ( 5 fe et ) from

the building):

1 . Pre-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit in accordance with the

requirements of Section 26 05 4 1 , UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL

CONSTRUCTION.

3.6 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

A . Use rigid steel conduit onl y, notwithstanding requirements otherwise

specified in this or other sections of these specificat ions.

B . Install UL approved sealing fi ttin gs, that prevent passage of explosive

vapors, in hazardous areas equipped with explosive proof lighting

fixtur es, swit ches , and recep tacles, as required by the N EC .

3.7 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS

A . Unless otherwise sh own , use conduits of rigid steel or I MC .

B . Provide sealing fi tting s, to prevent passage of water va por , where

conduits pass from warm to cold lo catio ns, i.e. , (refrigerated s pac es,

constant temperature ro om s, air conditioned spaces building exterior

walls, roofs) or similar space s.

C . Unless otherwise show n, use rigid steel or IMC conduit within 1500 mm (5

fe et ) of the exterior and below concrete building slabs in contact with

soil, gra vel , or vapor ba rrie rs. Conduit shall include an outer factory

coating of .5 mm (20 mi l) bonded PVC or field coat with asphaltum b efore

installation. After in stallation, completely coat damaged areas of

coating.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 9





3.8 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

A . Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and othe r

electrical equipment subject to mo vemen t, vibrati on, misalignment,

cramped q uart ers, or noise transm ission.

B . Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for installation in exterior

locatio ns, moisture or humidity laden atmosp here, corrosive a tmosphe re,

water or spray wash-down ope ration s, inside (air stream ) of HVAC uni ts ,

and locations subject to seepage or dripping of o il , grease or wat er.

Provide a green ground wire with flexible metal conduit.

3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS

A . Conduits 75 mm (3 inc hes) and la rger , that are secured to the building

structure on opposite sides of a building expansion jo in t, require

expansion and deflection coup lin gs. Install the couplings in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B . Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 i nche s) with junction boxes onboth sides of the expansion jo int . Connect conduits to junction boxes

with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch)

vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a

copper green ground bonding jumper inst alled . In lieu of this flexible

con dui t, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 3 75

mm (15 in ches ) and larger conduits are accept able.

C . Install expansion and deflection couplings where show n.

3.10 CONDUIT SUPPORT S, INSTALLATION

A . Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening

devices.

B . Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual

conduit s. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m ( 8 fo ot) on ce nter .

C . Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze h ange rs. Use trapeze hangers

that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of

the weights of the c ondui ts, wi re s, hanger itse lf, and 90 kg (200

pounds). Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.

D. Support conduit independently of junction b ox es , pull bo xe s, fixt ures ,

suspended ceiling T-b ars, angle supp orts, and similar ite ms.

E . Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:

1 . New Constru ction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in

place prior to placing the concre te.

2 . Existing C onstruction:

a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/ 4 inc h) bolt size

and not less than 28 mm (1-1/8 inch ) embedment .

b . Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 in ch) diameter with

depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 10





c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for

attaching to concrete ceiling s.

F. Hollow Masonry : Toggle bolts are permitted.

G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

H . Metal Structure s: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices

specifically designed and approved for the application.

I . Attachment by wood pl ugs , rawl pl ug, plastic, lead or soft metal

anc hor s, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster i s

prohibited.

J. Ch ain , wi re , or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten

conduit.

K . Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all u ses

except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.

L . Vertical Sup ports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and

supports in accordance with the NEC and as s how n. Provide supports for

cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining

collars.

3.11 BOX INSTALLATION

A . Boxes for Concealed Con duits :

1 . Flush mounted.

2 . Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceili ng,

construction and f inis h.

B . In addition to boxes s how n, install additional boxes where needed to

prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in ope rations .

C . Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused op eni ngs . Use threaded

plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet me tal

boxes.

D. Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted back-to-back are proh ibited . A

minimum 600 mm (24 inch), center-to-center lateral spacing shall be

maintained between bo xes. )

E . Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI)

receptacles is 100 mm ( 4 inche s) square by 55 mm (2-1/8 in ches ) de ep,

with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.

F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified

on riser diagra ms; for example "SIG-FA JB N o . 1" .

G. On all Branch Circuit junction box c ove rs, identify the circuits with

black marker.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 11





PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


conduit, fitt ings , and boxes to form com plete , coordinated, grounded

raceway syst ems. Raceways are required for all wiring unless shown or

specified otherwise .

B . Definitions: The term co ndui t, as used in this specification, shall mean

any or all of the raceway types s pecified.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Bedding of cond uits: per Civil Engineer and Resident Engin eer.

B . Mounting board for telephone clos ets: Section 06 10 0 0 , ROUGH CARPENT RY.

C . Sealing around penetrations to maintain the integrity of fire rated


D. Fabrications for the deflection of water away from the building e nvelope

at penetra tions: Section 07 6 0 0 0 , FLASHING AND SHEET M ETA L.E . Sealing around conduit penetrations through the building envelope to

prevent moisture migration into the buildin g: Section 0 7 92 0 0 , JOINT

SEALANTS.

F. Identification and painting of conduit and other de vic es: Section 09 9 1

0 0 . PAINTING.

G. General electrical requirements and items that is common to more than


ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .

H . Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path



1.3 SUBMITTALS

In accordance with Section 01 33 2 3 , SHOP DRAW INGS , PRODUCT DATA , AND


A. Shop Drawings:

1 . Size and location of main feeder s;

2 . Size and location of panels and pull boxes

3 . Layout of required conduit penetrations through structural eleme nts.

4 . The specific item proposed and its area of application shall b e

identified on the catalog cuts.

B . Certification: Prior to final inspection, deliver to the Resident

Engineer four copies of the certification that the material is in

accordance with the drawings and specifications and ha s been properly

installed.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 1







supplements and er rat a) form a part of this specification to the extent


designation only . Refer to latest edition of publication




1 Flexible Metal Conduit

5 Surface Metal Raceway and Fittings

6 Rigid Metal Conduit


360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit


514A Metallic Outlet Boxes


514C Nonmetallic Outlet Bo xe s, Flush-Device Boxes and

Covers

651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

651A Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit

797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit


TC-3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and

Tubing

FB1 Fitt ings , Cast Metal Boxes and Conduit Bodies

for Con dui t, Electrical Metallic Tubing and

Cable

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A . Conduit Si ze : In accordance with the NE C, but not less than 13 mm

(1/2 in ch) unless otherwise sh own . Where permitted by the N EC , 13 mm

(1/2 in ch ) flexible conduit may be used for tap connections to recessed

lighting fixtures .

B. Conduit:

1 . Rigid galvanized ste el : Shall Conform to UL 6, ANSI C80.1.

2 . Rigid aluminum: Shall Conform to UL 6A , ANSI C80.5.

3 . Rigid intermediate steel conduit (IMC): Shall Conform to UL 12 42 ,

ANSI C80.6.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 2





4 . Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): Shall Conform to UL 7 9 7 , ANSI

C80.3. Maximum size not to exceed 1 05 mm (4 i nch ) and shall be

permitted only with cable rated 600 volts or less.

5 . Flexible galvanized steel c ondui t: Shall Conform to UL 1 .

6. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit : Shall Conform to UL 3 6 0.

7 . Direct burial plastic condu it: Shall conform to UL 651 and UL 651 A,

heavy wall PVC or high density polyethylene ( P E ) .

8 . Surface metal raceway: Shall Conform to UL 5 .

C. Conduit Fitt ings:

1 . Rigid steel and IMC conduit fitting s:


FB1.

a. Standard threaded c ouplin gs, lock nuts , bush ings , and e lbo ws: Only

steel or malleable iron materials are acc eptable. Integral

retractable type IMC couplings are also acceptable .

b . Lockn uts: Bonding type with sharp edges for digging into the metal

wall of an enclosur e.

c. B ushin gs: Metallic insulating ty pe , consisting of an insulating

insert molded or locked into the metallic body of the fitting.

Bushings made entirely of metal or nonmetallic material are no t

permitted.

d. Erickson (union-t ype) and set screw type coup lings: Approved for

use in concrete are permitted for use to complete a conduit run

where conduit is installed in c oncre te. Use set screws of case

hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly seat in

conduit wall for positive gro und . Tightening of set screws with

pliers is prohibited.

e . Sealing f itting s: Threaded cast iron t yp e. Use continuous drain

type sealing fittings to prevent passage of water v apo r. In

concealed wo rk , install fittings in flush steel boxe s with blank

cover plates having the same finishes as that of other elec trical

plates in the roo m.

2 . Rigid aluminum conduit fitting s:

a. Standard threaded cou pling s, lock nuts , bush ings , and elb ows :

Malleable i ro n, steel or aluminum alloy mater ials; Zinc or cadmium

plate iron or steel fitt ings. Aluminum fittings containing more

than 0.4 percent copper are prohibited.

b . Locknuts and bus hin gs: As specified for rigid steel and IMC

conduit.

c. Set screw fitt ings: Not permitted for use with aluminum co nduit .

3 . Electrical metallic tubing fitt ings:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 3






FB1.

b . Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptab le.

c. Couplings and co nnectors : Concrete tight and rain t igh t, with

connectors having insulated th ro ats . Use gland and ring

compression type couplings and connectors for conduit size s 50 mm

(2 inc hes) and smal ler. Use set screw type couplings with four set

screws each for conduit sizes over 50 mm (2 inches). Use set

screws of case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to

firmly seat in wall of conduit for positive grounding.

d. Indent type connectors or couplings are prohibite d.

e . Die-cast or pressure-cast zinc-alloy fittings or fitting s made of

"pot metal " are prohibited .

4 . Flexible steel conduit fitting s:

a. Conform to UL 5 14B . Only steel or malleable iron materials are

acceptable.

b . Clamp ty pe , with insulated thr oat.

5 . Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings :


FB1.

b . Only steel or malleable iron materials are acceptabl e.

c. Fittings must incorporate a threaded grounding co ne , a steel or

plastic compression ri ng, and a gland for tighten ing. Connectors

shall have insulated thro ats.

6. Direct burial plastic conduit fitting s:

a. Fittings shall meet the requirements of UL 514C and NEMA TC 3.

b . As recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

7 . Surface metal raceway fit tin gs: As recommended by the raceway

manufacturer.

8 . Expansion and deflection coup lings :

a. Conform to UL 467 and UL 514B .

b . Accommodate, 19 mm (0.75 in ch) deflection, expans ion, or

contraction in any dire ctio n, and allow 30 degree angular

deflections.

c. Include internal flexible metal braid sized to guarantee conduit

ground continuity and fault currents in accordance with UL 467,

and the NEC code tables for ground co nductor s.

d. Jack et: Flexible, corrosion-resistant, waterti ght, moisture and

heat resistant molded rubber material with stainless steel jacket

clamps.

D. Conduit Supports :

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 4





1 . Parts and hard ware: Zinc-coat or provide equivalent corrosion

protection.

2 . Individual Conduit Ha nger s: Designed for the pu rpos e, having a

pre-assembled closure bolt and n ut , and provisions for receiving a

hanger rod.

3 . Multiple conduit (trapeze) hang ers: Not less than 3 8 mm by 38 mm

(1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inch), 12 gage st eel , cold form ed, lipped ch annel s;

with not less than 9 mm (3/8 in ch) diameter steel hanger rods.

4 . Solid Masonry and Concrete Anch ors: Self-drilling expansion shi elds ,

or machine bolt expansion .

E . Outlet , Junction, and Pull Box es:

1 . UL-50 and UL-51 4A.

2 . Cast metal where required by the NEC or sh ow n, and equipped with

rustproof boxes.

3 . Sheet metal bo xe s: Galvanized st eel , except where otherwise s how n.

4 . Flush mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with raised

covers so that front face of raised cover is flush with the wall.

Surface mounted wall or ceiling boxes shall be installed with s urface

style flat or raised cov ers.

F. Wi reway s: Equip with hinged c ove rs, except where removable covers are

shown.

G. Warning Tap e: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm ( 3 in ch) wide tape

detectable ty pe , red with black letter s, and imprinted with “CAUTION

BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW ”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PENETRATIONS

A. Cutting or Hole s:

1 . Locate holes in advance where they are proposed in the st ructural

sections such as ribs or bea ms. Obtain the approval of the Resident

Engineer prior to drilling through structural sections.

2 . Cut holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures

with a diamond core drill or concrete s aw . Pneumatic ha mme r, impact

elect ric, hand or manual hammer type drills are not a llowed , except

where permitted by the Resident Engineer as required by limited

working space.

B . Fire Sto p: Where cond uits , wire ways , and other electrical raceways pass

through fire partitions, fire w all s, smoke partitions, or floor s,

install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against t he

spread of f ir e, smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00 ,

FIRESTOPPING, with rock wool fiber or silicone foam sealant o nly .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 5





Completely fill and seal clearances between raceways and openin gs with

the fire stop materia l.

C . Waterproofing: At fl oor , exterior wall, and roof conduit penetration s,

completely seal clearances around the conduit and make watertight as

specified in Section 07 92 0 0 , JOINT SEALANT S.


A . In accordance with UL , NE C, as sh own , and as hereinafter specified.

B . Essential (Em erge ncy) raceway systems shall be entirely independent of

other raceway sys te ms , except where specifically "accepted" by NEC

Article 51 7.

C . Install conduit as follow s:

1 . In complete runs before pulling in cables or wir es.

2 . Flattened, dented, or deformed conduit i s not p ermitted. Remove and

replace the damaged conduits with new undamaged material.

3 . Assure conduit installation does not encroach into the ceiling height

head room, walkways, or doorways.

4 . Cut square with a hack saw, rea m, remove bur rs , and draw up ti ght .

5 . Mechanically and electrically con tin uous .

6. Independently support conduit at 8’0 ” on cent er. Do not use other

supports i.e ., (suspended cei li ngs , suspended ceiling supporting

membe rs, lighting fixtu res, cond uits , mechanical pipi ng, or

mechanical ducts).

7 . Support within 300 mm (1 f oot ) of changes of di rection , and within

300 mm (1 fo ot ) of each enclosure to which connect ed.

8 . Close ends of empty conduit with plugs or caps at the rough-in stage

to prevent entry of deb ris , until wires are pulled i n .

9. Conduit installations under fume and vent hoods are prohibited.

1 0 . Secure conduits to cab inet s, junction b ox es , pull boxes and outlet

boxes with bonding type lockn uts. For rigid and IMC conduit

installatio ns, provide a locknut on the inside of the enc losure , made

up wrench ti ght . Do not make conduit connections to junction box

covers.

1 1 . Flashing of penetrations of the roof membrane is specified in Sect ion

07 60 0 0 , FLASHING AND SHEET MET AL.

1 2 . Do not use aluminum conduits in wet loc ations .

13 . Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified he rei n, all

conduits shall be installed concealed within finished w al ls , floors

and ceilings.

D. Conduit Bends :

1 . Make bends with standard conduit bending mach ines.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 6





2 . Conduit hickey may be used for slight off se ts , and for straightening

stubbed out condui ts.

3 . Bending of conduits with a pipe tee or vise is prohibited.

E . Layout and Homerun s:

1 . Install conduit with wiri ng, including ho meru ns, as sh own .

2 . Dev iati ons : Make only where necessary to avoid interferences and only

after drawings showing the proposed deviations have been submitted

approved by the Resident Engin eer.

3.3 CONCEALED WORK INSTALLATION

A. In Concrete:

1 . Conduit : Rigid st ee l, IMC or E MT . Do not install EMT in concrete

slabs that are in contact with soil, gravel or vapor barriers .

2 . Align and run conduit in direct line s.

3 . Install conduit through concrete beams only when the following

occurs:

a. Where shown on the structural draw ings.

b . As approved by the Resident Engineer prior to const ructi on, and

after submittal of drawing showing locat ion, si ze , and position of

each penetration.

4 . Installation of conduit in concrete that is less than 75 mm ( 3

inch es) thick is prohibited.

a . Conduit outside diameter larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness i s

prohibited.

b . Space between conduits in sla bs : Approximately six conduit

diameters apar t, except one conduit diameter at conduit cro ssings .

c. Install conduits approximately in the center of the slab so that

there will be a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 inc h) of concrete around t he

conduits.

5 . Make couplings and connections watertig ht. Use thread compounds that

are UL approved conductive type to insure low resistance ground

continuity through the cond uit s. Tightening set screws with pliers is

prohibited.

B . Furred or Suspended Ceilings and in Wal ls :

1 . Conduit for conductors above 600 volt s:

a. Rigid steel or rigid aluminum.

b . Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other typ es in the

same system is prohibited.

2 . Conduit for conductors 600 volts and bel ow:

a. Rigid s te el, IM C, rigid alu minum, or EM T. Different type conduits

mixed indiscriminately in the same system is prohibited.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 7





3 . Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building

lines.

4 . Connect recessed lighting fixtures to conduit runs with maximum 18 00

mm (six fe et ) of flexible metal conduit extending from a junction box

to the fixture.

5 . Tightening set screws with pliers is pr ohibited.

3.4 EXPOSED WORK INSTALLATION

A . Unless otherwise indicated on the dr awin gs, exposed conduit is only

permitted in mechanical and electrical rooms.

B . Conduit for conductors above 600 volt s:

1 . Rigid steel or rigid al uminum.

2 . Aluminum conduit mixed indiscriminately with other typ es in the same

system is prohibit ed.

C . Conduit for Conductors 600 volts and be low:

1 . Rigid s te el , IM C, rigid aluminum , or E MT . Different type of conduits

mixed indiscriminately in the system is prohibited.

D. Align and run conduit parallel or perpendicular to the building lin es .

E . Install horizontal runs close to the ceiling or beams and secure with

conduit straps.

F. Support horizontal or vertical runs at not over 2400 mm (eight foo t)

intervals.

G. Surface metal raceway s: Use only where sho wn.

H. Painting:

1 . Paint exposed conduit as specified in Section 09 91 0 0 , PAINTING .

2 . Paint all conduits containing cables rated over 600 volts safety

orange . Refer to Section 09 91 0 0 , PAINTING for preparation, paint

type, and exact co lor . In add ition , paint leg end s, using 50 mm (two

inc h) high black numerals and l ette rs, showing th e cable voltage

rating . Provide legends where conduits pass through walls and floors

and at maximum 600 0 mm (20 fo ot) intervals in betwee n.

3.5 DIRECT BURIAL INSTALLATION

A . Exterior routing of Lighting Systems and Other Branch circuits (60 0 Volt

and Less, and 1500 mm (5 f eet ) from the buildings):

1 . Conduit: Thick wall PVC or high density P E , unless otherwise sho wn.

2 . Mark conduit at uniform intervals to show the kind of material,

direct burial typ e, and the UL approval lab el.

3 . Install conduit fittings and terminations as recommended by t he

conduit manufacturer .

4 . Tops of conduits shall be as follows unless otherwise show n:

a. Not less than 600 mm (2 4 inche s) below finished gr ade .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 8





b . Not less than 75 0 mm (30 inch es) below road and other paved

surfaces.

5 . Work with extreme care near existing du ct s, cond uits , cab les , and

other utilities to avoid damaging them.

6. Excavation for conduit bedding and back-filling of trenches is

specified in Section 31 20 0 0 , EARTH MOVI NG.

a. Cut the trenches neatly and unifor mly.

b . Do not kink the condu its.

7 . Seal con duit s, including spare co ndui ts, at building entrances and at

outdoor terminations for equipment with a suitable compound tha t

prevents the entrance of moisture and gase s.

8 . Where metal conduit is s how n, install threaded heavy wall rigid steel

galvanized conduit or type A20 rigid steel galvanized conduit coated

with .5 mm (20 m il ) bonded P VC , or rigid steel or I MC , PVC coated or

standard coated with bituminous asphaltic compound.

9. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 30 0 mm (12 inche s) above

conduits or electric li nes .

B . Exterior routing of lighting systems and other branch circuits (600

volts and less-under buildings slab on grade to 1500 mm ( 5 fe et ) from

the building):

1 . Pre-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit in accordance with the

requirements of Section 26 05 4 1 , UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL

CONSTRUCTION.

3.6 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

A . Use rigid steel conduit onl y, notwithstanding requirements otherwise

specified in this or other sections of these specificat ions.

B . Install UL approved sealing fi ttin gs, that prevent passage of explosive

vapors, in hazardous areas equipped with explosive proof lighting

fixtur es, swit ches , and recep tacles, as required by the N EC .

3.7 WET OR DAMP LOCATIONS

A . Unless otherwise sh own , use conduits of rigid steel or I MC .

B . Provide sealing fi tting s, to prevent passage of water va por , where

conduits pass from warm to cold lo catio ns, i.e. , (refrigerated s pac es,

constant temperature ro om s, air conditioned spaces building exterior

walls, roofs) or similar space s.

C . Unless otherwise show n, use rigid steel or IMC conduit within 1500 mm (5

fe et ) of the exterior and below concrete building slabs in contact with

soil, gra vel , or vapor ba rrie rs. Conduit shall include an outer factory

coating of .5 mm (20 mi l) bonded PVC or field coat with asphaltum b efore

installation. After in stallation, completely coat damaged areas of

coating.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 9





3.8 MOTORS AND VIBRATING EQUIPMENT

A . Use flexible metal conduit for connections to motors and othe r

electrical equipment subject to mo vemen t, vibrati on, misalignment,

cramped q uart ers, or noise transm ission.

B . Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for installation in exterior

locatio ns, moisture or humidity laden atmosp here, corrosive a tmosphe re,

water or spray wash-down ope ration s, inside (air stream ) of HVAC uni ts ,

and locations subject to seepage or dripping of o il , grease or wat er.

Provide a green ground wire with flexible metal conduit.

3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS

A . Conduits 75 mm (3 inc hes) and la rger , that are secured to the building

structure on opposite sides of a building expansion jo in t, require

expansion and deflection coup lin gs. Install the couplings in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B . Provide conduits smaller than 75 mm (3 i nche s) with junction boxes onboth sides of the expansion jo int . Connect conduits to junction boxes

with sufficient slack of flexible conduit to produce 125 mm (5 inch)

vertical drop midway between the ends. Flexible conduit shall have a

copper green ground bonding jumper inst alled . In lieu of this flexible

con dui t, expansion and deflection couplings as specified above for 3 75

mm (15 in ches ) and larger conduits are accept able.

C . Install expansion and deflection couplings where show n.

3.10 CONDUIT SUPPORT S, INSTALLATION

A . Safe working load shall not exceed 1/4 of proof test load of fastening

devices.

B . Use pipe straps or individual conduit hangers for supporting individual

conduit s. Maximum distance between supports is 2.5 m ( 8 fo ot) on ce nter .

C . Support multiple conduit runs with trapeze h ange rs. Use trapeze hangers

that are designed to support a load equal to or greater than the sum of

the weights of the c ondui ts, wi re s, hanger itse lf, and 90 kg (200

pounds). Attach each conduit with U-bolts or other approved fasteners.

D. Support conduit independently of junction b ox es , pull bo xe s, fixt ures ,

suspended ceiling T-b ars, angle supp orts, and similar ite ms.

E . Fasteners and Supports in Solid Masonry and Concrete:

1 . New Constru ction: Use steel or malleable iron concrete inserts set in

place prior to placing the concre te.

2 . Existing C onstruction:

a. Steel expansion anchors not less than 6 mm (1/ 4 inc h) bolt size

and not less than 28 mm (1-1/8 inch ) embedment .

b . Power set fasteners not less than 6 mm (1/4 in ch) diameter with

depth of penetration not less than 75 mm (3 inches).

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 10





c. Use vibration and shock resistant anchors and fasteners for

attaching to concrete ceiling s.

F. Hollow Masonry : Toggle bolts are permitted.

G. Bolts supported only by plaster or gypsum wallboard are not acceptable.

H . Metal Structure s: Use machine screw fasteners or other devices

specifically designed and approved for the application.

I . Attachment by wood pl ugs , rawl pl ug, plastic, lead or soft metal

anc hor s, or wood blocking and bolts supported only by plaster i s

prohibited.

J. Ch ain , wi re , or perforated strap shall not be used to support or fasten

conduit.

K . Spring steel type supports or fasteners are prohibited for all u ses

except: Horizontal and vertical supports/fasteners within walls.

L . Vertical Sup ports: Vertical conduit runs shall have riser clamps and

supports in accordance with the NEC and as s how n. Provide supports for

cable and wire with fittings that include internal wedges and retaining

collars.

3.11 BOX INSTALLATION

A . Boxes for Concealed Con duits :

1 . Flush mounted.

2 . Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceili ng,

construction and f inis h.

B . In addition to boxes s how n, install additional boxes where needed to

prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling in ope rations .

C . Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused op eni ngs . Use threaded

plugs for cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet me tal

boxes.

D. Outlet boxes in the same wall mounted back-to-back are proh ibited . A

minimum 600 mm (24 inch), center-to-center lateral spacing shall be

maintained between bo xes. )

E . Minimum size of outlet boxes for ground fault interrupter (GFI)

receptacles is 100 mm ( 4 inche s) square by 55 mm (2-1/8 in ches ) de ep,

with device covers for the wall material and thickness involved.

F. Stencil or install phenolic nameplates on covers of the boxes identified

on riser diagra ms; for example "SIG-FA JB N o . 1" .

G. On all Branch Circuit junction box c ove rs, identify the circuits with

black marker.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 33 - 11




SECTION 26 05 36 – CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


raceway systems and wiring for the miscellaneous electrical equipment.

1.2 RELATED WORK


electrical requirements that are common to more than one section o f

Division 2 6 .

B . Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS: Cond uits ,

fittin gs, and boxes for raceway syst ems.

C . Section 26 05 3 9 , UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS: Under-

floor raceway system s.

D. Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and conductors .

1.3 SUBMITTALS


INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:


determine compliance with the drawings and specifications.

2 . Show size and location of raceway com pon ent s, main feeders panel s

and pul lboxes , ductwork and equipment provided by other tr ade s, and

radiology equipment ite ms . Carefully coordinate with manufacturer’ s

shop dra win gs. Shop drawing approval is required by the radiology

equipment manufacturer’s technical representative prior to

fabrication and installation of the raceway and conductor system.

3 . Provide megavoltage Therapy Unit door interlock interconnection

wiring diagrams for each room prior to making the interlocking

installations.

C . Certifications: Two weeks prior to final in spection, submit four copies


1. Certification that the materials are in accordance with the drawings

and specifications.

2 . Certification, by the Contracto r, that the complete installation has


3 . Certification, by the Contracto r, that the radiology equipment

manufacturer’s representative has approved the complete

installation.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 36 - 1






Publications listed below form a part of this specification to t he


designation on ly. Refer to latest p ublication.

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70 National Electrical Code (NE C)

99 Health Care Facilities

B . Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

884 Underfloor Raceways and Fittings

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE TROUGH RACEWAYS

A . General

1 . Factory fa bricat e, assemble and fit

2 . Material shall be steel

3 . Coordinate dimensions of the straight lengths el bow s, junction boxes

and other compone nts.

4 . Hot dipped galvanized steel connections joiner plate s on floor and

ceiling cable troug h.

5 . Raceway bushi ngs:

a. Cast aluminum.

b . Install when the radiology equipment is installed.

c. Split ring type bushed nipples for the high voltage cabl es.

d. Smooth edges of the openings in the raceways for the bushing s.

6. Provide chase nipples and other components as requ ired.

7 . Protect cables at their egress from the raceways with fittings th at

are mechanically secure to the raceways

8. Provide 45 degrees sweep e1bow at every 90 degrees change in

direction elbows shall have partitions .

9. Where gasketed openings are required in floor wall or ceiling

troughs split covers shall be provided with fastening devices o n

both sides of the cove r.

2.2 FLOOR TROUGH RACEWAY

A . Raceways in the floors shall be watertight in accordance with UL 8 8 4.

B . Sides and bo tto ms, 2 mm (0.0747 in ch) minimum t hickne ss.

C . Cov ers , 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick minimum. Covers shall be ba re , carpet-

ins ert , or tile-insert to match the existing floor covering or sur face

D. Floor-trough covers shall be fully gasketed with screw fasteners.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 36 - 2





2.3 WALL TROUGH RACEWAY

A . Flange mounted covers with screw fasteners for flush mounted

installation.

B . Surface mounted covers with screw fasteners for surface mounted

installations.C . Sid es , bot toms , and covers for renovations 2 mm (0.747 in ch) minimum

thickness

D. Wall du ct , nominal 10 mm (3.5 inche s) deep by 250 mm (1 0 inche s) wide

recessed into wall for control and power cabl es.

2.3 CEILING CABLE TROUGH

A . Cable trough nominal 10 mm (3.5 inche s) deep by 250 mm (1 0 inche s) wide

with 10 mm (5/8 inch es) support rods to permit inspection of cables

above dropped ceilin g.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A . Coordinate the raceway systems with the floo r, wall, and ceiling

structural supports for the radiology eq uipmen t, the locations of the

radiology equipment and its aux ili arie s, and with the lead shielding in

the wa lls , floors and ceil ings:

1 . Prior to fabrication of the raceway sys tems , obtain detailed layout

information from the Resident Engineer for the radiology equi pment

and high voltage cables .

2 . Install raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest pr actical

distance considering equipment and building lay ou t. Individual

raceway runs shall not exceed the radiology equipment manufacturer’s

specified maximum distances.

3 . Racewa ys, boxes and devices recessed into or penetrating through

lead shielded w al ls , floors and cei ling s:

a . Line or clad surfaces of the boxes and devices with the

equivalent thickness of lead shielding shown for the room,

exce pt, the removable cov er.

b . Line or clad raceway surfaces with the equivalent thickness of

lead shielding shown for the room.

c. Overlap the lead shielding on bo xe s, devices and raceways with

the lead shielding for wa ll s, floors and ceilings by not less

than one inch .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 36 - 3





d. Arrange the installations so radiation within the rooms will not

penetrate the raceway paths through the lead shielded walls,

floors and ceilings .

B . Interconnecting wiring shall be co ppe r, stranded or soli d, and have the

type and size as required by the radiology equipment manufacturer.Howe ver, in no case shall the insulation class be less than 60 0 vol ts ,

or the conductor size for low voltage power and grounding wiring b e

less than 4 mm² (12 A W G ) , unless approved by the Resident Engi neer.

C . Equipment Grounding Conduct ors:

1 . Install an equipment grounding conductor in each ra cewa y. The

conductor shall be c opp er, sized as sh own , and shall have green

insulation. The conductor size shall at a minimum be equal to the

size of the largest current-carrying conductor present at t hat

point.2 . Bond all of the equipment grounding conductors in each enclosure.

3 . Trough-type raceway sections shall be made electrically continuous

by short bonding jumpers between adjacent sect ions. Jumpers shall be

exothermically bonded to each raceway section.

4 . Provide not less than one 3000mm (ten fo ot ) equipment grounding

conductor pigtail at each box or junction point where an item of

equipment is connec ted.

5 . The grounding conductors shall be continuous back to the electrical

system ground from which the equipment is served.E . Install protective barriers between the high voltage power cab les , the

low voltage power conductors and conductors where conductors of

different types share a common raceway component.

F. Install cables and conductors as required for the radiology equipment.

Provide 3000 mm (ten -foot) pigtails on the wires at al l the connection

points to equipmen t. Wiring shall be tagged and identified at each en d.

G. Fit and preserve fill-in pieces of floor covering for the racew ays.

Install the fill-in pieces after the cables and conductors have been

installed in the raceways .

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 36 - 4




SECTION 26 05 39 – UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


the underfloor ducts to form a comp lete, coordinated, grounded raceway

system.

1.2 RELATED WORK



Division 2 6 .

B . Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path t o

ground for possible ground fault curren ts.

C . Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Wiring installed in the underfloor raceway

system.

D. Section 26 2 7 2 6 , WIRING D EVIC ES: Wiring devi ces , installed as part of

the underfloor raceway system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A . In accordance with Section 2 6 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATION S, submit the follow ing:

B. Shop Drawings:

1 . Include dimensions, materials, duc ts, inserts, junction box es,

supports, fittings and te rminations , service outlet fittin gs,

receptacles and telecommunications out lets .

2 . Drawings shall show the layout of the duct sys tem, junction bo xe s,

and termination at pan elbo ards , telecommunications clos ets and

cabinets.

C. As-built D rawings:

1 . Deliver four sets of drawings to the Resident Engineer showing t he

exact location of all underfloor ducts and junction boxes dimensioned

from the centerline of column s.

2 . Show the location and circuiting of all power service outl et

fittings.

3 . Show the location of all telephone and data service fittin gs.D. Manuals:

1 . Provide a complete description of the system and instructions as t o

allow additions to , and proper maintenance of the system.

Instructions shall include information on locating and installing

inserts of preset and afterset typ es.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 39 - 1





2 . Two weeks prior to final ins pection, submit four copies of the

manuals to the Resident Engineer .

E . Certifications:

1 . Two weeks prior to final inspectio n, submit four copies of the

following to the Resident Engin eer:

2 . Certification that the materials are in accordance with the drawings

specifications.

3 . Certification that all materials have been properly inst alled .



supplemen ts, and err ata) form a part of this specification to the extent


designation onl y. Refer to latest publication.

B . Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

884 Underfloor Raceways and FittingsC. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS, UNDERFLOOR

A. UL 884 shall apply.

B. Raceways:

1 . Preset inserts shall be spaced 600 mm ( 24 inch es) on centers and

shall not be less than 58 mm (2-1/4 in ch) diameter.

2 . Shall not be less than N o . 14 gage s tee l, continuously welded with

corrosion resistant coatin g, inside and outs ide.

3 . Shall have rounded corne rs.

4 . Power and communication raceways shall be separate and shall h ave

cross-sectional areas which are not less than the dimensions

indicated on the drawings .

5 . Shall be complete with manufactured adjustable supp orts , coupl ings,

elbows, enclosure fittings and associated components.

C. Junction Boxe s:

1 . Shall be cast metal or formed steel with corner conduit adapters and

corrosion resistant coatin g, inside and outs ide.2 . Each box shall have four screws for adjustment and leveling after

installation.

3 . Boxes shall have adjustable cove rs.

4 . Coverplates shall be removable and the proper depth for and

coordinated with the floor covers and fin ishes .

D. Service fittings:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 39 - 2





1 . Shall be the low compact ty pe , satin-finished aluminum.

2 . Power outlets shall have receptacles as indicated and as specified i n

Section 26 27 2 6 , WIRING DEVI CES.

3 . Telecommunications outlets shall have dimensions which are

approximately the same a s the power o utle ts. Da ta , telephone and

other communications jacks shall be as required by the applicable

specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Installation shall be in accordance with t he N EC , manufacturers

recommendations and as shown on the drawin gs.

B . Connect the race ways , boxes and fittings so they are mechanically fir m,

electrically continuous and watertight.

C . Alig n, level and make the raceways parallel to or at right angles with

the building wal ls.D. Raceways shall be free from b ur rs , sharp ed ge s, dents and other defec ts.

E . Cap or plug unused openings with standard fittings.

F. Install marking screw insert caps at inserts which are adjacent to th e

junction b ox es , at each end of the raceway runs and on both sides of

permanent w al ls. Marking screws shall be flush with the finished flo ors .

G. Fasten the junction boxes firmly in place to prevent their moveme nt

during pouring of the sla bs .

H. Raceway systems shall be supported at not more than 1500 mm (five foo t)

centers.

I . Specific methods of installing the raceways shall be demonstrated to and

approved by the Resident Engineer prior to performing the basic fl oor

installation work.

J. Branch circuit wiring shall be the same as that specified for the

project for wet locations in Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).

3.2 TOOLS

A . Deliver a complete set of tools for future field installation of outlets

and devices to the Resident Engi nee r. Include a battery-operated

electronic insert finde r.- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 39 - 3






MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 39 - 4




SECTION 26 05 41 – UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:


man hol es, handholes and ducts to form a complete underground raceway

system.

B . “Duct” and “c ondui t”, and “rigid metal conduit” and “rigid steel

conduit are used interchangeably in this specification and hav e the

same meaning.

1.2 RELATED WORK :

A . Section 31 2 0 1 1 , EARTH MOVING (SHORT F O R M ) : Trenchin g, backfill and

compaction.

B. Section 05 5 0 0 0 , METAL F ABRICATIONS: Ladders.

C . Section 07 92 0 0 , JOINT SEALANT S: Sealing of conduit penetrations.

D. Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTAL LATIONS: General



E . Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYS TEMS : Cond uits ,

fittings and boxes for raceway syste ms.

F . Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SY STEM S:

Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path

for possible ground fault curren ts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:


INSTALLATIONS.

B . Shop Drawings:



2 . Include manhole s, handho les, duct materia ls, and hardwa re. Proposed

deviations from details on the drawings shall be clearly marked on

the submittals.

If necessary to locate manholes or handholes at locations other th an

shown on the dra win gs, show the proposed locations accurately on scaled

site dra wing s, and submit four copies to the Resident Engineer for

approval prior to construction.

3 . Reinforcement shop drawings for precast manholes prepared in

accordance with ACI-SP-66 .

4 . Precast manholes and handh oles: Submit plans on elevation showing

openin gs, pulling irons cable su ppor ts, sump and other det ails .

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 1





Also, submit detail drawings and design calculations for approval

prior to insta llati on. Submittal shall bear the seal of a registered

structural engineer .

C . Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, submit four

copies of the following to the Resident Engi neer:

1. Certification that the materials are in accordance with the drawings

and specifications.

2 . Certification, by the Contractor, that the complete installation has


1.4 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:


supplemen ts, and err ata) form a part of this specification to the


designation only.A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

318/318M-2005 Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete & Commentary

SP-66-04 ACI Detailing Manual

B . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

C478/C478M 200 6(b ) Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced

Concrete Manhole Sections

C990 REV A 2003 Standard Specification for joints concretepipe, Manholes and Precast Box using performed

flexible Joint sealant s.

C . Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C2-2002 National Electrical Safety Code


RNI 2005 Polyvinyl Chloride (PV C) Externally Coated

Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate

Metal Conduit

TC 2 2003 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PV C) Tubing And

Conduit

TC 3-2004 PVC Fitting s for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit And

Tubing

E . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

70 2005 National Electrical Code (NE C)

F. Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 2





6-2004 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel

467-200 4 Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment

651A-2003 Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE

Conduit, (RTRC)

651B-2002 Continuous Length HDPE ConduitG. U. S. General Services Administration (GSA ) :

A-A-60005-1998 Fra mes, Cover s, Gratings, Ste ps, Sump and Catch

Basi n, Manhole

SS-S-210A-1981 Sealing Comp oun d, Preformed Plastic for

Expansion joints And Pipe Joints

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MANHOLES AND HARDWARE:

A . Reinforced Concrete: ACI 31 8 , 20MPA (3000 ps i) minimum 28-day

compressive strength .B . Reinforcing Ste el: Number 4 mi nimum.

C . Manhole Hardware:

1 . Frames and covers (traffic type ) :

a. GSA A-A-60005 Type II I .

b . Fram es: Style A , size 3 0A.

c. Co ver s, Type D, size 30 A, marked "POWER" or "SIGN AL" as

applicable.

d. Refer to details on pla ns.

2 . Sump frames and grating s:

a. GSA A-A-60005.

b . Frames, Type V II .

c. Gratings, Type I.

d. Refer to details on pla ns.

3 . Pulling Iro ns : 22 mm (7/8-inch ) diameter hot-dipped galvanized steel

bar with exposed triangular shaped opening.

4 . Cable supports:

a. Cable s tanchi ons, hot ro lled , heavy du ty, hot-dipped galvanized

"T" section steel 56 mm (2-1/4 inch es) by 6 mm (1/4-in ch) in size

and punched with 14 holes on 38 mm (1-1/2 in ch) centers for

attaching cable arms.

b . Cable arms, 5 mm (3/16-inch) ga ge , hot ro lled, hot-dipped

galvanized sheet steel pressed to channel sha pe. Arms shall b e

approximately 63 mm (2-1/2 inch es) wide and 350 mm (14 inch es)

long.

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 3





c. Insulators for cable supp orts, high glaz ed, wet process

porcelain.

d. Sp are s: Equip each cable stanchion with two spare cable arms and

six spare insulators for future us e.

e . Miscellaneous h ardwar e, hot-dipped galvanized st eel .5 . Manhole Ladders:

Manhole Ladde rs: Aluminum with 4 00 mm (16 i nch ) rung spac ing, and

per the requirements of Section 05 50 0 0 , METAL FABRICA TIONS.

D. Handhole Hardwar e:

1 . Frames and covers configuration a s shown on the drawi ngs. Cast the

word “Signal” in the top face of the communications manhole cover s.

2 . Pulling ir on s, 22 mm (7/8-in ch) diameter galvanized steel bar with

exposed triangular shaped opening.

3 . Cable supports are not requir ed.E . Ground Rod Slee ve: Provide a 75 mm (3 i nche s) PVC sleeve in manhole

floors so that a driven ground rod may be installed.

F . In lieu of poured-in-place manholes and ha ndhol es, the Contractor may

provide precast uni ts . Units shall comply with ASTM C478, C478M.

1 . Si ze : Plan area and clear height shall be not less than that shown

on the drawings for poured-in-place t yp e.

2 . Accessori es, hardw are, and facilities shall be th e same a s required

for poured-in-place ty pe .

3 . Assume ground water level 900 mm ( 3 fee t) below ground surfaceunless a higher water table is shown in the boring logs and adjust

design accordingly.

4 . Construction:

a. Uni ts , precast monolithically or of assembled se ction s. Base and

first riser shall be monolith ic.

b . Provide tongue-and-groove joints to firmly interlock adjoining

components. Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic or

rubber materials conforming to ASTM C990 or GSA SS-S-210A.

Install sealing material in strict accordance with the sealantmanufacturers' printed instruction s.

c. Provide lifting devices cast into unit s.

d. Identify all structures with manufacturer's name embedded i n , or

otherwise permanently attached to an interior wall face.

e . Provide a sleeve in manhole floors so that a driven ground rod

may be installed.

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 4





2.2 DUCTS:

A . Number and sizes shall be as shown on drawing s.

B . Ducts (concrete encased):

1 . Plastic Duc t:

a. 651A Schedule 40 PVC .b . Duct shall be suitable for use with 90 degree C rated conductor s.

2 . Conduit Space rs: Prefabricated p lasti c.

2.3 GROUNDING:

A . Rods: Per Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS and UL 4 67

B . Ground W ir e: Stranded bare copper 16 mm² (6 AWG ) minimum.

2.4 WARNING TA PE :

Standard 4-mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inc h) wide ta pe , detectable ty pe ,

orange with black le tt er s, imprinted with “CAUTION BURIEDCOMMUNICATIONS CABLE BEL OW” .

2.5 PULL ROPE:

Plastic with 890N (200 po und) minimum tensile streng th.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION:

A . General Requirements:

1 . Construct manholes of reinforced concr ete.

2 . Locate manholes and handholes at the approximate locations shown on

the drawings with due consideration given to the location of other

utilities, grade s, and paving.

3 . Steel reinforcing concrete cove r, not less than 50 mm ( 2 i nche s)

thick for exterior s urfa ces, 38 mm ( 1 1/2 inch es) thick for interior

surfac es, and 25 mm (1 i nch ) thick for the bottom surfaces of the

top slabs.

4 . Walls, floors, and top :

a . Construct monolithic walls and floors with window openings i n

walls for duct s.

b . Provide sump pits in the floor of manholes for drainage .

c. Provide manhole with a circular opening suitable for th e

installation of the frame and cov er . Provide water stops at

framed cold joi nts .

5 . Duct terminations: Provide windows at duct bank terminations and

fill with concrete after duct p lacement . Terminations shall be

sealed waterti ght.

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 5





6. Pulling irons :

a. Provide pulling irons opposite each duct entrance .

b . Cast pulling irons in the walls opposite duct wind ows

approximately 152mm (6 in ches ) above the top of the windo w.

B. Manhole Access :1 . Manhole chimney shall consist of a sufficient number of brick and

mortar courses between top of manhole and manhole frame to reach th e

required l eve l. Grout the manhole frame to the chimn ey.

2 . The top of frames and covers shall be flush t yp e, with the finish

flush with finished grade in paved and unpaved areas.

3 . Frames and covers in roadways and paved areas shall be traffic ty pe .

In unpaved areas frames and covers may be non-traffic typ e.

C . Access for Handhol es: Make the top of frames and covers flush with

finished grade.D. Manhole Cable Rac ks :

1. Provide cable racks with porcelain insulator supports in each

manhole.

2 . Cable support intervals shall not exceed 900mm (36 inches).

3 . Install racks at the above spacing on all walls for not l ess than

one cab le, whether or not the racks will be used for cable s.

Install additional racks as required for the cab les .

4 . Each rack shall include cable support insulators .

E . Ground Rods and Grounding in Manh oles :1 . Ground rods:

a. Rods shall protrude approximately 100 mm ( 4 inc hes) above the

manhole floor.

b . Poured-in-place manhole s: Drive a ground rod into the earth ,

before the floor is pla ced, at a convenient point close to the

manhole wall.

c. Precast manho les: Drive a ground rod into the ear th, through the

floor slee ve, after the manhole is set in pla ce. Fill the sleeve

with a sealant to make a watertight seal.

2 . Grounding Conductors :

a. Install a 9 5 mm ² (3/0 AWG ) bare copper ring grounding conductor

around the inside perimeter of the manhole and anchor to t he

walls with metallic cable cli ps .

b . Connect the ring grounding conductor to the ground rod by an

exothermic welding process .

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 6





c. Bond the ring grounding conductor to the duct bank equipmen t

grounding cond uct ors , the exposed non-current carrying metal

parts of r ac ks , sump cov ers , and like items in the manholes with

a minimum 16 mm ² (6 AW G) bare copper jum per.

F. Precast Unit s:1 . Precast units shall have the same accessories and facilities as

specified above.

2 . Assembly and installation of precast components shall follow the

printed instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the

units.

3 . Units shall be installed on a 300 mm (12 i nch ) level bed of 90 %

compacted granular fill, well-graded from the 25 mm (1 i nch ) sieve

to the No . 4 si eve . Granular fill shall be compacted with a minimum

of four passes with a plate compa ctor.4 . Seal duct terminations watert ight.

G. La dde rs: Provide securely mounted ladder for every manhole over 1200

mm (4 feet) deep.

3.2 TRENCHING:

A . Refer to Section 31 20 11 EARTH MOVING (SHORT FO RM) for trenching back

filli ng, and compaction.

B . Work with extreme care near existing d uc ts , cond uits , cab les , and other

utilities to avoid damaging them.

C . Cut the trenches neatly and uniform ly.D. For Concrete Encased Duc ts:

1 . After excavation of the tre nch, stakes shall be driven in the bottom

of the trench at 1200 mm (4 f oot ) intervals to establish the grade

and route of the duct ban k.

2 . Pitch the trenches uniformly towards manholes or both ways from high

points between manholes for the required duct line dra ina ge. Avoid

pitching the ducts towards buildings wherever po ssibl e.

3 . The walls of the trench may be used to form the side walls of the

duct bank provided that the soil is self-supporting and that

concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions. Forms are

required where the soil is not self-supporting.

4 . After the concrete encased duct has sufficiently cu re d, the trench

shall be backfilled to grade with ea rt h, with appropriate warning

tape attached.

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 7





E . Conduits to be installed under existing paved ar ea s, ro ad s, and

railroad tracks that are not to be disturbed shall be jacked into

plac e. Conduits shall be PVC-coated rigid meta l.

3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION:

A . General Requirements:1 . Ducts shall be in accordance with the NEC and IEEE C 2 , as shown on

the draw ings , and as spe cified.

2 . Slope ducts to drain towards manholes and han dho les , and away from

building and equipment entra nces. Pitch not less than 10 0 mm (4

inches) in 30 M (100 feet ) .

3 . Steel conduit turns of direction for all duct lines shall have

minimum 1200 mm ( 4 fee t) radius in the horizontal and vertical

directions. PVC conduit sweeps for all duct lines shall have a

minimum 12000 mm ( 40 fee t) radius in the horizontal and 1200 mm (4fee t) in the vertical directi ons. Where a 12000 mm (40 feet ) radius

is not pos sibl e, horizontal turns of direction shall be rigid st eel .

4 . All multiple conduit runs shall have conduit spacers . Spacers shall

securely support and maintain uniform spacing of the duct assembly a

minimum of 75 mm (3 inch es) above bottom of trench during th e

concrete pou r. Spacer spacing shall not exceed 1500 mm (5 feet ) .

5 . Duct lines shall be installed no less than 30 0 mm (12 i nche s) from

other utility s yste ms, such as w ate r, sew er, and chilled w ate r.

6. Clearances between individual duc ts :a. For like servi ces, not less than 75 mm ( 3 inches).

b . For power and signal serv ices , not less than 150 mm (6 inches).

c. Provide plastic spacers to maintain clea rances.

d. Provide nonferrous tie wires to prevent displacement of the ducts

during pouring of concrete. Tie wires shall not act as

substitute for spac ers.

7 . Duct lines shall terminate at window openings in manhole walls as

shown on the drawings . All ducts shall be fitted with end bel ls.

8 . Couple the ducts with proper coupli ngs. Stagger couplings in rows

and layers to insure maximum strength and rigidity of the duct bank.

9. Keep ducts clean of ear th, san d, or gravel during construct ion, and

seal with tapered plugs upon completion of each portion of the work.

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 8





B . Concrete Encased Ducts and Condui ts:

1 . Install concrete encased ducts for medium and high voltage syst ems,

low voltage sy ste ms, and signal systems unless otherwise shown on

the drawings.

2 . Duct lines shall consist of single or multiple duct a ssembliesencased in con cre te. Ducts shall be uniform in size and material

throughout the install ation.

3 . Tops of concrete-encased ducts shall b e :

a. Not less than 600 mm ( 24 inche s) and not less than shown on t he

drawin gs, below finished gra de.

b . Not less than 750 mm (30 inc hes) and not less than shown on the

drawings, below roads and other paved sur face s.

c. Conduits crossing under grade slab construction joint s shall be

installed a minimum of 1200 mm (4 fee t) below sl ab .4 . Extend the concrete envelope encasing the ducts not less than 75 mm

(3 inc hes) beyond the outside walls of the outer ducts and conduit s.

5 . Within 3000 mm (10 fe et) of building, manhole and handhole wall

pene trat ions , install reinforcing steel bars at the top and bottom

of each concrete envelope to provide protection against vertical

shearing.

6. Install reinforcing steel bars at the top and bottom of each

concrete envelope of all ducts underneath roadways and parking

areas.7 . Where new d uc ts , condu its, and concrete envelopes are to be joined

to existing m anhol es, handh oles, du ct s, cond uits , and concrete

envelop es, make the joints with the proper fittings and fabricate

the concrete envelopes to insure smooth durable transiti ons.

8 . Conduit joints in concrete may be placed side by side horizontally

but shall be staggered at least 150 mm (6 inc hes) vertically.

C . Concrete-Encased Conduit Iden tificat ion: Place continuous strip of

warning tape approximately 3 00 mm (1 2 inch es) above ducts or conduits

before backfilling tre nch es. Warning tape shall be preprinted withproper identification.

D. Spare Ducts and C ondui ts: Where spare ducts are sh own , they shall have

a nyl on pull rope instal led. They shall be capped at each end and

labeled as to location of the other end.

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 9





E . Duct and Conduit Cleanin g:

1 . Upon completion of the duct bank installa tion, a standard flexible

mandrel shall be pulled through each duct to loosen particles of

ear th, san d, or foreign material left in the l in e. The mandrel shall

be not less than 3600 mm (12 in ches ) lo ng, and shall have a diameternot less than 13 mm (1/2 in ch) less than the inside diameter of the

duct. A brush with stiff bristles shall then be pulled through each

duct to remove the loosened part icles. The diameter of the brush

shall be the same a s , or slightly larger than the diameter of the

duct.

2 . Mandrel pulls shall be witnessed by the Resident Enginee r.

F . Connections to Manhol es: Duct bank envelopes connecting to underground

structures shall be flared to have enlarged cross-section at the

manhole entrance to provide additional shear str engt h. Dimensions ofthe flared cross-section shall be larger than the corresponding ma nhole

opening dimensions by no less than 300 mm (1 2 inche s) in each

dir ecti on. Perimeter of the duct bank opening in the underground

structure shall be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a

positive interlock between the duct bank and the wall of the structure.

Use vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to assure a

seal between the envelope and the wall of the s tructur e.

G . Partially Completed Duct Ban ks : During construction wherever a

construction joint is necessary in a duct ba nk , prevent debris such a smud and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs.

Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed du ct bank with

reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 600 mm (2 fe et ) back into the

envelope and a minimum of 600 mm (2 fe et ) beyond the end of the

envelop e. Provide one No . 4 bar in each cor ner, 75 mm (3 inches) from

the edge of the envelope. Secure corner bars with two No . 3 ties,

spaced approximately 300 mm (1 foot ) apa rt. Restrain reinforcing

assembly from moving during pouring of concrete.

- - - E N D - - -

BHB – March 3 1 , 2010

26 05 41 - 10




SECTION 26 05 71 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This section specifies the requirements of the Electrical System

Protective Device Study .

B . A short circuit and coordination study shall be prepared for th e

electrical over current device s to be installed under thi s project to

assure proper equipment and personnel protection.

C . The study shall present an organized time-current ana lysis of each

protective device in series from the individual device back to t he

utility and the on-site generator so urc es. The study shall reflect th e

operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions.

1.2 RELATED WORK



Division 2 6 .B . Section 26 24 1 6 , PANELBOARDS: Low voltage panelboards.

C . Section 26 23 0 0 , LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR: Low voltage switchgear .

1.3 SUBMITTALS


INSTALLATIONS , submit the foll owing:

B . Complete short circuit and coordination study as described her ein .

C . Protective equipment shop drawings shall be submitted simultaneously

with or after the protective device st udy . Protective equipment sh op

drawings will not be accepted prior to protective device stud y.

D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspecti on, submit four copies


1 . Certification by the Contractor that the protective device s have been

adjusted and set in accordance with the approved protective d evice

study.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A . The protective device study shall be prepared by qualified engineer s of

the switchgear manufacturer or an approved con sult ant. The Contractor is

responsible for providing all pertinent information required by the

preparers to complete the stud y.

1.5 REQUIREMENTS

A . The complete study shall include a system one line diagram , short

circuit and ground fault anal ysis , and protective coordination pl ot s.

B . One Line Diagram:

1 . Show , on the one line diagram , all electrical equipment and wiring t o

be protected by the overcurrent devices installed under this project.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 71 - 1





Clearly s ho w, on the one l in e, the schematic wiring of the electrical

distribution system .

2 . Also show on the one line diagram the following specific information:

a. Calculated fault imped ance, X/R rat ios , and short circuit values

at each bus .

b . Breaker and fuse ratings .

c. Generator kW and Transformer kVA and voltage ra ti ng s, percent

impeda nce, X/R rat ios , and wiring co nnections .

d. Voltage at each bu s.

e . Identification of each bu s.

f. Conduit mater ial, feeder size s, leng th, and X/R r ati os.

C . Short Circuit Stud y:

1 . Systematically calculate the fault impedance to determine the

available short circuit and ground fault currents at each bus.

Incorporate the motor contribution in determining the momentary and

interrupting ratings of the protective dev ices .

2 . The study shall be calculated by means of a computer pro gram .

Pertinent data and the rationale employed in developing t he

calculations shall be incorporated in the introductory remar ks of the

study.

3 . Present the data determined by the short circuit study in a table

forma t. Include the following:

a. Device identification.

b . Operating voltage.

c. Protective devic e.

d. Device rating.

e . Calculated short circuit curren t.

D. Coordination Curv es:

1 . Prepare the coordination curves to determine the required settin gs of

protective devices to assure selective coordination. Graphically

illustrate on log-log paper that adequate time separation exists

between series de vic es, including the utility company upstream

dev ice . Plot the specific time-current characteristics of each

protective device in such a manner that all upstream devices will b e

clearly depicted on one sh eet .

2 . The following specific information shall also b e shown on the

coordination curves :


b . Voltage and current ratio for cur ves .

c. 3-phase and 1-phase ANSI damage points for each tra nsformer.

d. No-d amage , melti ng, and clearing curves for fu se s.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 71 - 2





e. Cable damage curves .

f. Transformer inrush points .

g. Maximum short circuit cutoff poi nt.

3 . Develop a table to summarize the settings selected for the protective

device s. Include the following in the ta ble :


b . Relay CT ratio s, ta p, time dial, and instantaneous pickup .

c. Circuit breaker sensor rat ing, long-time , short-t ime, and

instantaneous sett ings , and time ba nds .

d. Fuse rating and ty pe .

e . Ground fault pickup and time del ay.

1.6 ANALYSIS

A . Analyze the short circuit calculatio ns, and highlight any equipment that

is determined to be underrated as speci fied. Propose approaches t o

effectively protect the underrated equip men t. Provide minor

modifications to conform with the study (Examples of minor modifications

are trip sizes within the same f ram e, the time curve characteristics of

induction relay s, C.T . ranges, etc. ).

B . After developing the coordination cu rv es , highlight areas lacking

coord inati on. Present a technical evaluation with a discussion of the

logical compromises for best coor dination.

1.7 ADJUSTMENTS, SETTINGS AND MODIFICATIONS

A . Necessary final field adju stme nts, settings and minor modifi cations

shall be made to conform with the protective device study wit hout

additional cost to the Government .

B. All final circuit breaker and relay settings and fuse sizes shall be

made in accordance with the recommendations of the protective device

study.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 71 - 3






MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 05 71 - 4




SECTION 26 09 13 – ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A . This section specifies the fu rnishing, installation and connection for a

complete operational Power Monitoring and Control Syste m. It shall

inclu de, but not be limited t o , remote devices for monitoring, control

and prot ection, device communication interface ha rdwa re,

intercommunication wiri ng, master control un it , softw are, print er,

ancillary equipment and startup and training services.

B . The power monitoring and control system shall be installed on the main

electrical equipment such a s the high voltage switchgear and low voltage

switchgear or switchboards including the essential electrical systems as

shown on the drawings or otherwise indicated herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK:



section of Division 26 .

B . Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SY STEM S: Conduits and

outlet boxes .

C . Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Low voltage cable .

D. Section 26 1 1 1 6 , SECONDARY UNIT SU BSTATIONS: Unit secondary substation.

E . Section 26 13 0 0 , MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR: High voltage switc hgear.

F. Section 26 18 4 1 , MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWIT CHES: High voltage switch es.

G. Section 26 27 1 3 , ELECTRICITY METERIN G: Electrical metering equipme nt.

H. Section 26 24 1 1 , DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS : Secondary distribution

switchboards.

I . Section 26 23 0 0 , LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR: Secondary distribution

switchgear.

J. Section 26 24 1 9 , MOTOR-CONTROL CENT ERS: Motor control assemblie s.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A . In accordance with Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS , submit the fol lowing:

1 . Product Dat a: For each type of product i ndicated.

2 . Attach copies of approved Product Data submittal s for products (suchas switchboards and swi tchg ear) that describe power monitoring and

control features to illustrate coordination among related equipment

and power monitoring and co ntro l.

C . Shop Drawi ngs: For power monitoring and control equi pment. Include

plans, elevat ions, sect ions , det ails , and attachments to other wor k.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 1





1 . Block Diag ram: Show interconnections between components specified in

this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system

components.

2 . Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dime nsions , weig hts , lo ad s,

required c learan ces, compone nts, and location and size of each field

connection.

3 . Detail shop drawings showing locations of devices and device addre ss,

connection s, conduit runs, wiring ty pe , etc…shall be submitted by the

manufacturers.

4 . Installations of devices , wirings , connections, programming, testing,

troubl eshoot ing, etc…shall be performed by factory certified

technicians.

5 . Certifications of the technicians shall be submitted.

D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1 . Software operating and upgrade manuals .2 . Software Backu p: On a magnetic media or compact di sc , complete with

Owner-selected opt ions .

3 . Device address list and the set point of each device and operator

opti on, as set in applications soft ware.

E . Software Upgrade K it : For Owner to use in modifying software to suit

future power system revisions or power monitoring and control revisions.

F. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operating

and programming digital and analog devices.

G. Field quality-control test rep or ts. Contractor shall perform complete

programming of the system to show all fun ction s, da ta , grap hics , etc…

H. Maintenance and Operation Da ta: For power monitoring and control unit s,

to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manu als. In addition

to items specified in Section 01 00 0 0 , GENERAL REQUIREMENTS include the

following:

1 . Operating and applications software documenta tion.

2 . Software licenses.

3 . Hard copies of manufacturer's specification she ets , operating

specifications , design gui des , user's guides for software and

hardwa re, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy s ubmitt al.

I . Other Informational Submittal s: System installation and setup g uid es,

with data forms to plan and record options and setup deci sions.

J. Qualific ations: The manufacturer of the equipment shall have been

regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified remote devic es for

a period of at least five (5 ) years and demonstrate that these products

have been utilized in satisfactory use in functioning system s for

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 2





similar applications. The manufacturer shall have at least five (5 )

years demonstrated capability in PMS d esi gn, installation and st art-u p.



supplemen ts, and errata), form a part of this specification to th e

extent refe rence d. Publications are referenced in the text by basic

designation on ly. Refer to latest p ublication.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

802.3 CSMA/CD Access Method and Physical Layer

Specification

37.90 Standard for Relays and Relay Systems Associated

with Electric Power Apparatus

C . FCC Emission Standards (FCC ) :

1 5 , Part J Radio Frequency Devices

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70 National Electrical Code (NE C)

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A . Electrical Compo nents, Devi ces, and Acces sories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 7 0 , Article 10 0 , by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended us e.

1.6 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A . Technical Suppo rt: Beginning with Substantial Completio n, provide

hardware and software support for two year s by factory certified

tech nici ans. VA personnel shall be trained for a period of a week for

operation and maintenance by certified technicians.

B . Upgrade Se rvic e: Update software to latest version at Project

comp leti on. Install and program software upgrades that become available

within two years from date of Substantial Completi on. Upgrading softw are

shall include the operating sys tems . Upgrade shall include new or

revised licenses for use of softwa re:

1 . Provide 30-day notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access t o

system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.7 WARRANTY

A . The manufacturer shall warrant the equipment supplied hereunde r. Thewarranty shall include :

1 . One (1 ) year free telephone technical support

2 . Warranty on all hardware supplied under this system shall be for on e

(1 ) year from start- up or 18 months from shi pment , whichever is

less.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 3





3 . When the Manufacturer provides start-up servic e on the hardware

supplied under this sys tem , the standard warranty shall be for tw o

(2 ) years from start-up or 30 months from s hipmen t, whichever is

less.

4 . During the guarantee peri od, emergency service and routine

maintenance calls shall be responded to within a 4-hour period during

the hours of 7 am-7pm. Between the hours of 7 pm-7am , calls shall be

responded within an 8-hour period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION:

A . Instrumentation and Recording Dev ice s: Monitor and record load profiles

and chart energy consumption patterns.

1 . Calculate and Record the followin g:

a. Load fact or.

b . Peak demand periods .c. Consumption correlated with facility activities.

B . Softw are: Calculate allocation of utility co sts .

1 . Automatically Import Energy Usage Records to Allocate Energy Costs

2 . Verify utility bills and analyze alternate energy rates.

C . Power Quality Monitoring: Identify power system anomalies and m easu re,

dis pla y, and record trends and alarms of the following power quality

parameters:

1 . Voltage regulation and u nbalan ce.

2 . Continuous three-phase rms v oltage .

3 . Periodic max./min./avg. samples of vol tage , amperage and watta ge.

4 . Harmonics.

5 . Voltage excursio ns.

2.2 MAIN NETWORK

A . The main network shall be a dedicated Ethernet net wor k, utilizing TCP/IP

protocol communicating at 10/100 Meg aBau d. The physical media used to

form the network shall be fi be r. Any devices connected to the main

network shall be equipped with an Ethernet communication card and

communicate at 10/100 Mega Baud . Provide network hubs, routers, switches,

media conv erts , et c. , as shown on drawings and as required for theinstallation.

B . The network shall have the capability of being connected to a high er-

level network by a router or gateway provided by others.

C . The system shall alarm on detected faults in communication server s or

remote device s.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 4





D. The system shall have the capability of being programmed and modified

onl ine . It shall not be necessary to sh ut down any part of the system

during programming operatio ns.

2.3 SURGE PROTECTION

A . Surge Prot ecti on: For external wiring of each conductor entry connection

to components to protect components from voltage surge s originating

external to equipment housing and entering through pow er, communication,

signal, control, or sensing lead s.

B . Transient Voltage Surge Suppression and Electromagnetic-Interference

Immunity : Include in solid-state equi pment. Comply with IEEE C37.90.

C . Signal wiring shall be integrated to the main Ethernet lin e.

2.4 APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE

A . Software: Configured to run on a portable laptop compu ter, a single P C ,

or a palm com put er, with capability for accessing a single meter at a

time.

B . Basic Requirements:

1 . Fully compatible with and based on the approved ma nufacturer’s

operating system.

2 . Password-protected operator login and access.

3 . Password-protected setup function s.

4 . Context sensitive on-line he lp .

5 . Capability of cr eating , deleting , and copying fi les ; and

automatically maintaining a directory of all fil es , including siz e

and location of each sequential and random-ordered rec ord .

6. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history;

automatically stored at central control PC and encrypted with a nine-

character alphanumeric pa sswo rd, which must be used to restore or

read data contained in backu p.

7 . Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made t o

user-defined system opt ions .

C. Data Formats:

1 . User-programmable export and import of data to and from commonly used

Microsoft Windows spread sheet, databa se, billi ng, and other

application s; using dynamic data exchange tech nology.

2 . Option to convert reports and graphics to HTML form at.

D. Metered D ata : Display metered values in real- time.

E . Remote Contro l:

1 . Display circuit-breaker status and allow breaker cont rol .

2 . User defined with load-shedding automatically initiated and executed

schemes responding to programmed time sc hed ule s, set points of

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 5





metered dema nds , utility contracted load she dding, or combinations of

these.

F. Waveform Da ta : Display and record waveforms on demand or automatically

on an alarm or programmed ev en t; include the graphic displays of th e

followin g, based on user-specified criter ia:

1 . Phase vol tage s, phase curr ents, and residual curre nt.

2 . Disturbance and steady-state waveforms up to 512 points per cyc le.

3 . Calculated waveform on a minimum of four cycles of data of the

following:

a. THD.

b . RMS magnitudes.

c. Peak value s.

d. Crest factors.

e . Magnitude of individual harmoni cs.

G. Data Shar ing : Allow export of recorded displays and tabular data t othird-party applications softwa re.

H. Tenant or Activity Billing Softw are:

1 . Automatically compute and prepare activity demand and energy-use

statements based on metering of energy use and peak demand integrated

over user-defined interv al.

2 . Intervals shall be same as used by electric u tilit ies, including

current vendor.

3 . Import metered data from saved records that were generated by

metering and monitoring software.

4 . Maintain separate directory for each tenant's historical billing

information.

5 . Prepare summary reports in user-defined formats and time in terval s.

I . Reporting: User commands initiate the reporting of a list of current

alar m, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past

events.

1 . Print a record of user-defined alarm , supervisory, and trouble events

on workstation pr inter .

2 . Sort and report by device name and by function.

3 . Report type of signal (al arm, supervisory, or trouble), description,

date, and time of occurrence.

4 . Differentiate alarm signals from other indications.

5 . When system is r ese t, report reset event with same information

concerning device, location, dat e, and tim e.

2.5 POWER MONITORS

A . Separately mou nted , permanently installed instrument for power

monitoring and cont rol:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 6





1 . Enclosure: NEMA 25 0, Type 1.

B . Environmental Condit ions: System components shall be capable of

withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical

or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1 . Indoor installation.

C . RMS Real-Time Measuremen ts:

1 . Current: Each phas e, neutral, average of three phas es, percent

unbalance.

2 . Volt age: Line-to-line each pha se, line-to-line average of three

phases, line-to-neutral each ph as e, line-to-neutral average of three

phases, line-to-neutral percent unbalan ce.

3 . Pow er: Per phase and three-phase tota l.

4 . Reactive Power : Per phase and three-phase tot al.

5 . Power Fact or: Per phase and three-phase tot al.

6. Frequency.7 . TH D: Current and volta ge.

8 . Accumulated Energy: Real kW h, reactive kVAR h, apparent kVAh

(signed/absolute).

9. Incremental Energy : Real k Wh , reactive kVAR h, apparent kVAh

(signed/absolute).

1 0 . Conditional Ene rgy: Real kW h, reactive kVA Rh, apparent kVAh

(signed/absolute).

D. Demand Current Calculatio ns, per Ph ase , Three-Phase Average and Neu tral:

1. Present.

2 . Running average.

3 . Last completed interva l.

4 . Peak.

E . Demand Real Power Calculati ons, Three-Phase To tal :

1. Present.



4 . Predicted.

5. Peak.

6. Coincident with peak kVA dema nd.

7 . Coincident with kVAR demand.

F. Demand Reactive Power Calculation s, Three-Phase To tal :

1. Present.



4 . Predicted.

5. Peak.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 7





6. Coincident with peak kVA demand.

7 . Coincident with kVAR dema nd.

G. Average Power Factor Ca lculations, Demand Coincide nt, Three-Phase To tal :

1 . Last completed in terva l.

2 . Coincident with kW pe ak.

3 . Coincident with kVAR p eak .

4 . Coincident with kVA p eak .

H . Power Demand Calcula tions : According to one of the following

calculation met hods , selectable by the u ser :

1 . Thermal Dem and : Sliding window updated every second for the pre sent

demand and at end of the interval for the last inte rva l. Adjustable

window that can be set in 1-minute intervals, from 1 to 60 minute s.

2 . Block Interval with Optional Subi nter vals : Adjustable for 1-minute

intervals, from 1 to 60 minu tes. User-defined parameters for the

following block intervals :a . Sliding block that calculates demand every secon d, with inter vals

less than 15 m inu tes , and every 15 seconds with an interval

between 15 and 60 minute s.

b . Fixed block that calculates demand at end of the interval.

c. Rolling block subinterval that calculates demand at end of each

subinterval and displays it at end of the inte rval.

3 . Demand Calculation Initiated by a Synchronization Sign al :

a. Signal is a pulse from an external sou rce. Demand period begins

with every pu ls e. Calculation shall be configurable as either a

block or rolling block calculation.

b . Signal is a communication sig nal . Calculation shall be

configurable as either a block or rolling block calculation.

I. Sampling:

1 . Current and voltage shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough

to provide accuracy to 63rd harmonic of 60-Hz funda mental.

2 . Power monitor shall provide continuous sampling at a rate of 128

samples per cycle on all voltage and current channels in the met er.

J. Minimum and Maximum Val ue s: Record monthly minimum and maximum val ue s,

including date and time of re cord. For three-phase measurements ,

identify phase of recorded va lue . Record the following p aramete rs:

1 . Line-to-line voltag e.

2 . Line-to-neutral vol tage .

3 . Current per phas e.

4 . Line-to-line voltage unbalance .

5 . Line-to-neutral voltage unbalance.

6. Power factor.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 8





7 . Displacement power factor .

8 . Total power.

9. Total reactive power .

1 0 . THD voltage L-L.

1 1 . THD voltage L-N.

1 2 . THD current.

13 . Frequency.

K. Harmonic Calculation: Display and record the following:

1 . Harmonic magnitudes and angles for each phase voltage and current

through 31st harmonic. Current and voltage information for all

phases shall be obtained simultaneously from same cycle.

2 . Harmonic magnitude reported as a percentage of the fundamental or as

a percentage of rms values, as selected by user.

L. Current and Voltage Ratings:

1 . Designed for use with current inputs from standard instrument currenttransformers with 5-A secondary and shall have a metering range of 0-

10 A.

2 . Withstand ratings shall be not less than 15 A, continuous; 50 A,

lasting over 10 seconds, no more frequently than once per hour;

500 A, lasting 1 second, no more frequently than once per hour.

3 . Designed for use with voltage inputs from standard instrument

potential transformers with a 120-V secondary.

M. Accuracy:

1 . Comply with ANSI C12.20, Class 0.5; and IEC 60687, Class 0.5 for

revenue meter s.

2 . Accuracy from Light to Full Rating:

a. Power: Accurate to 0.25 percent of reading, plus 0.025 percent of

full scal e.

b . Voltage and Curr ent: Accurate to 0.075 percent of reading, plus

0.025 percent of full scale.

c. Power Fac tor: Plus or minus 0.0 02, from 0.5 leading to 0.5

lagging.

d. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.01 Hz at 45 to 67 Hz.

N . Waveform Capt ure:

1 . Capture and store steady-state waveforms of voltage and current

channels; initiated manu ally . Each capture shall be for 3 cycles, 128

data points for each cyc le, allowing resolution of harmonics to 31st

harmonic of basic 60 Hz.

2 . Store captured waveforms in internal nonvolatile memor y; available

for PC display, archiving, and analysis.

O. Input: One digital input signal(s).

MDE 10335 – March 31, 2010

26 09 13 - 9





1 . Normal mode for on/off signa l.

2 . Demand interval synchronization p ul se , accepting a demand

synchronization pulse from a utility demand meter.

3 . Conditional energy signal to control conditional energy accumu lati on.

P. Outputs:

1 . Operated either by user command sent via communication l in k, or set

to operate in response to user-defined alarm or event.

2 . Closed in either a momentary or latched mode as defined by user.

3 . Each output relay used in a momentary contact mode shall have an

independent timer that can be set by u ser .

4 . One digital KY pulse to a user-definable increment of energy

measurement. Output ratings shall be up to 120-V a c , 300-V dc , 50 mA ,

and provide 3500-V rms isolat ion.

5 . One relay output module(s), providing a load voltage range from 20-

to 240-V ac or from 20 - to 30-V d c , supporting a load current of 2 A .6. Output Relay Contro l:

a . Relay outputs shall operate either by user command sent via

communication link or in response to user-defined alarm or event.

b . Normally open and normally closed con tac ts, field configured t o

operate as follows :

1 ) Normal contact closure where contacts change state for as long

as signal exists.

2 ) Latched mode when contacts change state on receipts of a pickup

sig nal ; changed state is held until a dropout signal i s

received.

3 ) Timed mode when contacts change state on receipt of a pickup

signa l; changed state is held for a preprogrammed duratio n.

4 ) End of power demand interval when relay operates a s

synchronization pulse for other de vice s.

5 ) Energy Pulse Outpu t: Relay pulses quantities used for absolute

kWh , absolute kVARh , kVA h, kWh I n, kVARh I n, kWh Ou t, and kVARh

Out.

6 ) Output controlled by multiple alarms using Boolean-type log ic.

Q . Onboard Data Logg ing:

1 . Store logged da ta , ala rms , eve nts , and waveforms in 800 KB of onboard

nonvolatile memory .

2 . Stored Data:

a. Billing Lo g: User configurable; data shall be recorded every 15

minut es, identified by mo nth , da y, and 15-minute interv al.

Accumulate 24 months of monthly d at a, 32 days of daily da ta , and

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 10





between 2 to 52 day s of 15-minute interval dat a, depending on

number of quantities s elected.

b . Custom Data Logs: Three user-defined lo g( s) holding up to 96

para mete rs. Date and time stamp each entry to the second and

include the following user defini tions:

1) Schedule interval.

2 ) Event definition.

3 ) Configured as "fill-and-hold" or "circu lar, first-in fir st-

out."

c. Alarm L og : Include ti me , da te , event informati on, and coincident

information for each defined alarm or event.

d. Waveform Lo g: Store captured waveforms configured as "fill-an d-

hold" or " circula r, first-in first-out."

3 . Default values for all logs shall be initially set a t fact ory, with

logging to begin on device power up .R. Alarms:

1 . User Options:

a. Define pickup, dropout, and delay.

b . Assign one of four severity levels to make it easier for user to

respond to the most important events firs t.

c. Allow for combining up to four alarms using Boolean-type logic

statements for outputting a single alarm.

2 . Alarm Event s:

a. Over/undercurrent.

b . Over/undervoltage.

c. Current imbalan ce.

d. Phase loss, current.

e . Phase loss, voltage.

f. Voltage imbalan ce.

g. Over kW dema nd.

h . Phase reversal.

i . Digital input off/on .

j . End of incremental energy interv al.

k. End of demand interval .

S. Control Pow er: 90 - to 457-V ac or 100 - to 300-V dc .

T. Communications:

1 . Power monitor shall be permanently connected to communicate v ia

Modbus TCP via a 100 Base-T Ethernet.

2 . Local plug-in connections shall be for RS-232 and 100 Base-T

Ethernet.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 11





U . Master Computer Statio n:

1 . The master station shall consist of a personal co mputer , 21-inch

color mon itor, and color pr inter. Personal computer shall have the

following minimum fe ature s:

a . Pentium IV computer with 256 MB RA M, 200 GB hard disk drive

b . Windows NT or Windows XP

c. Parallel and serial ports

d. Auto reboot capability after power failure

e . 2 color Laserjet pri nte rs. One strictly dedicated to the alarm

system and another for other normal functions.

V . Display Moni tor:

1 . Back lighted LCD to display metered data with touch-screen selecting

device.

2 . Touch-screen display shal l be a minimum 17-inch d iag ona l, flat screen

resolution of 800 by 600 RGB pi xel s, 256 col ors ; NEMA 2 5 0 , Type 1display enclosure.

3 . Display four values on one screen at same time .

4 . Coordinate list below with meter capabilities specified i n

subparagraphs abo ve:

a. Cur rent , per phase rm s, three-phase average and neut ral.

b . Volt age, phase to p has e, phase to n eutr al, and three-phase

averages of phase to phase and phase to neutral .

c. Real pow er, per phase and three-phase tota l.

d. Reactive pow er, per phase and three-phase tot al.

e . Apparent po wer , per phase and three-phase tot al.

f. Power fac tor , per phase and three-phase tot al.

g. Frequency.

h . Demand curr ent, per phase and three-phase ave rage.

i . Demand real powe r, three-phase tot al .

j . Accumulated energy (MWh and MVARh).

k. T HD, current and voltage, per pha se.

4 . Res et: Allow reset of the following parameters at the disp lay:

a. Peak demand curre nt.

b . Peak demand power (k W) and peak demand apparent power (kVA ) .

c. Energy ( MWh ) and reactive energy (MVARh).

2.6 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING

A . Low-Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conduc tor, color-coded, N o . 16 AWG

copper, minimum.

1 . Sheath: PVC ; except in plenum-type s pac es, use sheath listed for

plenums.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 12





2 . Ordinary Switching Circu its: Three con ductor s, unless otherwise

indicated.

3 . Switching Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator F eatu re: Five

conducto rs, unless otherwise indicated.

4 . Wires shall be all co pper , stranded, unshielded twisted p ai rs. All

wire shall be in condui t.

2.7 UPS

A . Provide UPS units with appropriate KVA to supply power to the Master

Computer Station with at least 30 minutes battery back-up po we r. UPS

shall be backed up by the generator powe r.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A . Comply with NECA 1 .

B . Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Section 27 15 0 0 ,

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CA BLIN G.

C . Wiring Met hod : Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within

consol es, cabi nets , des ks, and c ounte rs. Conceal raceway and wiring

except in unfinished sp ace s.

D. Wiring Met hod : Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within

consoles, cabi nets , des ks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling

spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may

be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spa ces ,

including plenum ceili ngs . Conceal raceway and cables except in

unfinished spaces.

E . Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26

05 11 REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTA LLATIONS.

F. Label each power monitoring and control module with a uniqu e

designation.

G. Grou nding: Comply with IEEE 1 10 0, "Power and Grounding Sensitive

Electronic Equipment."

H. All cables shall be installed in cond uits .

3.2 SPARE PARTS

A . Spares shall be provided for each component in the PLC system a s

follows:1 . One ( 1) power supply.

2 . One (1 ) CPU

3 . 10 % (minimum of one (1 )) of each type of I/O mod ule.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A . Perform tests and inspections and prepare test report s:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 13





1 . Manufacturer's Field Ser vic e: Engage a factory-authorized se rvice

representative to inspect compo nents, assem blies, and equipment

installatio ns, including conn ections, and to assist in testin g.

B . Tests and Inspections:

1 . Electrical Te sts : Use caution when testing devices containing solid-

state components.

2 . Continuity tests of circuits .

3 . Operational T es ts: Set and operate controls at workstation and at

monitored and controlled devices to demonstrate their functio ns and

capabilitie s. Use a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces

actual operating functions as recommended by man ufact urer. Submit

sequences for appr oval. Note response to each test command and

oper atio n. Note time intervals between initiation of alarm conditions

and registration of alarms at central-processing workstation.

a . Coordinate testing required by this Section with that required bySections specifying equipment being monitored and controlled.

b . Test LANs according to requirements in Section 27 15 0 0 ,

Communications Horizontal Cablin g.

c. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery

power for a period of no t less than 10 percent of calculated

battery operating tim e.

d. Verify accuracy of graphic screens and icon s.

e . Metering T es t: Load fee ders , measure loads on feeder conductor

with an rms reading clamp-on am met er, and simultaneously read

indicated current on the same phase at central-processing

works tatio n. Record and compare values measured at the two

loca tion s. Resolve discrepancies greater than 5 percent and record

resolution method and result s.

f. Record metered val ues , control settin gs, operat ions, cues, time

inte rva ls, and functional observations and submit test reports

printed by workstation printer.

C . Correct deficiencies, make necessary adju stments , and rete st. Verify

that specified requirements are m et .

D. Test Lab eling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspec tions,

apply a label to tested components indicating test resu lts , da te , and

responsible agency and representative.

E . Repo rts: Written reports of tests and obse rvations. Record defective

materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test r esu lts . Record

repairs and adjustm ents.

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as

specified above.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 14





3.4 DEMONSTRATION:

A . Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to a djus t, oper ate, and maintain sys tems . Refer to

Section 01 00 00,"GENERAL REQUIREME NTS.

1 . Train Owner's management and maintenance personnel in interpreting

and using monitoring displays and in configuring and using software

and repo rts. Include troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and

maintaining equip ment. Provide a minimum of 40 h ou rs ' training .

2 . Training Ai d: Use approved final versions of software and maintenance

manuals as training aids.

3 . Test and troubleshoot the system .

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 15






MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 09 13 - 16




SECTION 26 12 19 – PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED, MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


padmounted transformers .

B . Padmounted transformers shall be compl ete, outdoor ty pe , continuous

dut y, integral as sembly, grounded, tamper-resistant and weatherproof

with liquid-immersed transformers.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Section 13 05 4 1 , SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL

COMP ONEN TS: Requirements for seismic restraint of nonstructural

components.

B . Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTAL LATIONS: General


Division 2 6 .C . Section 26 05 7 1 , ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STU DY: Short

circuit and coordination study.

D. Section 26 05 1 3 , MEDIUM-VOLTAGE C ABL ES: High voltage cab les .

E . Section 26 24 1 6 , PANELBOARDS: Low voltage panelboar ds.

F. Section 26 05 4 1 , UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: Manhole s,

handholes and duct lines for underground raceway systems.

G. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS TEMS:


ground for possible ground cu rren ts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



B. Shop Drawings:



2 . Include electrical rat ing s, nameplate d at a, impeda nce, dimens ions,

weig ht, mounting d etai ls, decibel rati ng, termination i nformation,

temperature ri se , no load and full load lo sse s, regulatio n,

overcurrent prot ection, connection d iagr ams, and acce ssories.

3 . Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s nam e and catalog

number.

C. Manuals:

1 . Submit simultaneously with the shop draw ings , companion copies of

complete maintenance and operating manuals including technical data

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 1





TRANSFORMERS

sheets, wiring dia gra ms, and information for ordering replacement

parts.

a. Identify terminals on wiring diagrams to facilitate installation,

maintenance and operat ion.

b . Indic ate, on wiring dia grams , the internal wiring for each item of

equipment and interconnections between the items of equipment.

c. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of ma nuals

together with shop drawing s.

2 . Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of t he

final up-dated maintenance and operation manuals to the Resident

Engineer.

a . Update the manual to include any information necessitated by sho p

drawing approval.

b . Show all terminal identification.

c. Include information for te sting , repa ir, trouble shoot ing,

assembl y, disassembly, and recommended maintenance int ervals .

d. Provide a replacement parts list with current pri ces . Include a

list of recommended spare pa rt s, to ol s, and instruments for

testing and maintenance purposes .

e . Furnish manuals in loose-leaf binder or manufacturer’s standard

binder.

D. Certifications:

1 . Two weeks prior to the final inspec tion, submit four copies of th e

following certifications to the Resident Engineer:

a . Certification by the manufacturer that the equipment conform s to

the requirements of the drawings and sp ecifications.

b . Certification by the contractor that the padmounted transformers

have been properly installed, connected and teste d.



supplements, and err ata ) form a part of this specification to the exten t

refer enced . Publications are referenced in the text by designation o nl y.

Refer to latest edition of publication.

B . American Concrete Institute (ACI):

318 Building Code Requirements for Structural

Concrete

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

C37.47 High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution

Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 2





TRANSFORMERS

C57.12.25 Transformers-Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type,

Self Cool ed, Single-Phase Distribution

Transformers with Separable Insulated High

Voltage Connect ors; High Vol tage , 34500 Grd

Y/19920 Volts and Be low; Low-Voltage 240/120

Volts; 167 kVA and Smaller Requirements

C57.12.28 Pad-Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity

C57.12.29 Switchgear and Transformers – Pad-Mounted

Equipment – Enclosure Integrity for Coastal

Environments

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

D3487 Standard Specification for Mineral Insulating

Oil Used in Electrical Apparatus

E . Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

48 Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for

Alternating Current Cable Terminations 2.5kV

Through 765kV

386 Standard for Separable Insulated Connector

Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above

600V (ANSI/IEEE)

592 Standard for Exposed Semiconducting Shields on

High Voltage Cable Joints and Separable

Insulated Connectors

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

C57.12.26 Pad-Mounted, Compartmental-Type, Self-Cooled,

Three-Phase Distribution Transformers for Use

with Separable Insulated High-Voltage

Connector s, High-Volta ge, 34500 Grd Y/19920

Volts and Belo w; 2500 kVA and Smaller TR1-93

Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors.

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc . ( U L ) :

467 UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding

Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIP MENT, GENERAL

A . Equipment shall be in accordance with ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, NEMA, NFPA, UL ,

as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified.

B . Ratings shall not be less than shown on the drawings .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 3





TRANSFORMERS

C . Provide units designed to withstand the mechanical stresse s caused by

rough handling during shipment in addition to the electrical and

mechanical stresses that may occur during oper ation.

D. Completely fabricate units at the factory so that only the ext ernal

cable connections are required at the job s it e.

E . Thoroughly cl ea n, phosphatize and finish all the metal surfaces at th e

factory with a rust-resistant primer and dark green enamel finish coat,

except where a different color is specified in Section 09 06 0 0 ,

SCHEDULE FOR FINIS HES. All surfaces of the unit that will be in contact

with the concrete pad shall be treated with corrosion-resistant

compounds and epoxy resi n, or a rubberized sealing compo und.

2.2 COMPARTMENTS

A. Construction:

1 . The high and low voltage compartments and the transformer compartment

shall be fabricated by a single manufa cture r. The compartments and

the transformer tank shall be assembled as an integral unit by a

single manufacturer. Enclosures shall be in accordance with ANSI

C57.12.28.

2 . The high and low voltage compartments shall be separated with a st eel

barrier.

3 . The compartments shall be constructed of sheet steel (gage to me et

ANSI requir ements) with br acing , reinforcing gussets and jig-welding

to assure rectangular rigid ity.

4 . Use cadmium or zinc plated b ol ts , nuts and washe rs.

5 . Sufficient space shall be provided for equipm ent, cabling and

terminations in the compartment s.

6. Affix the transformer instruction nameplate permanently t o the unit

within the low voltage compartment. Voltage rati ngs , kVA r atin g,

connection configur ation, impeda nce, date of manufacture and serial

number shall be shown on the namepla te.

B . Doors:

1 . Provide a separate door for each compartment with provision for a

single padlock to secure the compartment ar ea . The high volta ge

compartment door shall be prevented mechanically from op eni ng, unless

the low voltage door is opened .

2 . The secondary compartment door shall have a one-piece steel handle

and incorporate three-point locking mechanisms to assure a secure and

tight door clos ing . Provide each compartment door with open-position

doorstops and tamperproof hi ng es . The hinge assembly shall be made of

corrosion-resistant material welded in place.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 4





TRANSFORMERS

3 . Provide a 50mm (2- inc h) size padlock for each assembly as approved by

the Chief Engi neer. Padlocks shall be keyed to the Engineer's

established key s et . Firmly attach the padlock to the door assembly

by a chain.

2.3 BIL RATING

A . 5 kV class equipment shall have a minimum 6 0 kV BIL rat ing, unless

otherwise specified .

B . 15 kV class equipment shall have a minimum 95 kV BIL r ating .

2.4 TRANSFORMER FUSE ASSEMBLY

A . The transformer primary fuse assembly shall be load break combination

fuse and dry-well fuse holder rated for system vo lta ge, for 10 load

makes and 10 load breaks with rated 200 amp load current at 75 percent

power fac tor , 10,000 symmetrical amperes close-in on fault dut y, and 9 5

kV BI L. The entire fuse assembly shall be removable through the use ofhot stick.

1 . The fuses shall be concealed, hot stick re movabl e, 50,000 ampere

symmetrical interrupting, 15 kV c la ss , non-expulsio n,

current-limiting primary distribution ty pe , size as shown on the

drawings. The fuses shall operate within the fuse holder as a unit

disconnecting me ans . Fuses shall be in accordance with AN SI C37.47.

2 . Transformers shall not have internal "weak li nk" fuses requiring

transformer tank cover removal for replacement.

3 . For units above 500kVA using fusing above the 50A 15kV and 100A 5kV

appl icat ion, a clip mounted arrangement of the current limiting fuse s

i s , (i .e . Live-front configuration) is req uired.

2.5 PRIMARY CONNECTIONS

A . Transformer primary connections shal l be live front bushings with NEMA

spades or eyebolt terminals suitable for cable sizes shown on t he

drawings.

B . Transformer primary connections shall be 200A deadfront load break wells

and inserts for cable sizes shown on the dra wings .

2.6 HIGH-VOTAGE SWITCHING

A . The transformer primary disconnect switch for radia l feeds shall be an

oil-immersed, inter nal, gang-operated, load-interrupter ty pe , rated 200

amper es, with a close-in on fault duty of 5,000 amperes symmetrical at

15 k V. The switch is to be a two-positio n, on- off, manual switch located

in the high voltage compartment and hot stick operated as described in

the following.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 5





TRANSFORMERS

1 . Continuous current 200 am pere s. A built in switch with momentary

current 10,000 amps symmetrical (2 seconds). Make and latch 6,000

amps symm etrical. Load interrupting 20 0 amps.

B . Where a loop-feed operation (sectionalizing s wit ch) is shown on the

drawings, provide a four-position configuration arrangement, oi l-

immerse d, gang-operated, rota ry, load-break swit ch. The switch mechanism

shall be spring-loaded and the operation shall be independent o f

operator s peed . The switch shall have the following ra ting s:

1 . Continuous current 200 a mper es. A built in switch with maximum ph ase-

to-phase 35 kV , maximum phase-to-ground 21. 1 kV. Momentary 10, 000

amps for 10 cycles symmetrical.

2.7 HIGH VOLTAGE PREFORMED TERMINATIONS

A . Terminate the high voltage cables in the high voltage compartment wit h

load break premolded rubber elbow connec tor s. Elbow connectors shall

have a minimum of 3mm (0.125 in ch ) semi-conductive shield material

covering the hou sin g. Each connector shall be tested - prior to shipment

from the factory.

B . Ground metallic cable shields with a device designed for th e purp ose . It

shall consist of a solderless connector enclosed in watertight rubber

housing covering the entire ass embl y. The grounding device and elbow

connector are to be of the same manufacturer to insure e lectrical

integrity of shielded pa rt s.

C . Premolded parts shall be suitable for submersible applicat ions.

D. Elbow connectors shall be rated as foll ows:

1 . Volt age: 14.4 kV phase-to-phase.

2 . BIL : 95 k V.

3 . AC withstands: 34 kV , 60 Hz for 1 minute.

4 . DC with stands: 65 kV (field test rating).

5 . Corona voltage : 11 kV minimum.

6. Continuous current: 200 amperes RM S.

7 . Short time curren t: 10,000 amperes for 12 cycle s.

8 . Fault clo sure: 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical for 1 0 cycles (after 1 0

loadmake/loadbreak operations at 200 amperes and 14.4 kV contact

voltage).

9. Swi tching: 10 loadmake/loadbreak operations at 200 am per es, 70-80

percent power fac tor , and 14.4 kV maximum recovery voltage b etween

contacts.

E . Interchang eability: The separable connector system shall include the

loadbreak elbo w, the bushing i nse rt, and bushing well. Separable

connectors shall comply with the requirements of IEEE 3 86 , and shall b e

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 6





TRANSFORMERS

interchangeable between sup pli ers . Loadbreak elbow and bushing insert

shall be from the same manufacturer.

F. Allow sufficient slack in high voltage cab le, groun d, and drain wires t o

permit elbow connectors to be moved to their respective parking stands.

G. Provide insulated cable supports to relieve any strain imposed by ca ble

weight or moveme nt.

2.8 LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT

A . Mount the transformer secondary main molded case circuit br eak er, low

voltage bushi ngs, and hot stick in the low voltage compartm ent.

B . The low voltage leads shall be brought out of the tank by e pox y,

pressure tight bushi ngs, and shall be standard arrangement per ANSI

C . Tin plate the low voltage neutral terminal and isolate from th e

transformer ta nk . Provide a removable ground strap sized in accordan ce

with the NEC and connect between the neutral and ground pa d.

D. Mount the main breaker off of the transformer tank to allow sufficient

ventilation and assure that the heat from the transformer tank will n ot

be transmitted through cond ucti on. Circuit breakers shall be of th e

ambient compensating ty pe , and have interrupting ratings for the

available fault current .

2.9 TRANSFORMERS

A . Transformers shall be thre e-phase , liquid-immersed, isolated windin g,

and self cooled by natural convection.

B . The kVA ratings shown on the drawings are for continuous duty with out

the use of cooling fans.

C . Temperature rise s shall not exceed the NEMA TR1 standards of 65 d egrees

C by resist ance, and 80 degrees C hot spot at rated kVA .

D. Transformer insulating material shall be mineral oil and shall be in

accordance with ASTM D 3487.

E . Transformer impedance shall be not less than 4.5 percent for sizes 150

kVA and lar ger. Impedance shall be as shown on the dra wings .

F. Sound levels shall conform to NEMA TR1 sta ndards .

G. Primary and Secondary Windings for Three-phase Transformers:

1 . Primary windings shall be delta co nnected.

2 . Secondary windings shall be wye connect ed, except where otherwise

indicated on the dra win gs. Provide isolated neutral bushing s for

secondary wye connected transformers.

3 . Secondary leads shall be brought out through pressure-tight epoxy

bushings.

H . Primary windings shall have four 2-1/2 percent fu ll capacity voltage

taps; two taps above and two taps below rated vo ltag e.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 7





TRANSFORMERS

I . Core and Coil Assemblie s:

1 . Cores shall be grain-oriented, non-aging, and silicon steel to

minimize losses.

2 . Core and coil assemblies shall be rigidly braced to withstand th e

stresses caused by rough handling during shipm ent , and stres ses

caused by any possible short circuit currents.

3 . Coils shall be continuous winding type without splices except fo r

taps.

4 . Coil and core losses shall be optimum for the most efficient

operation.

5 . Pri mar y, secondary and tap connections shall be brazed or pre ssure

type.

6. Provide end fillers or tie downs for coil winding s.

J. The transformer tan k, cov er, and radiator gage thickness shall not be

less than that outlined in ANSI.

K. Accessories:

1 . Provide standard NEMA featu res, accesso ries, and the following:

a . No-load tap changer (Provide warning sign).

b . Lifti ng, pulling and jacking facil ities.

c. Globe-type valve for oil filtering and dra ini ng, including

sampling device.

d. Pressure relief valv e.

e . Liquid level gage and filling plu g.

f. A grounding pad in the high and low voltage compartments.

g. A diagrammatic nameplate and operating instructions enclosed by a

transparent cover located in the low voltage compartment.

h . Dial type liquid thermometer with a maximum reading pointer and an

external reset.

i . Hot sti ck. Securely fasten hot stick within low volta ge

compartment.

2 . The accessories shall be made accessible within the compartments

without disassembling trims and cov ers .

L . Liquid filled transformers shall meet the minimum energy efficiency

values per NEMA TP 1 :

KVA

75

112.5

150

(%)

98.1

98.3

99.0

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 8





TRANSFORMERS

225

300

500

7501000

1500

2000

2500

99.0

99.0

99.1

99.299.2

99.3

99.4

99.4

2.10 CABLE FAULT INDICATORS (LOOP SYSTEM ONLY):

A . Provide each incoming and outgoing cable within the high voltage

compartment with a single-phase cable fault indic ator . Mount the

indicator on the cable support mem ber.1 . The sensor assembly shall have a split-core for easy installation

over the incoming and outgoing ca bl e. Provide a clamp to secure th e

two coil halves around the cabl e.

a. The core shall be laminated, grain-oriented silicon st eel , and

encapsulated.

2 . The coil shall be encapsulated. Select the coil to pick up at the

current setting shown on the draw ings.

a. The coil setting shall be accurate to within 10 percent of p icku p.

b . The coil current-time curve shall coordinate with the primary

current-limiting fu se .

B . Upon restoration of the system to normal operating co ndi tio ns, the cable

fault indicator shall automatically reset to normal and be ready t o

operate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install transformers as shown on the dra wing s, in accordance with the

NEC and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

B . Foundation:

1 . Provide foundation of reinforced conc rete, Type C , 21mPa (3000 ps iminimum , 28 day compressive strength), and comply with the ACI 31 8 .

2 . Locate the top of foundation pads 150mm (6-i nch es) above the adjacent

finished g rad e, unless otherwise shown on the dr awing s. Refer to

drawings for s iz e, locati on, and structural steel reinforcing

required.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 9





TRANSFORMERS

3 . Grade the adjacent terrain so that surface water will flow away from

the foundation.

4 . Anchor the transformers with cadmium or zinc plated b ol ts , nuts and

washer s. Bolts shall not be less than 12mm (1/2-in ch) diamet er.

C. Grounding:

1 . Ground each padmounted transformer in accordance with the

requirements of the N EC . Install 19mm (3 /4-inch ) diameter by 3m (10

fe et ) long copper-clad ground rods, driven 3m (10 fe et) below grade

to maintain a maximum resistance of five ohms to gro und . Thermite

weld the cable to th e ground rods.

2 . Connect the ground rod to the ground pads in the high and low voltage

compartme nts, and to the secondary (and prim ary) neutral with not

less than a 2/0 AWG bare copper conduc tor.

3 . Refer to the section of the specifications describing GROUNDING f or

testing.

4 . Independently connect cable shield grounding devices ground wires to

ground with sufficient slack to permit elbow connector operation.

Connect elbow connectors with a N o . 14 AWG bare copper drain wire

from its grounding eye to the related cable shield grounding de vice

ground wi re . Do not connect drain wires in any manner that will

permit circulating cu rrent s, or cable fault curr ents , to pass through

them.

3.2 SPARE PARTS

A . Deliver the following spare parts for the project to the Res ident

Engineer two weeks prior to final insp ection:

1 . Six stand-off insulators .

2 . Six insulated protective caps.

3 . One spare set of high voltage fuses for each size fuse used in the

project.

3.3 INSTRUCTIONS

A . The contractor shall instruct VA maintenance per sonne l, for not less

than one (1 ) 2-hour per iod , on the maintenance and operation of the

equipment on the date requested by the Resident Engineer.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 12 19 - 10



VA - CENTRAL TEXAS HEALTHCARE SYSTEM - WACO, TEXAS

SECTION 26 20 05 - UNITERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A . Applies to UPS A and UPS B .

B . This specification describes a three-phase continuous d uty , on-l ine ,

double conv ersion, solid-state uninterruptible power sys tem, hereafter

referred to as the UPS . The UPS shall operate in conjunction with the

existing building electrical system to provide power conditioning,

back-up and distribution for critical electrical load s. The UPS shall

consist of , as required by the proj ect, the UPS mo dul e, battery ca bine t,

maintenance b ypa ss, transformer cabi net, and other features as described

in this specification. The specified equipment is model#9312CJ-225.

1.2 UPS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A . UPS System Compon ents: The UPS system shall consist of the following

main components:

1 . UPS module containing a Rectifi er, Inverte r, Battery Charg er, Static

Bypass, and associated Control and Monitor Panel.

2 . Battery string in Line-and-Match Battery Cabinets.

3 . Line-and-Match accessory cabinets for trans forme r, maintenance

bypa ss, ti e, and distribution applicatio ns.

B . UPS Module Modes of Operation: The UPS Module shall operate as an on

line, fully automatic system in the following modes:

1 . Nor mal : Utilizing commercial AC power , the critical load shall be

continuously supplied by the Inverte r. The Inverter shall power the

load while regulating both voltage and frequ ency. The Rectifier

shall derive power from the commercial AC source and shall supply DC

power to the Inverte r. Simultaneously, the Battery Charger shall

charge the battery.

2 . Battery : Upon failure of the commercial AC powe r, the critical load

shall continue to be supplied by the Inv erter , which shall obtain

power from the batteries without any operator inter venti on. There

shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or

restoration of the commercial AC sourc e.

3 . Recha rge: Upon restoration of the AC sour ce, the Charger shall

recharge the batteries and simultaneously the Rectifier shall providepower to the Inverte r. This shall be an automatic function and shall

cause no interruption to the critical lo ad.

4 . Byp ass : If the UPS module must be taken out of the Normal mode for

overload , load fa ult , or internal fa ilure s, the static bypass switch

shall automatically transfer the critical load to the commercial AC

pow er. Return from Bypass mode to Normal mode of operation shall be

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 1





auto mati c. No-break transfer to and from Bypass mode shall be capa ble

of being initiated manually from the front panel.

1.3 REFERENCES

A . UL 1778 (Underwriters Labo ratori es) – Standard for Uninterruptible Power

Supply Equipm ent. Product safety requirements for the United Stat es.

B . CSA C22.2 No 107.1(Canadian Standards Ass ociat ion) – Commercial and

Industrial Power Supplie s. Product safety requirements for Canada .

C . NEMA PE-1 – (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) –

Uninterruptible Power Systems standard.

D. IEC 62040-1-1 (International Electrotechnical Comm issi on) –

Uninterruptible power systems (U PS) – Part 1-1 : General and safety

requirements for UPS used in operator access area s.

E . IEC 62040-1-2 (International Electrotechnical Commission) –

Uninterruptible power systems (U PS) – Part 1- 2: General and safety

requirements for UPS used in restricted access locat ions.F. IEC 62040-3 (International Electrotechnical Commission) –

Uninterruptible power systems (UP S) – Part 3 : Method of specifying the

performance and test requirements .

G. IEEE 58 7 (ANSI C62 .4 1) Category A & B (International Ele ctrical and

Electronics Eng inee rs) – Recommended practices on surge voltages in low

voltage power circuits .

H. CISPR 2 2 : FCC Rules and Regulations 4 7 , Part 1 5 , Class A (Federal

Communications Commission) – Radio Frequency Devices (prior to Feb 1 6 ,

2006).

I . MIL-HDBK-217E (Military Hand book ) – Reliability prediction of

electronics equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A . The UPS shall be supplied with sufficient docu menta tion, including th e

following manuals:

1 . Installation and Operation Manu al : One copy of the installation and

operation manual shall be furn ished . It shall possess sufficient

detail and clarity to enable the owner’s technicians or

representatives to install and operate the UPS equipment and

accessories. The manual shall include the following major it ems :

a.) UPS description

b. ) UPS site planning and unpacking

c.) UPS installation

d. ) Optional accessory installation

e. ) UPS theory of operation

f.) Operating procedures

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 2





g.) System events

h. ) UPS maintenance

i.) Performance and technical specifications

j.) Wiring requirements and recommendations

k.) Physical features and requirements

l.) Cabinet dimensions

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A . The UPS manufacturer shall have a minimum of forty years experience in

the desig n, manufacture and testing of solid-state UPS system s. A list

of installed UPS systems of the same type as the manufacturer proposes

to furnish for this application shall be supplied upon request.

B . The UPS manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification for

engine ering/ R&D, manufacturing facilities and service organizat ion.

C . The UPS manufacturer sh all maintain a staffed 7x24x36 5 call center for

technical and emergency s upport .D. Field Engineering Supp ort : The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a

nationwide field service department staffed by factory-trained field

service engineers dedicated to st artu p, maintenan ce, and repair of UPS

equ ipme nt. The organization shall consist of local offices managed from

a central locati on. Field engineers shall be deployed in key population

areas to provide on-site emergency response within 24 hou rs. A map of

the United States showing the location of all field service offices m ust

be submitted with the pro pos al. Third-party maintenance will not be

accepted.

E . Spare Parts Suppo rt: Parts supplies shall be located in the field to

provide 80 % of all emergency need s. The factory shall serve as the

central stocking facility where a dedicated supply of all part s shall be

available within 24 ho urs .

F. Product Enhancement Prog ram: The UPS manufacturer shall make available

feature upgrade service offerings to all users as they are developed.

These upgrades shall be available as optional field-installable kits.

G. Maintenance Cont rac ts: A complete range of preventative and corrective

maintenance contracts shall be provided and offered with the proposal.

Under these con tract s, the manufacturer shall maintain the user’s

equipment to the latest factory revision s.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A . The UP S shall withstand any combination of th e following external

environmental conditions without operational degradation.

1 . Operating Temperature: 0 degrees C to + 40 degrees C (32 degrees F

to 104 degrees F ) without de-rating (excluding batteries).

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 3





2 . Storage Temper atur e: - 25 degrees C to + 60 degrees C (-13 degrees F

to 140 degrees F ) . Prolonged storage above + 40 degrees C (104

degrees F ) will cause rapid battery self-disch arge.

3 . Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95 % maximum non -

condensing.

4 . Elevation:

a.) Operatio nal: 6600 ft (2000 m ) maximum without derating.

b. ) Transportation: Capable of air tran sport.

1.7 SAFETY

A . The UPS shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance

with UL 1778 .

B . The UPS sh all be certified by the Canadian Standards Association in

accordance with CSA C22.2 NO.107.1-M 91.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A . The specified equipment is based upon EATON / POWERWAR E as supplied by

Critical Site Solut ions, Irvi ng, Tex as. Contact Jacob Patterson

940.206.74 12 for pricing and additional infor matio n. Approved

substitutions are listed below . Any and all additional struct ural,

mech anic al, and electrical costs will be the sole responsibility of t he

installing cont ract or. Listed substitutions shall conform with the

specifications in its enti rety . Complete documentation including

lit erat ure , drawings and specification review sha ll be submitted and

included if substitution bid is provided.

1 . Substitutions

a.) Liebert

b. ) Toshiba

2.2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

A . UPS Continuous Rati ngs. The UPS shall be rated :

1 . Output Power Continuous Ratin g: The continuous output power rating

of the UPS shall b e 120kVA / 10 8kW. UPS systems less than 100kW will

not be accepted.

2 . Battery Autonom y: The UPS shall be capable of operating at full load

for a minimum of 12 minutes at 0.9 PF output at a temperature of 25°Con battery power.

B . Rectifier/charger in put :

1 . Nominal three phase input voltage: 208 (or 4 80 ) VA C:

2 . 3-wire plus ground for 3-wire plus ground output configuration

3 . Operating input voltage ran ge: +1 0% , -1 5% of average nominal input

voltage without battery disch arge.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 4





4 . For 60Hz sy ste ms, operating input frequency range shall be 5 5 to

65Hz.

5 . Input power factor 0.99 lagging.

6. Normal input current lim it: The UPS shall have the following

programmable input current limit settings while operating in normal

mode:

a.)Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 10 0

to 115 % of full-load input cur rent.

b.)Battery input current limit shall be adjustable from 1 0 % to 15 % of

the UPS full load input current regardless of the actual load on

the UP S.

7 . On generator input current limi t: The UPS shall have the following


mode on generator:

a.)Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from100% to 115 % of full-load input cur rent.

b.)Battery recharge input current limit shall be adjustable from 10%

to 1 5% of the UPS full load input current regardless of the actual

load on the UPS .

8 . Input current total harmonic distortion ( TH D) shall be less than

4.5%.

9. Power wal k-i n: Ramp-up to full utility load adjustable from 3

seconds to 60 second s.

C. Bypass input :

1 . Synchronizing bypass voltage range shall be +/- 10 % of average

nominal input voltage .

2 . Synchronizing bypass frequency range is centered on the nominal

frequency.

3 . Bypass and rectifier inputs can be supplied from out of phase so urces

if required.

4 . Input surge withstand capab ility: The UPS shall be in compliance

with IEEE 587 (ANSI C62.41), category A & B (6kV).

D. Rectifier/charger out put :

1 . Nominal DC voltag e shall be variable between 384VDC to 4 80VDC for

208V inp ut, and between 432VDC to 480VDC for 480V inpu t.

2 . Steady state voltage regulation shall be +/- 0.5%.

3 . Voltage ripple shall be less that 0.5% (peak-to-peak).

4 . Capa city : The rectifier/charger shall support a fully loaded

inverter and recharge the battery to 9 0% of its full capacity within

10 times the discharge when input current limit is set at maximum.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 5





5 . Low line operatio n: The rectifier/charger shall be capable of

sharing the DC load with the battery when the input voltage falls

below the specified operation input voltage ra ng e, the on battery

indicator shall enunciate operation in this mod e.

6. DC sensing : Redundant DC voltage sensing methods shall be

incorporated for providing battery over-voltage protection.

7 . Battery charger charac terist ics: The UPS battery charging system

shall have the following characteristics:

The charger shall be capable of being configured for several charge

modes including:

a.)A charging mode that increases battery life by allowing the

battery to re st , reducing positive plate corrosion

b.)A charging mode floating the battery at a set lev el , which can be

adjusted via soft war e, used for flooded cell applications

c.)Nominal Float Vol tag e: 2.25 V per cell.d.)Equalizing Vol tag e: 2.38 V maximum per cell (adjustable).

e.)Automatic (time ba sed ) or manual (user initia ted) equalization

available

f.)UPS module will automatically adjust battery shutdown based upon

loading and battery capacity.

(1)The UPS module shall automatically adjust the final discharge

voltage between 1.67 and 1.75 Volts per cell based on the

existing load and the rate and length of discharge.

(2)The absolute minimum operational voltage is 1.67 V per cell

(adjustable).

8 . The UPS modul e will automatically disconnect the battery system in

case of full battery discharge followed by prolonged utility AC

voltage fai lur e. The time window before battery disconnection occurs

shall be programmable for both time and volt age.

E . UPS output in normal mode

1 . Nominal output voltage 208 V AC , 3-phase , 3 wire or 4-wire (or 480V,

3-phase, 3-wire or 4-wire) plus ground at the output of the

Integrated Distribution and Bypass ca bin et. Output wiring

configuration is based upon input wiring configuration for systems

without internal transformers.

2 . Steady-state voltage regulation (in inver ter) shall be within +/ - 1 %

average from nominal output volta ge.

3 . Transient voltage response shall be < +/- 5% from nominal voltage for

100% load st ep , full load re-transfers and full load drop on b attery.

4 . Transient voltage recovery shall be 25ms to within +/- 1% of steady

state.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 6





5 . Linear load harmonic distortion capabili ty: Output voltage THD of

less than 2% for 100 % linear load .

6. Non-linear load harmonic distortion capabili ty: Output voltage THD

of less than 5% for 10 0% non-linear load when tested using the non

linear load described in IEC 62040-3 connected line to neutral.

7 . Manual output voltage adjustment shall be +/- 3 % from nomin al.

8 . Line synchronization range shall be +/- 3H z , adjustable to +/- 5 Hz .

9. Frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.01Hz free running.

1 0 . Frequency slew rat e shall be 1 Hz/second maximum (adjustable).

1 1 . Phase angle control :

a.)Balanced linear load shall be +/- 1 degree from nominal 120

degrees

b.)Unbalanced linear loads shall less than +/- 5 degrees from

average phase voltage for 100 % load unbalan ce.

1 2 . Phase voltage control :a.)Balanced linear loads shall be +/- 1% from average phase voltage

b.)Unbalanced linear loa ds shall be less than +/- 5% for 100 % load

unbalanced

1 3 . Overload current capability (with nominal line and fully charged

battery): The unit shall maintain voltage regulation for up to 110%

of resistive/inductive load for 10 m inut es, up to 1 25% for 30

seconds, and up to 15 0% for 10 seconds.

1 4 . Fault clearing current capability: 15 0% phase-to-phase for 10

cycles; 300 % phase-to-neutral for up to 10 cycles

15.Static transfer ti me : No bre ak, completed in less than 4 ms .

16.Common mode noise attenua tion:

a.) -65dB up to 20kHz, -40db up to 100kHz

b. ) > 100dB with isolation transformer

17.Acoustical noi se : Noise generated by the UPS under normal operation

shall not exceed 65dbA at one meter from any operator surface,

measured at 25 degrees C (77 degrees F) and full loa d.

18.EMI Suppression: The UPS shall meet FCC rules and regulation 4 7 ,

part 1 5 , for Class A devices prior to Feb 1 6 , 2006, CISPR .

19.Electrostatic discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet IEC 801-2

speci fica tions . The UPS shall withstand a 25 kV pulse without damage

and with no disturbance or adverse effect to the critical load.

20.Efficiency: The UPS efficiency shall be up to 9 4 % .

F. UPS in Parallel Configurations:

UPS modules shall be capable of being paralleled to increase system

power levels or to provide redundant pow er. A total of eight (8 ) UPS

modules shall be capable of parallel oper ati on, either for capacity or

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 7





redundant syst ems. It shall be possible to parallel up to four (4 ) UPS

modules without a central bypass cabi net. The parallel system shall

have intelligence to automatically recognize the need for capacity

and/or redun dancy . Parallel systems shall utilize autonomous UPS power

modules that do not rely on any control interconnections for

synchronized oper ation. The individual modules shall operate in a peer-

to-peer manner to provide automatic load shar ing, synchronization, and

selective tripping capa bili ties . “Master-slave” configurations are not

acceptable.

The parallel system shall utilize a communications network to provide

system information and st atu s, such as operating mode and meter d ata .

This network shall provide individual module information as well as

total system info rmat ion, and individual module information shall be

available from any module’s front panel display . The loss of this

system information network shall not cause the parallel units totransfer to bypass or drop the critical l oad .

2.3 UPS MODULE STANDARD FEATURES

The UPS module shall consist of the following standard com ponents :

A . Rectifi er/Char ger: The rectifier/charger shall convert incoming AC

power to regulated DC output for supplying the inverter and for charging

the batt ery. The rectifier/charger shall be a high-frequency PWM desi gn,

using Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistors (IGBTs). The modular design of

the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and replacement of the

rectifier/charger modul e. Mean time to repair (MTTR) for the module

shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to normal mod e.

The rectifier/charger module shall also provide the following:

1 . The rectifier shall be capable of drawing power from the utility with

a power factor of 0.99 under nominal conditions.

2 . The rectifier shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the

IGBTs from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings.

3 . An option shall be provided t o allow the rectifier to be capable of

operating from a delta transformer output or high impedance grounded

transformer (480V systems only).

B . Invert er: The inverter shall feature an IGBT pulse-width-modulation

(P WM) design with high speed switching. The inverter shall also have

the following features :

1 . The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified quality

output power while operating from any DC source voltage (rectifier o r

batte ry) within the specified DC operating ra nge .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 8





2 . The modular design of the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and

replacement of the inverter module . Mean time to repair (MTTR ) for

the module shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to

normal mode .

3 . The inverter s hall feature protection circuitry that p revents th e


C . Static Bypas s: The bypass shall serve as an alternative source of power

for the critical load when an abnormal condition prevents operation in

normal mo de . The bypass shall consist of a fully rate d, continuous

du ty , naturally commutated static switch for high-speed transf ers . The

bypass shall feature the following transfer and operational

characteristics.

1 . Transfers to bypass sh all be automatically initiated for the

following condition s:

a.) Output overload period ex pired.b. ) Critical bus voltage out of limit s.

c.) Internal over temperature period expired.

d.) Total battery discharge .

e.) UPS failure.

2 . Uninterrupted automatic re-transfer shall take place whenever the

inverter is capable of assuming the critical load.

3 . Uninterrupted auto matic re -transfers sh all be inhibited fo r th e


a.) When transfer to bypass is activated manually or remotely.

b. ) In the event of multiple transfers/re-transfer operations the

control circuitry shall limit “cycling” to three (3 ) operations

in any ten-minute perio d. The fourth transfer shall lock the

critical load on the bypass sour ce.

c.) UPS failure.

4 . Uninterrupted manual transfers shall be initiated from the control

panel. Uninterrupted manual transfers to bypass and from bypass

shall be possible with the inverter logic. During manual transfers

to bypass m od e, the inverter must verify proper bypass operations

before transferring the critical load to the byp ass .

5 . All tran sfers to bypass s hall be inhibited for the following

conditions:

a.) Bypass voltage out of limits (+/ - 10 % of nomin al)

b. ) Bypass frequency out of limits (+ /- 3 H z , adjusta ble, factory

set)

c.) Bypass out of synchronization

d. ) Bypass phase rotation / installation error

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 9





6. Static transfer t im e: No bre ak, complete in less than 4m s.

7 . The bypass shall be manually energized using the control panel or

remotely through a building alarm input.

D. Monitoring and control compone nts: The following components shall

provide monitor and control capability:

1 . Control panel with status indicators.

2 . Alarm and metering display.

3 . Building alarm monitori ng.

4 . Communication por ts.

E . Battery management sys tem : The UPS shall contain a battery management

system which has the following featu res:

1 . The battery management system shall provi de battery time remaining

while operating in normal mode and battery mo de . Battery time

available information shall be displayed real -ti me, even under

changing load condit ions. Upon commissioning, battery runtimeinformation shall be availa ble.

2 . The battery management system shall automatically test the battery

str ing( s) to ensure that the battery is capable of providing greater

that 80 % of it’s rated cap acity. Testing the batteries shall not

jeopardize the operation of the critical load . Upon detection of the

battery s tring(s ) not capable of providing 8 0 % , the UPS system will

alarm that the battery needs attention/ replaceme nt. The battery test

shall be able to detect the following:

3 . Open battery string

4 . Shorted battery string

5 . Battery capacity (runt ime) less than 80 % of “new” battery capacity .

6. The UPS shall communicate battery test and monitoring data to the U PS

manufacturer’s remote monitoring si te . Battery life remainin g,

cap acit y, and number of on-battery event s shall be provided in a

monthly report.

7 . An optional temperature sensor shall be available to monitor the

ambient temperature internal to the battery ca bin et. If the ambient

temperature inc rea ses , the UPS system charger shall automatically

reduce the charging voltage to a level recommended by the battery

manuf actur er. If the ambient temperature is decreased the UPS shall

automatically increase the battery charg e voltage to that recommended

by the battery manufacture r.

F. Wiring Termi nals: For 208Vac 4-wire output config urations, the neutral

output compression termin al shall be sized for 20 0% of UPS module rated

current to accommodate higher neutral currents associated with non

linear loa ds . The UPS module shall contain mechanical compression

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 10





terminals (adequately sized to accommodate 90°C wiri ng) for securing

user wiring to the following locat ions:

1 . Rectifier/charger input connections (3-wire plus grou nd)

2 . Bypass input connections (3-wire plus ground for 3-wire plus ground

output configuration (480Vac), or 4-wire plus ground for 4-wire plus

ground output configuration)

3 . DC link connections for battery cabinets (positive and negative).

4 . AC output connections (3 or 4 wires plus ground).

2.4 MECHANICAL DESIGN

A . Cabinet Weights and D imens ions: The combined width of the U PS ,

maintenance bypass and battery cabinet shall not exceed 50” in width and

have a maximum weight or 3,750 lbs.

B . Enclosu res: The UPS shall be housed in free-standing double front

enclosures (safety shie lds behind doo rs ) equipped with casters and

leveling fe et . The enclosures shall be designed for computer room

appl icat ions . Front doors shall have locks to prevent unauthorized

entry.

C . Ventilation: The UPS shall be designed for forced-air coolin g. Air

inlets shall be on the front of the unit . Air outlets shall be on the

top. Eighteen inches of clearance over the UPS outlets shall be

required for proper air circ ulati on. Air filters shall be commonly

available s izes .

D. No back or side clearance or acces s shall be required for the s yst em.

The back and side enclosure covers shall be capable of being located

directly adjacent to a wall.

E . Cable entr y: Standard cable entry for the UPS cabinet shall be through

either the enclosure bottom or to p. A dedicated wire way shall be

provided within the UPS cabinet for routing user input and output

wiring.

F. Front acces s: All serviceable subassemblies shall be modular and

capable of being replaced from the front of the UPS (front access only

required). Side or rear access for installatio n, serv ice, repair or

maintenance of the UPS system shall not be required.

G. Service area requirements: The 208Vac system shall require no more thanthirty-six (3 6) inches of front service access room and shall not

require side or rear access for service or installation.

2.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

A . Microprocessor controlled circu itry : The UPS controls shall have the

following design and operating characteristics:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 11





1 . Fully automatic operation of the UPS shall b e provided through t he

use of microprocessor controlled Digital Signal Proce ssing . DSP

shall eliminate variances from component tolerance or dr if t, and

provide consistent operational res ponses .

2 . All operating and protection parameters shall be firmware controlled,

thus eliminating a need for manual adjus tments. The logic shall

include system test capability to facilitate maintenance and

trouble shootin g. Printed circuit board replacement shall be possible

without requiring calibra tion.

3 . Start-up and transfers shall be automatic func tions.

B . Digital Front Panel Display: The UPS control panel shall be a digital

front panel display that features an 8x40 (8 l in es , each with 4 0

characters ) backlit LCD display . The LCD shall display UPS sta tus ,

meteri ng, battery sta tus , alarm/event qu eue , active alarms and U PS

conf igura tions . The front panel display shall show a system mimicdiagram with an outlined power pat h, current operating mode and event

logs.

C . Control Panel Indica tors: The UPS control panel shall provide the

following monitoring functions with indicator LED’s:

1 . NORM AL: This shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or

generator source is supplying power to the rectifier and the inver ter

is supporting the critical load . A text message shall indicate if

the bypass line is not within toleranc e.

2 . BYP ASS : This shall indicate that the UPS has transferred the load to

the bypass circ uit.

3 . BATTE RY: This shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or

generator source has failed and the battery is supplying power to th e

inver ter, which is supporting the loa d. A text message shall

indicate if the battery charge is low or if the battery is installed

but disconnected.

4 . ALARM : This shall indicate that the UPS detects an alarm condition ,

outlined in detail in the operator’s manu al.

D. Control Panel Cont rols: The UPS control panel shall provide the

following functions from front panel push buttons:

1 . EVE NTS : Displays the list of Active System Events and a historical

log of system ev en ts . Historical logs shall include a detailed time

stamped list of the latest 128 event s.

2 . MET ERS : Displays performance meters for the system or critical load.

When sele cte d, the front display shall show individual screens of

input param eters, output parameters or bypass parameters inc luding;

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 12





volta ge, current and frequ ency. In additi on, the battery display

shall show runtime remai ning.

3 . CONTR OLS: Displays a System Controls scre en. Allows selection of

operating m od e, nor mal , byp ass , charger on/off and Power Module

on/off.

4 . SET UP: Allows display contras t, date and time information serial

communication port configuration and display of firmware revision

numbers.

5 . RETUR N: Confirms selection or returns to previous screen.

E . Interface pane l: The UPS shall be equipped with an interface pa ne l,

located behind a protective co ve r, which provides the following signals

and communication features in a Class 2 environ ment:

1 . Alarm conta ct: A dry contact for annunciating a summary alarm shall

be provided for customer u s e. This contact shall be Form “C” capable

of supplying both N/O and N/C conta cts . Contact ratings shall be 5Amax at a voltage not to exceed 28VDC or 277V AC.

2 . RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) communications interface: Circuitry shall be

provided for one RS232 (EIA / TIA- 232 ) communication port for

connection to automated service department diagnostic to ol s. This

port may be used with simple (“d umb ”) terminals to gain remote a ccess

to all unit operation information.

3 . Building ala rms : Two inputs shall be provided for monitoring the

status of external dry contacts. Building alarms shall be set up

through the UPS configuration mode function on the RS232 (EIA / TIA-

232) port.

4 . External EPO con tacts : Shall be provided to connect an external

remote emergency power off switch to shutdown the UPS and de-energize

the critical load .

5 . Battery control conta cts: Contacts shall be provided to connect the

battery UVR and auxiliary signals from a battery breaker or battery

disconnect switch.

6. External bypass indicator conne ction: A connection point shall be

provided to acknowledge that an external maintenance bypass has been

closed around the U PS , placing the critical load on utility pow er.

7 . The system shall have options to add four (4 ) additional building

alar ms, 384 logged e ven ts, 4 additional lang uages , Mandarin or

Russian as a primary langu age.

2.6 COMMUNICATIONS

A . Communications Ba y: The UPS shall be equipped with field configurable

communications bays that will accommodate two ( 2) communication de vice s.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 13





A communication bay upgrade shall be available to increase the quantity

of communication devices up to four ( 4 ) .

B . Remote Monitoring:

1 . Optional WEB/SNMP communication capabilities will be available for

all systems.

2 . The UPS shall be able to be monitored remotely via communications

dev ice s. UPS manufacturer shall provide optional communications

devices capable of communicating via various industry standard

protocols such as RS232 and ModBu s. Monitoring of UPS status may

also be performed through isolated dry contact Form C relays.

3 . Remote monitoring of t he UPS shall also be possible through st atus

indicators elsewhere in the same facility through a device that

replicates these indicators .

C . The UPS communication capability should be able t o integrate into any

industry standard Building Management System (B MS ) and/or NetworkManagement System (NMS). The UPS must also be able to be monitored via

any standard Internet browser ( i. e. Internet Explorer and Netscape).

D. All optional hardware interfaces shall be “Hot-swappable” (UPS maintains

power to critical applications while changing interfaces).

E . Shutdown:

1 . There shall be a mechanism that provides gra cefu l, orderly,

unat tende d, sequential shutdown of one or multiple computers powered

by one UPS . This shutdown shall be performed via in-network or out -

of-network me ans . The order of shutdown shall be user-defined,

allowing the maximization of runtime on battery for more critical

systems.

2 . Shutdown of AS/400 computers shall be possible through open-collector

relay contacts or isolated, dry con tact , Form-C rela ys.

3 . The UPS shall also be capable of interfacing with an operating

system’s built-in shutdown routi ne, e.g. Windows N T . This shall be

done through a cable connection to the optional serial port on the

UPS.

F. Notification:

1 . There shall be a mechanism t o send alerts to key personnel via e mail

or SNMP tr ap s. An alarm notification may also be sent by a network

message.

2 . Dial-out to a computer for alarm notification may be perfo rmed. The

user may respond by dialing-in to retrieve alarm history and a

summary of current meter sta tus .

3 . Mana geme nt: A remote battery test may be performed via an Ethernet

networ k. The UPS shall be tested through invoking a single c ommand.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 14





2.7 UPS MODULE PROTECTION

A . Rectifier/Charger and Bypass protection shall be provided through

individual fusing of each phase .

B . Battery protection shall be provided by thermal-magnetic molded-case

circuit breakers in each battery cabinet (if standard battery pack is

provid ed) or external protective device for an external battery .

C . Electronic current limiting circuitry and fu ses in the Inverter circuit

shall provide output prote ction.

D. To comply with agency safety requ irem ents , the UPS module shall not rely

upon any disconnect devices outside of the UPS module to isolate the

battery cabinet from the UPS modul e.

2.8 INCLUDED ACCESSORIES AND SERVICES

The UPS system shall include the following accessories and servic es:

A . Battery Spill Containment (Enviroguard Model - CSSHR): The spill

containment system must be UL Listed and sized for the quantity of

batteries supplied.

B . VRLA OSHA Compliance Package : The compliance package provides the

required components (Spill clean up k it , sig ns, and eyewash stat ion) to

meet OSHA and Fire codes for VRLA batterie s.

C . Integrated Maintenance Bypass and Distribution Cab ine ts: Integrated

Line-and-Match cabinet shall be provided that includes:

1 . All hardware and interconnecting cable for connection to UPS

module.

2 . Manual maintenance bypass switch to isolate UPS module from

commercial AC input and critical lo ad . Switch shall provide complete

isolation of UPS for servicing a nd , if nece ssary, complete removal

and replacement of UPS while still providing bypass power to critical

lo ad . Switch shall be make-be fore-br eak, interlocked between UPS and

bypass to prohibit improper operatio n.

3 . K-13 rated output isolation transformer.

4 . Qty three ( 3 ) , 225A distribution circuit breaker s.

D. Power Xpert Communication Card : The communication card shall have two

independent RJ45 ports for redundant network configurations and one RJ45

console port for local configurations and optional connection to an

environmental monitoring pr ob e. The following communication protocols

must be supported: (strict requireme nt)

1 . Web server – Supports data access from Web bro wsers .

2 . Modbus TCP/IP – Supports data access from Modbus TCP client s.

3 . SNMP – Supports common network management too ls.

4 . SMTP – Supports email notification.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 15





5 . NTP – Supports ti me synchronization via an NTP s erver for card and

UPS synchronization.

6. DHCP – Supports automatic IP address assign ments, if enabled.

E . SNMP Network Adapter and UPS Power Monitoring Softw are : SNMP adapters

shall provide a communications interface between the UPS module and

SNMP-compatible network management sy ste ms. This capability shall allow

the unit to be monitored remotely over an Ethernet network using a

standard web browser .

1 . UPS Power Monitoring Softw are : This system shall continuously

monitor critical power elements associated with the U P S , using the

communications port on each module and a customer furnished P C . The

system shall automatically alarm if any problems arise and notify

local or remote personnel of the alarm condition via e ma il, pa ge , or

text message.

F. Battery Cabi net: The battery cabinet shall feature valve regulated,high-rate dis cha rge , lead-acid batteries which provide energy to the

support the critical load during a momentary loss of input power to the

rect ifie r. The batteries shall be flame retardant in accordance with UL

94V2 requiremen ts. The battery cabinet shall have the following

features:

1 . The battery cabinet sha ll be the same depth and height as the U PS

module.

2 . The battery cabinet shall feature a mechanical enclosure of like

appearance to the UPS module and shall feature c as ter s. Each battery

cabinet shall require front access only for inst alla tion, service and

main tena nce. The battery cabinet shall provide top and bottom cable

entry.

3 . Power wiring internal to each battery cabinet s hall be factory

prov ided . Each battery cabinet shall feature up to 10 battery trays

which can be individually disconnected from the battery cabinet power

wiring with quick disconnect de vic es. Each battery tray shall be

firmly secured to the battery cabinet frame with fas ten ers . Each

battery tray shall be removable from the front of the battery

cabinet.

4 . Each battery cabinet shall feature a DC rated circuit bre ake r. The

circuit breaker within the battery cabinet shall only provide

protection to the battery string within that battery cab ine t. For

battery configurations involving multiple battery cab ine ts, a battery

string in one battery cabinet may be isolated from the DC link via

its circuit breaker without removing other battery strings from the

DC link and the UPS modu le.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 16





5 . The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall featu re an A/B

auxiliary switc h. The UPS module shall be capable of monitoring and

alarming an open battery cabinet circuit breaker condition.

6. The circuit breaker in each battery cabin et shall feature a 48VDC

under voltage release device . The UV device shall operate to trip

the battery bre aker (s) for an emergency power off command or battery

disable command.

7 . Power and Control wiring between the battery cabinet and the UPS

shall be factory provided with compression type connectors between

cabinets.

8 . The batteries shall be configured with a ¼” spade type connector for

attaching sense leads to each jar to facilitate the future addition

of a battery monitoring system.

9. Expected battery li fe : 200 complete full load discharge cycles when

operated and maintained within specifications.G . eNotify Remote Monitoring Servi ces : 7x24 monitoring by trained

Powerware product te chni cian s. Proactive UPS monitoring including

monthly summary report s.

H . Equipment Star t-U p: Off hour start up shall be performed by Factory

authorized perso nne l. Third party start up is not acceptable

I . Frei ght: Dock to dock freight shall be included. (Off loading by

contractor)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instr uctions.

3.2 COMMISSIONING

A . Factory start-up shall be provided on a 5x 8 basis (7 x 24 optional).

Start-up service shall be provided at no extra charge and shall include

one visit to perform all procedures and tests specified within UPS

Installation and Operation ma nu al . UPS manufacturer shall also offer

the following optional servic es:

1 . Pre-energize visit to inspect installation and provide guidance to

installers as required .

2 . Post-start-up visit for alarm notification config urati on, operatortraining, generator testing, etc .

B . The following procedur es and tests shall be performed by Field Service

personnel during the UPS startup :

1 . Visual Inspection:

a.) Visually inspect all equipment for signs of damage or foreign

materials.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 17





b. ) Observe the type of ven tilation, the cleanliness of the roo m, the

use of proper si gn s, and any other safety related fac tors .

2 . Mechanical Inspection :

a.) Check all the power connections for tightn ess.

b. ) Check all the control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness

or proper seatin g.

3 . Electrical Pre-ch eck:

a.) Check the DC bus for a possible short circui t.

b. ) Check input and Bypass power for proper voltages and phase

rotation.

c.) Check all lamp test functions.

4 . Initial UPS Startup :

a.) Verify that all the alarms are in a “go” conditi on.

b. ) Energize the UPS module and verify the proper D C , wal kup, and AC

phase on .c.) Check the DC link holding volta ge, AC output vol tage s, and output

waveforms.

d.) Check the final DC link voltage and Inverter AC outp ut. Adjust

if required.

e.) Check for the proper synchronization.

f.) Check for the voltage difference between the Inverter output and

the Bypass sou rce.

g.) Optional on site full-load, step-load, and battery discharge

tests using supplier furnished load b ank , shall also be o ffered.

5 . Operational Training: Before leaving the sit e, the field service

engineer shall familiarize responsible personnel with the operation

of the UPS . The UPS equipment shall be available for demonstration

of the modes of operatio n.

3.3 WARRANTY

All components of the UPS system shall be covered by a standard one-year

limited factory warranty and service protection package.

One-year limited factory warranty shall include replacement coverage for

the UPS parts for a period of 18 months from shipment or 12 months from

start -up, whichever occurs soo ner.

One-year service protection package shall include 7x24 on-site

repair/replacement labor for UPS parts and batter ies; 7x24 technical

support cov era ge; and 7x24 remote monitoring service (with monthly reports

for UPS and battery performance). Standard response time shall be 8 hours

from receipt of call. Manufacturer shall also of fer , as an opti on, 7x24 on -

site service support with guaranteed response time s of 4 , or 2 hours in

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 18





certain major metropolitan ar ea s. Additional preventive maintenance visits

shall be available as an option for both UPS and battery components.

Manufacturer shall also include Start-up services consisting o f : 5x8

Start-up service of UPS and batteries , with option for 7x24 Start-u p. On -

site user t rainin g, Site A udi t, installation and commissioning of

monitoring ser vi ce, and validation of one-year limited factory warranty

will be performed during the start-u p.

Manufacturer shall also offer an optional service plan to provide 7x24 on-

site coverage (preventive and correc tive) for UPS and ba tteri es, guaranteed

response tim e, remote monitoring, Web access to service site hist ory,

annual Site A udi t, UPS and battery preventive maintenance vi sit , and

discounts on upgrade and modification kits. Manufacturer shall also

provide an optional battery service plan to provide parts-and-labor

coverage for partial and full battery str in gs , either with preventive

maintenance or replacement coverag e.

- - - END - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 19





THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 05 - 20





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A . Applies to UPS C .

B . This specification describes a three-phase continuous d uty , on-l ine ,

double conv ersion, solid-state uninterruptible power sys tem, hereafter

referred to as the UPS . The UPS shall operate in conjunction with the

existing building electrical system to provide power conditioning and

back-up for critical electrical loa ds . The system shall consist of , as

required by the proj ect, two UPS modu les , battery ca bine ts, tie cabi net,

maintenance b ypa ss, transformer cabi net, and other features as described

in this specification. The specified system is model#93126CJ-PR.

1.2 UPS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A . UPS C: The UPS system shall consist of the following main compone nts:

1 . UPS module containing a Rectifi er, Inverte r, Battery Charg er, StaticBypass, and associated Control and Monitor Panel.

2 . Battery string( s) in Line-and-Match Battery Cab inets .

3 . Line-and-Match accessory cabinets for trans forme r, maintenance

bypa ss, and parallel tie applications.

B . UPS Module Modes of Operation: The UPS Module shall operate as an on

line, fully automatic system in the following modes:

1 . Nor mal : Utilizing commercial AC power , the critical load shall be

continuously supplied by the Inverte r. The Inverter shall power the

load while regulating both voltage and frequ ency. The Rectifier

shall derive power from the commercial AC source and shall supply DC

power to the Inverte r. Simultaneously, the Battery Charger shall

charge the battery.

2 . Battery: Upon failure of the commercial AC pow er, the critical load

shall continue to be supplied by the Inv erter , which shall obtain

power from the batteries without any operator inter venti on. There

shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or

restoration of the commercial AC sourc e.

3 . Rechar ge: Upon restoration of the AC sou rce , the Charger shall

recharge the batteries and simultaneously the Rectifier shall provide

power to the Inverte r. This shall be an automatic function and shall

cause no interruption to the critical lo ad.

4 . Byp ass: If the UPS module must be taken out of the Normal mode for

overload , load fa ult , or internal fa ilur es, the static bypass switch

shall automatically transfer the critical load to the commercial AC

pow er. Return from Bypass mode to Normal mode of operation shall be

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 1





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

auto mati c. No-break transfer to and from Bypass mode shall be capa ble

of being initiated manually from the front panel.

1.3 REFERENCES

A . UL 1778 (Underwriters Labo ratori es) – Standard for Uninterruptible Power

Supply Equipm ent. Product safety requirements for the United Stat es.

B . CSA C22.2 No 107.1(Canadian Standards Ass ociat ion) – Commercial and

Industrial Power Supplie s. Product safety requirements for Canada .

C . NEMA PE-1 – (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) –

Uninterruptible Power Systems standard.

D. IEC 62040-1-1 (International Electrotechnical Comm issi on) –

Uninterruptible power systems (U PS) – Part 1-1 : General and safety

requirements for UPS used in operator access area s.

E . IEC 62040-1-2 (International Electrotechnical Commission) –

Uninterruptible power systems (U PS) – Part 1- 2: General and safetyrequirements for UPS used in restricted access locat ions.

F. IEC 62040-3 (International Electrotechnical Commission) –

Uninterruptible power systems (UP S) – Part 3 : Method of specifying the

performance and test requirements .

G. IEEE 58 7 (ANSI C62 .4 1) Category A & B (International Ele ctrical and

Electronics Eng inee rs) – Recommended practices on surge voltages in low

voltage power circuits .

H. CISPR 2 2 : FCC Rules and Regulations 4 7 , Part 1 5 , Class A (Federal

Communications Commission) – Radio Frequency Devices (prior to Feb 1 6 ,

2006).

I . MIL-HDBK-217E (Military Hand book ) – Reliability prediction of

electronics equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A . The UPS shall be supplied with s ufficient docu menta tion, including th e

following manuals:

1 . Installation and Operation Manu al : One copy of the installation and

operation manual shall be furn ished . It shall possess sufficient

detail and clarity to enable the owner’s technicians or

representatives to install and operate the UPS equipment and

accessories. The manual shall include the following major it ems :

a.) UPS description

b. ) UPS site planning and unpacking

c.) UPS installation

d. ) Optional accessory installation

e. ) UPS theory of operation

f.) Operating procedures

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 2





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

g.) System events

h. ) UPS maintenance

i.) Performance and technical specifications

j.) Wiring requirements and recommendations

k.) Physical features and requirements

l.) Cabinet dimensions

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A . The UPS manufacturer shall have a minimum of forty years experience in

the desi gn, manufacture and testing of solid-state UPS system s. A list

of installed UPS systems of the same type as the manufacturer proposes

to furnish for this application shall be supplied upon request.

B . The UPS manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification for

engine ering/ R&D, manufacturing facilities and service organizat ion.

C . The UPS manufacturer sh all maintain a staffed 7x24x36 5 call center fortechnical and emergency sup port.

D. Field Engineering Supp ort : The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a

nationwide field service department staffed by factory-trained field

service engineers dedicated to st artu p, maintenan ce, and repair of UPS

equ ipme nt. The organization shall consist of local offices managed from

a central locati on. Field engineers shall be deployed in key population

areas to provide on-site emergency response within 24 hou rs. A map of

the United States showing the location of all field service offices m ust

be submitted with the pro pos al. Third-party maintenance will not be

accepted.

E . Spare Parts Suppo rt: Parts supplies shall be located in the field to

provide 80 % of all emergency need s. The factory shall serve as the

central stocking facility where a dedicated supply of all part s shall be

available within 24 ho urs .

F. Product Enhancement Prog ram: The UPS manufacturer shall make available

feature upgrade service offerings to all users as they are developed.

These upgrades shall be available as optional field-installable kits.

G. Maintenance Cont rac ts: A complete range of preventative and corrective

maintenance contracts shall be provided and offered with the proposal.

Under these con tract s, the manufacturer shall maintain the user’s

equipment to the latest factory revision s.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A . The UP S shall withstand any combination of th e following external

environmental conditions without operational degradation.

1 . Operating Temperature: 0 degrees C to + 40 degrees C (32 degrees F

to 104 degrees F ) without de-rating (excluding batteries).

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 3





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

2 . Storage Temper atur e: - 25 degrees C to + 60 degrees C (-13 degrees F

to 140 degrees F ) . Prolonged storage above + 40 degrees C (104

degrees F ) will cause rapid battery self-disch arge.

3 . Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95 % maximum non -

condensing.

4 . Elevation:

a.) Operatio nal: 6600 ft (2000 m ) maximum without derating.

b. ) Transportation: Capable of air tran sport.

1.7 SAFETY

A . The UPS shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance

with UL 1778 .

B . The UPS sh all be certified by the Canadian Standards Association in

accordance with CSA C22.2 NO.107.1-M 91.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A . The specified equipment is based upon EATON / POWERWAR E as supplied by

Critical Site Solut ions, Irvi ng, Tex as. Contact Jacob Patterson

940.206.74 12 for pricing and additional infor matio n. Approved

substitutions are listed below . Any and all additional struct ural,

mech anic al, and electrical costs will be the sole responsibility of t he

installing cont ract or. Listed substitutions shall conform with the

specifications in its enti rety . Complete documentation including

lit erat ure , drawings and specification review sha ll be submitted and

included if substitution bid is provided.

1 . Substitutions

a.) Liebert

b. ) Toshiba

2.2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

A . UPS Continuous Rati ngs. The UPS shall be rated :

1 . Output Power Continuous Ratin g: The continuous output power rating

of the UPS shall b e 120kVA / 10 0kW. UPS systems less than 100kW will

not be accepted.

2 . Field Power Upg rad e: The following UPSs shall be upgradeable in the

field to 160kVA / 14 4kW . UPS systems (once upgraded) less than 144kW

will not be accepted.

3 . Battery Autono my: The UPS shall be capable of operating at full load

for a minimum of 12 minutes at 100kW output at a temperature of 25°C

on battery power.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 4





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

a . Once upgraded the batteries sha ll be capable of operation at full

load for a minimum of 8 minutes at 144kW output at a temperature

of 25°C on battery po wer .

B . Rectifier/charger in put :

1 . Nominal three phase input voltage: 208 (or 4 80 ) VA C:

2 . 3-wire plus ground for 3-wire plus ground output configuration

3 . Operating input voltage ran ge: +1 0% , -1 5% of average nominal input

voltage without battery disch arge.

4 . For 60Hz sy ste ms, operating input frequency range shall be 55 to

65Hz.

5 . Input power factor 0.99 lagging.

6. Normal input current lim it: The UPS shall have the following


mode:

a.)Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 10 0

to 115 % of full-load input cur rent.

b.)Battery input current limit shall be adjustable from 1 0 % to 15 % of

the UPS full load input current regardless of the actual load on

the UP S.

7 . On generator input current limi t: The UPS shall have the following


mode on generator:

a. ) Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable

from 100 % to 11 5% of full-load input curre nt.

b. ) Battery recharge input current limit shall be adjustable

from 10 % to 1 5% of the UPS full load input current regardless of

the actual load on the UP S.

8 . Input current total harmonic distortion ( TH D) shall be less than

4.5%.

9. Power wal k-i n: Ramp-up to full utility load adjustable from 3

seconds to 60 second s.

C. Bypass input :

1 . Synchronizing bypass voltage range shall be +/- 10 % of average

nominal input voltage .

2 . Synchronizing bypass frequency range is centered on the nominal

frequency.

3 . Bypass and rectifier inputs can be supplied from out of phase so urces

if required.

4 . Input surge withstand capab ility: The UPS shall be in compliance

with IEEE 587 (ANSI C62.41), category A & B (6kV).

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 5





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

D. Rectifier/charger out put :

1 . Nominal DC voltag e shall be variable between 384VDC to 4 80VDC for

208V inp ut, and between 432VDC to 480VDC for 480V inpu t.

2 . Steady state voltage regulation shall be +/- 0.5%.

3 . Voltage ripple shall be less that 0.5% (peak-to-peak).

4 . Capa city : The rectifier/charger shall support a fully loaded

inverter and recharge the battery to 9 0% of its full capacity within

10 times the discharge when input current limit is set at maximum.

5 . Low line operatio n: The rectifier/charger shall be capable of

sharing the DC load with the battery when the input voltage falls

below the specified operation input voltage ra ng e, the on battery

indicator shall enunciate operation in this mod e.

6. DC sensing : Redundant DC voltage sensing methods shall be

incorporated for providing battery over-voltage protection.

7 . Battery charger charac terist ics: The UPS battery charging system

shall have the following characteristics:

The charger shall be capable of being configured for several charge

modes including:

a.)A charging mode that increases battery life by allowing the

battery to re st , reducing positive plate corrosion

b.)A charging mode floating the battery at a set lev el , which can be

adjusted via soft war e, used for flooded cell applications

c.)Nominal Float Vol tag e: 2.25 V per cell.

d.)Equalizing Vol tag e: 2.38 V maximum per cell (adjustable).

e.)Automatic (time ba sed) or manual (user i nitiated ) equalization

available

f.)UPS module will automatically adjust battery shutdown based upon

loading and battery capacity.

(1)The UPS module shall automatically adjust the final discharge

voltage between 1.67 and 1.75 Volts per cell based on the

existing load and the rate and length of discharge.

(2)The absolute minimum operational voltage is 1.67 V per cell

(adjustable).

8 . The UPS modul e will automatically disconnect the battery system in

case of full battery discharge followed by prolonged utility AC

voltage fai lur e. The time window before battery disconnection occurs

shall be programmable for both time and volt age.

E . UPS output in normal mode

1 . Nominal output voltage 208 V AC , 3-phase , 3 wire or 4-wire (or 480V,

3-phase, 3-wire or 4-wire) plus ground at the output of the

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 6





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

Integrated Distribution and Bypass cab ine t. Output wiring

configuration is based upon input wiring configuration for systems

without internal transformers.

2 . Steady-state voltage regulation (in inve rter) shall be within +/ - 1 %

average from nominal output volta ge.

3 . Transient voltage response shall be < +/- 5% from nominal voltage f or

100% load st ep , full load re-transfers and full load drop on battery.

4 . Transient voltage recovery shall be 25ms to within +/- 1% of steady

state.

5 . Linear load harmonic distortion capabili ty: Output voltage THD of

less than 2% for 100% linear loa d.

6. Non-linear load harmonic distortion capabili ty: Output voltage THD

of less than 5% for 10 0% non-linear load when tested using the non

linear load described in IEC 62040-3 connected line to neutral.

7 . Manual output voltage adjustment shall be +/- 3 % from nomin al.

8 . Line synchronization range shall be +/- 3H z , adjustable to +/- 5 Hz .

9. Frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.01Hz free running.

10.Frequency slew ra te shall be 1 Hz/second maximum (adjustable).

11.Phase angle control :

a.)Balanced linear load shall be +/- 1 degree from nominal 120

degrees

b.)Unbalanced linear load s shall less than +/- 5 degrees from average

phase voltage for 100 % load un balance .

12.Phase voltage control :

a.)Balanced linear loads shall be +/- 1% from average phase voltage

b.)Unbalanced linear loa ds shall be less than +/- 5% for 100 % load

unbalanced

13.Overload current capability (with nominal line and fully charged

battery): The unit shall maintain voltage regulation for up to 110 %

of resistive/inductive load for 10 m inut es, up to 1 25% for 30

seconds, and up to 15 0% for 10 seconds.

14.Fault clearing current capability: 150 % phase-to-phase for 10

cycle s; 300 % phase-to-neutral for up to 10 cycles

15.Static transfer ti me : No bre ak, completed in less than 4 ms .

16.Common mode noise attenua tion:

a.)-65dB up to 20kHz, -40db up to 100kHz

b.)> 100dB with isolation transformer

17.Acoustical noi se : Noise generated by the UPS under normal operation

shall not exceed 65dbA at one meter from any operator surface,

measured at 25 degrees C (77 degrees F) and full loa d.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 7





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

18.EMI Suppression: The UPS shall meet FCC rules and regulation 4 7 ,

part 1 5 , for Class A devices prior to Feb 1 6 , 2006, CISPR .

19.Electrostatic discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet IEC 801-2

speci fica tions . The UPS shall withstand a 25 kV pulse without damage

and with no disturbance or adverse effect to the critical load.

20.Efficiency: The UPS efficiency shall be up to 9 4 % .

F. UPS in Parallel Configurations:

UPS modules shall be capable of being paralleled to increase system power

levels or to provide redundant power . A total of eight (8 ) UPS modules

shall be capable of parallel ope rati on, either for capacity or redundant

system s. It shall be possible to parallel up to four (4 ) UPS modules

without a central bypass cabine t. The parallel system shall have

intelligence to automatically recognize the need for capacity and/or

redundancy. Parallel systems shall utilize autonomous UPS power modules

that do not rely on any control interconnections for synchronized

operatio n. The individual modules shall operate in a peer-to-peer

manner to provide automatic load shari ng, synchronization, and selective

tripping capa bili ties . “Master-slave” configurations are not

acceptable.

The parallel system shall utilize a communications network to provide

system information and st atu s, such as operating mode and meter d ata .

This network shall provide individual module information as well as

total system info rmat ion, and individual module information shall be

available from any module’s front panel display . The loss of this

system information network shall not cause the parallel units to

transfer to bypass or drop the critical l oad .

2.3 UPS MODULE STANDARD FEATURES

The UPS module shall consist of the following standard compo nents:

A . Rectifi er/Char ger: The rectifier/charger shall convert incoming AC

power to regulated DC output for supplying the inverter and for charging

the batt ery. The rectifier/charger shall be a high-frequency PWM desi gn,

using Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistors (IGBTs). The modular design of

the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and replacement of the

rectifier/charger modul e. Mean time to repair (MTT R) for the module

shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to normal mod e.

The rectifier/charger module shall also provide the following:

1 . The rectifier shall be capable of drawing power from the utility with

a power factor of 0.99 under nominal conditions.

2 . The rectifier shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the


MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 8





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

3 . An option shall be provided t o allow the rectifier to be capable of

operating from a delta transformer output or high impedance grounded

transformer (480V systems only).

B . Inv ert er: The inverter shall feature an IGBT pulse-width-modulation

(P WM) design with high speed switching. The inverter shall also have


1 . The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified quality

output power while operating from any DC source voltage (rectifier o r

batte ry) within the specified DC operating ra nge .

2 . The modular design of the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and

replacement of the inverter module . Mean time to repair (MTTR ) for

the module shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to

normal mode .

3 . The inverter s hall feature protection circuitry that p revents th e


C . Static Bypas s: The bypass shall serve as an alternative source of power

for the critical load when an abnormal condition prevents operation in

normal mo de . The bypass shall consist of a fully rate d, continuous

du ty , naturally commutated static switch for high-speed transf ers . The

bypass shall feature the following transfer and operational

characteristics.

1 . Transfers to bypass sh all be automatically initiated for the


a.) Output overload period ex pired.

b. ) Critical bus voltage out of limit s.

c.) Internal over temperature period expired.

d.) Total battery discharge .

e.) UPS failure.

2 . Uninterrupted automatic re-transfer shall take place whenever the

inverter is capable of assuming the critical load.

3 . Uninterrupted auto matic re -transfers sh all be inhibited fo r th e


a.)When transfer to bypass is activated manually or remotely.

b.)In the event of multiple transfers/re-transfer operations the

control circuitry shall limit “cycling” to three ( 3 ) operations in

any ten-minute per iod . The fourth transfer shall lock the

critical load on the bypass sourc e.

c.)UPS failure.

4 . Uninterrupted manual transfers shall be initiated from the control

panel. Uninterrupted manual transfers to bypass and from bypass

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 9





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

shall be possible with the inverter logic. During manual transfers

to bypass m od e, the inverter must verify proper bypass operations

before transferring the critical load to the byp ass .

5 . All tran sfers to bypass s hall be inhibited for the following

conditions:

a.)Bypass voltage out of limits (+ /- 10% of nomi nal)

b.)Bypass frequency out of limits (+/ - 3 H z , adjusta ble, factory se t)

c.)Bypass out of synchronization

d.)Bypass phase rotation / installation error

6. Static transfer t im e: No bre ak, complete in less than 4m s.

7 . The bypass shall be manually energized using the control panel or

remotely through a building alarm input.

D. Monitoring and control compone nts: The following components shall

provide monitor and control capability:

1 . Control panel with status indicators.

2 . Alarm and metering display.

3 . Building alarm monitori ng.

4 . Communication por ts.

E . Battery management sys tem : The UPS shall contain a battery management

system which has the following featu res:

1. The battery management system shall provide battery time remaining

while operating in normal mode and battery mo de . Battery time

available information shall be displayed rea l-t ime , even under

changing load condit ions. Upon commissioning, battery runtime

information shall be availa ble.

2 . The battery management system shall automatically test the battery

str ing( s) to ensure that the battery is capable of providing greater

that 80 % of it’s rated cap acity. Testing the batteries shall not

jeopardize the operation of the critical load . Upon detection of the

battery s tring(s ) not capable of providing 8 0 % , the UPS system will

alarm that the battery needs attention /replace ment. The battery test

shall be able to detect the following:

3 . Open battery string

4 . Shorted battery string

5 . Battery capacity (run time) less than 8 0% of “new” battery capacity

6. The UPS shall communicate battery test and monitoring data to the U PS

manufacturer’s remote monitoring si te . Battery life remainin g,

cap acit y, and number of on-battery event s shall be provided in a

monthly report.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 10





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

7 . An optional temperature sensor shall be available to monitor the

ambient temperature internal to the battery ca bin et. If the ambient

temperature inc rea ses , the UPS system charger shall automatically

reduce the charging voltage to a level recommended by the battery

manuf actur er. If the ambient temperature is decreased the UPS shall

automatically increase the battery charge voltage to that recommended

by the battery manufacture r.

F. Wiring Termin als: For 208Vac 4-wire output config urations, the neutral

output compression termin al shall be sized for 20 0% of UPS module rated

current to accommodate higher neutral currents associated with non

linear loa ds . The UPS module shall contain mechanical compression

terminals (adequately sized to accommodate 90°C wiri ng) for securing

user wiring to the following locat ions:

1 . Rectifier/charger input connections (3-wire plus grou nd)2 . Bypass input connections (3-wire plus ground for 3-wire plus ground

output configuration (480Vac), or 4-wire plus ground for 4-wire plus

ground output configuration)

3 . DC link connections for battery cabinets (positive and negative).

4 . AC output connections (3 or 4 wires plus ground).

2.4 MECHANICAL DESIGN

A . Cabinet Weights and D imensio ns: The combined width of the U PS ,

maintenance bypass and battery cabinet shall not exceed 50” in width and

have a maximum weight or 3,750 lbs.

B . Enclosu res: The UPS shall be housed in free-standing double front

enclosures (safety shie lds behind doo rs ) equipped with casters and

leveling fe et . The enclosures shall be designed for computer room

appl icat ions . Front doors shall have locks to prevent unauthorized

entry.

C . Ventilation: The UPS shall be designed for forced-air coolin g. Air

inlets shall be on the front of the unit. Air outlets shall be on the

top. Eighteen inches of clearance over the UPS outlets shall be

required for proper air circ ulati on. Air filters shall be commonly

available s izes .

D. No back or side clearance or acces s shall be required for the s yst em.

The back and side enclosure covers shall be capable of being located

directly adjacent to a wall.

E . Cable entr y: Standard cable entry for the UPS cabinet shall be through

either the enclosure bottom or to p. A dedicated wire way shall be

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 11





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

provided within the UPS cabinet for routing user input and output

wiring.

F. Front acces s: All serviceable subassemblies shall be modular and

capable of being replaced from the front of the UPS (front access only

required). Side or rear access for installatio n, serv ice, repair or

maintenance of the UPS system shall not be required.

G. Service area requirements: The 208Vac system shall require no more than

thirty-six (3 6) inches of front service access room and shall not

require side or rear access for service or installation.

2.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

A . Microprocessor controlled circu itry : The UPS controls shall have the

following design and operating characteristics:

1 . Fully automatic operation of the UPS shall b e provided through t he

use of microprocessor controlled Digital Signal Proce ssing . DSPshall eliminate variances from component tolerance or dr if t, and

provide consistent operational respons es.

2 . All operating and protection parameters shall be firmware controlled,

thus eliminating a need for manual adjus tments. The logic shall

include system test capability to facilitate maintenance and

trouble shootin g. Printed circuit board replacement shall be possible

without requiring calibrati on.

3 . Start-up and transfers shall be automatic func tions.

B . Digital Front Panel Display: The UPS control panel shall be a digital

front panel display that features an 8x40 (8 l in es , each with 4 0

characters ) backlit LCD display . The LCD shall display UPS sta tus ,

meteri ng, battery sta tus , alarm/event qu eue , active alarms and U PS

conf igura tions . The front panel display shall show a system mimic

diagram with an outlined power pat h, current operating mode and even t

logs.

C . Control Panel Indica tors: The UPS control panel shall provide the

following monitoring functions with indicator LED’s:

1 . NORM AL: This shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or

generator source is supplying power to the rectifier and the inver ter

is supporting the critical loa d. A text message shall indicate if

the bypass line is not within toleranc e.

2 . BYP ASS : This shall indicate that the UPS has transferred the load to

the bypass circ uit.

3 . BATTE RY: This shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or

generator source has failed and the battery is supplying power to th e

inver ter, which is supporting the loa d. A text message shall

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 12





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

indicate if the battery charge is low or if the battery is installed

but disconnected.

4 . ALARM : This shall indicate that the UPS detects an alarm conditio n,

outlined in detail in the operator’s manu al.

D. Control Panel Cont rols: The UPS control panel shall provide the

following functions from front panel push buttons:

1 . EVE NTS : Displays the list of Active System Events and a historical

log of system ev en ts . Historical logs shall include a detailed time

stamped list of the latest 128 event s.

2 . MET ERS : Displays performance meters for the system or critical load.

When sele cte d, the front display shall show individual screens of

input param eters, output parameters or bypass parameters inc luding;

volta ge, current and frequ ency. In additi on, the battery display

shall show runtime remai ning.

3 . CONTR OLS: Displays a System Controls scre en. Allows selection of

operating m od e, nor mal , byp ass , charger on/off and Power Module

on/off.

4 . SET UP: Allows display contras t, date and time information serial

communication port configuration and display of firmware revision

numbers.

5 . RETUR N: Confirms selection or returns to previous screen.

E . Interface pane l: The UPS shall be equipped with an interface pa ne l,

located behind a protective co ve r, which provides the following signals

and communication features in a Class 2 environ ment:

1 . Alarm conta ct: A dry contact for annunciating a summary alarm shall

be provided for customer u s e. This contact shall be Form “C” capable

of supplying both N/O and N/C conta cts . Contact ratings shall be 5A

max at a voltage not to exceed 28VDC or 277V AC.

2 . RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) communications interface: Circuitry shall be

provided for one RS232 (EIA / TIA- 232 ) communication port for

connection to automated service department diagnostic to ol s. This

port may be used with simple (“d umb ”) terminals to gain remote a ccess

to all unit operation information.

3 . Building ala rms : Two inputs shall be provided for monitoring the

status of external dry contacts. Building alarms shall be set up

through the UPS configuration mode function on the RS232 (EIA / TIA-

232) port.

4 . External EPO con tacts : Shall be provided to connect an external

remote emergency power off switch to shutdown the UPS and de-energize

the critical load .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 13





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

5 . Battery control conta cts: Contacts shall be provided to connect the

battery UVR and auxiliary signals from a battery breaker or battery

disconnect switch.

6. External bypass indicator conne ction: A connection point shall be

provided to acknowledge that an external maintenance bypass has been

closed around the U PS , placing the critical load on utility pow er.

7 . The system shall have options to add four (4 ) additional building

alarms, 384 logged e ven ts, 4 additional lang uages , Mandarin or

Russian as a primary langu age.

2.6 COMMUNICATIONS

A . Communications Ba y: The UPS shall be equipped with field configurable

communications bays that will accommodate two ( 2) communication de vice s.

A communication bay upgrade shall be available to increase the quantity

of communication devices up to four ( 4 ) .B . Remote Monitoring:

1 . Optional WEB/SNMP communication capabilities will be available for

all systems.

2 . The UPS shall be able to be monitored remotely via communications

dev ice s. UPS manufacturer shall provide optional communications

devices capable of communicating via various industry standard

protocols such as RS232 and ModBu s. Monitoring of UPS status may

also be performed through isolated dry contact Form C relays.

3 . Remote monitoring of t he UPS shall also be possible through st atus

indicators elsewhere in the same facility through a device that

replicates these indicators .

C . The UPS communication capability should be able t o integrate into any

industry standard Building Management System (B MS ) and/or Network

Management System (NMS). The UPS must also be able to be monitored via

any standard Internet browser ( i. e. Internet Explorer and Netscape).

D. All optional hardware interfaces shall be “Hot-swappable” (UPS maintains

power to critical applications while changing interfaces).

E . Shutdown:

1 . There shall be a mechanism that provides gra cefu l, orderly,

unat tende d, sequential shutdown of one or multiple computers powered

by one UPS . This shutdown shall be performed via in-network or out -

of-network me ans . The order of shutdown shall be user-defined,

allowing the maximization of runtime on battery for more critical

systems.

2 . Shutdown of AS/400 computers shall be possible through open-collector

relay contacts or isolated, dry con tact , Form-C rela ys.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 14





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

3 . The UPS shall also be capable of interfacing with an operating

system’s built-in shutdown routi ne, e.g. Windows NT . This shall be

done through a cable connection to the optional serial port on the

UPS.

F. Notification:

1 . There shall be a mechanism t o send alerts to key personnel via em ail

or SNMP tr ap s. An alarm notification may also be sent by a network

message.

2 . Dial-out to a computer for alarm notification may be perfo rmed. The

user may respond by dialing-in to retrieve alarm history and a

summary of current meter status .

3 . Mana geme nt: A remote battery test may be performed via an Ethernet

networ k. The UPS shall be tested through invoking a single c ommand.

2.7 UPS MODULE PROTECTION

A . Rectifier/Charger and Bypass protection shall be provided through

individual fusing of each phase .

B . Battery protection shall be provided by thermal-magnetic molded-case

circuit breakers in each battery cabinet (if standard battery pack is

provid ed) or external protective device for an external battery .

C . Electronic current limiting circuitry and fu ses in the Inverter circuit

shall provide output prote ction.

D. To comply with agency safety requi reme nts, the UPS module shall not rely

upon any disconnect devices outside of the UPS module to isolate the

battery cabinet from the UPS module .

2.8 INCLUDED ACCESSORIES AND SERVICES

The UPS system shall include the following accessories and servic es:

A . Battery Spill Containment (Enviroguard Model - CSSHR): The spill

containment system must be UL Listed and sized for the quantity of

batteries supplied.

B . VRLA OSHA Compliance Package : The compliance package provides the

required components (Spill clean up k it , si gn s, and eyewash stat ion) to

meet OSHA and Fire codes for VRLA batterie s.

C . Integrated Maintenance Bypass and Tie Cabine ts: Integrated Line-and-

Match cabinets shall be provided that includ es:

1. Manual maintenance bypass switch to isolate UPS module from

commercial AC input and critical lo ad . Switch shall provide complete

isolation of UPS for servicing a nd , if nece ssary, complete removal

and replacement of UPS while still providing bypass power to critical

lo ad . Switch shall be make-be fore-br eak, interlocked between UPS and

bypass to prohibit improper operatio n.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 15





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

2 . K-13 rated output isolation transformer.

3 . Qty Six ( 6) 225Amp distribution circuit break ers.

4 . Two (2)-module parallel redundant tie cabinet in a Line-and-Match

configuration.

D. Power Xpert Communication Card : The communication card shall have two

independent RJ45 ports for redundant network configurations and one RJ45

console port for local configurations and optional connection to an

environmental monitoring pr ob e. The following communication protocols

must be supported: (strict requireme nt)

1 . Web server – Supports data access from Web bro wsers .

2 . Modbus TCP/IP – Supports data access from Modbus TCP client s.

3 . SNMP – Supports common network management too ls.

4 . SMTP – Supports email notification.

5 . NTP – Supports ti me synchronization via a n NTP server for card andUPS synchronization.

6. DHCP – Supports automatic IP address assign ments, if enabled.

E . SNMP Network Adapter and UPS Power Monitoring Softw are : SNMP adapters

shall provide a communications interface between the UPS module and

SNMP-compatible network management sy ste ms. This capability shall allow

the unit to be monitored remotely over an Ethernet network using a

standard web browser .

1 . UPS Power Monitoring Softwa re: This system shall continuously

monitor critical power elements associated with the U P S , using the

communications port on each module and a customer furnished P C . The

system shall automatically alarm if any problems arise and notify

local or remote personnel of the alarm condition via e ma il, pa ge , or

text message.

F. Battery Cabin et: The battery cabinet shall feature valve regulated,

high-rate dis cha rge , lead-acid batteries which provide energy to the

support the critical load during a momentary loss of input power to the

rect ifie r. The batteries shall be flame retardant in accordance with UL

94V2 requiremen ts. The battery cabinet shall have the following

features:

1 . The battery cabinet sha ll be the same depth and height as the U PS

module.

2 . The battery cabinet shall feature a mechanical enclosure of like

appearance to the UPS module and shall feature c as ter s. Each battery

cabinet shall require front access only for inst alla tion, service and

maint enanc e. The battery cabinet shall provide top and bottom cable

entry.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 16





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

3 . Power wiring internal to each battery cabinet s hall be factory

prov ided . Each battery cabinet shall feature up to 10 battery trays

which can be individually disconnected from the battery cabinet power

wiring with quick disconnect dev ice s. Each battery tray shall be

firmly secured to the battery cabinet frame with fas ten ers . Each

battery tray shall be removable from the front of the battery

cabinet.

4 . Each battery cabinet shall feature a DC rated circuit bre ake r. The

circuit breaker within the battery cabinet shall only provide

protection to the battery string within that battery cab ine t. For

battery configurations involving multiple battery cab ine ts, a battery

string in one battery cabinet may be isolated from the DC link via

its circuit breaker without removing other battery strings from the

DC link and the UPS module .

5 . The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall featu re an A/B

auxiliary switc h. The UPS module shall be capable of monitoring and

alarming an open battery cabinet circuit breaker condition.

6. The circuit breaker in each battery cabin et shall feat ure a 4 8VDC

under voltage release device . The UV device shall operate to trip

the battery bre aker (s) for an emergency power off command or battery

disable command.

7 . Power and Control wiring between the battery cabinet and the UPS

shall be factory provided with compression type connectors between

cabinets.

8 . The batteries shall be configured with a ¼” spade type connector for

attaching sense leads to each jar to facilitate the future addition

of a battery monitoring system.

9. Expected battery li fe : 200 complete full load discharge cycles when

operated and maintained within specifications.

F. eNotify Remote Monitoring Servi ces : 7x24 monitoring by trained

Powerware product te chni cian s. Proactive UPS monitoring including

monthly summary report s.

G. Equipment Star t-U p: Off hour start up shall be performed by Factory

authorized perso nne l. Third party start up is not acceptable

H. Frei ght: Dock to dock freight shall be included. (Off loading by

contractor)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instr uctions.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 17





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

3.2 COMMISSIONING

A . Factory start-up shall be provided on a 5x 8 basis (7 x 24 optional).

Start-up service shall be provided at no extra charge and shall include

one visit to perform all procedures and tests specified within UPS

Installation and Operation ma nu al . UPS manufacturer shall also offer

the following optional servic es:

1 . Pre-energize visit to inspect installation and provide guidance to

installers as requi red.

2 . Post-start-up visit for alarm notification config urati on, operator

training, generator testing, etc .

B . The following procedur es and tests shall be performed by Field Service

personnel during the UPS startu p:

1 . Visual Inspection:

a.)Visually inspect all equipment for signs of damage or foreignmaterials.

b.)Observe the type of venti lation, the cleanliness of the ro om, the

use of proper si gn s, and any other safety related fac tors .

2 . Mechanical Inspection :

a.)Check all the power connections for tightness.

b.)Check all the control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness

or proper seatin g.

3 . Electrical Pre-ch eck:

a.)Check the DC bus for a possible short circ uit.

b.)Check input and Bypass power for proper voltages and phase

rotation.

c.) Check all lamp test functi ons.

4 . Initial UPS Startup :

a.)Verify that all the alarms are in a “go” c ondition .

b.)Energize the UPS module and verify the proper D C , wal kup, and AC

phase on .

c.)Check the DC link holding v olta ge, AC output vo ltag es, and output

waveforms.

d.)Check the final DC link voltage and Inverter AC ou tpu t. Adjust if

required.

e.)Check for the proper synchronization.

f.)Check for the voltage difference between the Inverter output and

the Bypass source.

g.)Optional on site full- load , step -loa d, and battery discharge tests

using supplier furnished load b an k, shall also be o ffered.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 18





N+1 PARALLEL SYSTEM

5 . Operational Training: Before leaving the sit e, the field service

engineer shall familiarize responsible personnel with the operation

of the UP S. The UPS equipment shall be available for demonstration

of the modes of operatio n.

3.3 WARRANTY

All components of the UPS system shall be covered by a standard one-year

limited factory warranty and service protection package.

One-year limited factory warranty shall include replacement coverage for

the UPS parts for a period of 18 months from shipment or 12 months from

start -up, whichever occurs soo ner.

One-year service protection package shall include 7x24 on-site

repair/replacement labor for UPS parts and batter ies ; 7x24 technical

support cov era ge; and 7x24 remote monitoring service (with monthly reports

for UPS and battery performance). Standard response time shall be 8 hoursfrom receipt of call. Manufacturer shall also of fer , as an opti on, 7x24 on -

site service support with guaranteed response time s of 4 , or 2 hours in

certain major metropolitan ar ea s. Additional preventive maintenance visits

shall be available as an option for both UPS and battery components.

Manufacturer shall also include Start-up services consisting o f : 5x8

Start-up service of UPS and batteries , with option for 7x24 Start-u p. On -

site user t rainin g, Site A udi t, installation and commissioning of

monitoring ser vi ce, and validation of one-year limited factory warranty

will be performed during the start-u p.

Manufacturer shall also offer an optional service plan to provide 7x24 on-

site coverage (preventive and correc tive) for UPS and ba tteri es, guaranteed

response tim e, remote monitoring, Web access to service site hist ory,

annual Site A udi t, UPS and battery preventive maintenance vi sit , and

discounts on upgrade and modification kits. Manufacturer shall also

provide an optional battery service plan to provide parts-and-labor

coverage for partial and full battery str in gs , either with preventive

maintenance or replacement coverag e.

- - - END - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 20 10 - 19




SECTION 26 22 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


the dry type general-purpose trans formers.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPO NENT S:

Requirements for seismic restraint of nonstructural components.




C . Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SY STEM S: Conduits and

outlet boxes .

D. Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wirin g.

E . Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS:Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path

for possible ground fault curre nts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



B. Shop Drawings:



2 . Include electrical rat ing s, imped ance, dimensions, wei ght , mounting

detai ls, decibel rati ng, terminati ons, temperature r is e, no load and

full load los ses , and connection diagra ms.

3 . Complete nameplate data including manufacturer’s nam e and catalog

number.

C. Manuals:

1 . Submi t, simultaneously with the shop draw ings , companion copies of


sheets and wiring diagra ms.

2 . If changes have been made to the originally submitted maintenance and

operating m anua ls, then two weeks prior to final inspection submit

four copies of updated maintenance and operating manuals to t he

Resident Engineer .

D. Certific ations: Two weeks prior t o the final inspectio n, submit four

copies of the following to the Resident Engi neer:

1 . Certification by the manufacturer that the transformers conform to

the requirements of the drawings and s pecifications.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 22 00 - 1





2 . Certification that the equipment has been properly installed and

tested.






B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):



ST 20 Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A . Unless otherwise specified, dry type transformers shall be in accordance

with NE MA, NEC and as shown on the d rawin gs. Transformers shall be ULlisted or labele d.

B . Dry type transformers shall have the following feat ures :

1 . Self-cooled by natural conv ection, isolating wind ings , ind oor, dry

type. Autotransformers will not be accepted.

2 . Rating and winding connections shall be as shown on t he drawin gs.

3 . Transformers shall have copper wind ings .

4 . Ratings shown on the drawings are for continuous-duty without the u se

of cooling fans.

5 . Insulation system s:

a. Transformers 30 KVA and lar ger: UL rated 220 degrees C system

having an average maximum rise by resistance of 150 degrees C in a

maximum ambient of 40 degrees C .

b . Transformers below 30 KV A: Same as for 30 KVA and larger or UL

rated 185 degrees C system having an average maximum rise by

resistance of 115 degrees C in a maximum ambient of 40 degrees C .

6. Core and coil assemblie s:

a . Rigidly braced to withstand the stresses caused by short cir cuit

currents and rough handling during shipment.

b . Cores shall be grain orient ed, non-agi ng, and silicon stee l.

c. Coils shall be continuous windings without splices except fo r

taps.

d. Coil loss and core loss shall be minimum for efficient op eration.

e . Primary and secondary tap connections shall be brazed or pr essure

type.

f. Coil windings shall have end fillers or tie downs for maximum

strength.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 22 00 - 2





7 . Certified sound levels determined in accordance with NE MA , shall not

exceed the foll owing:

Transformer Rating

0 - 9 KVA

10 - 50 KVA

51 - 150 KVA

151 - 300 KVA

301 - 500 KVA

Sound Level Rating

40 dB

45 dB

50 dB

55 dB

60 dB

8 . Nominal impedance shall be as shown on the drawi ngs. If not shown on

drawings, nominal impedance shall be as permitted by NEM A.

9. Single phase transformers rated 1 5 KVA through 25 KVA shall have tw o,

5 p ercent full capacity taps below normal rated primary vol tag e. All

transformers rated 30 KVA and larger shall have t w o, 2-1/2 p ercent

full capacity tap s abo ve, and fo ur , 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps

below normal rated primary volta ge.

1 0 . Core assemblies shall be grounded to their enclosures by adequate

flexible ground str aps .

1 1 . Enclosures:

a. Not less than code gage steel .

b . Outdoor enclosures shall be NEMA 3 R.

c. Temperature rise at hottest spot shall conform to NEMA St andar ds,

and shall not bake and peel off the enclosure paint after the

transformer has been placed in servi ce.

d. Ventilation openings shall prevent accidental access to live

components.

e . Thoroughly clean and paint enclosure at the factory with

manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish.

1 2 . Standard NEMA features and accessories including ground p ad , lifting

provisions and nameplate with the wiring diagram and sound l evel

indicated on it .

13 . Dimensions and configurations shall conform to the space s designated

for their installations.

1 4 . Transformers shall meet the minimum energy efficiency valu es per NEMA

TP1 as listed below :

kVARating

Outputefficiency

(%)

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 22 00 - 3





15

30

45

75

112.5150

225

300

500

750

97

97.5

97.7

98

98.298.3

98.5

98.6

98.7

98.8

2.2 NONLINEAR TRANSFORMERS

A . Transformers shall be designed to withstand the overheating e ffects

caused by harmonics resulting from non-linear (non-sin usoida l) loads

such as office equipment using solid-state switching power supplies

(i.e. compu ters, laser printers and copiers).

B . Copper coil s’ neutrals shall carry at least 20 0% of normal phase

current.

C . Minimum efficiency designed to supply circuits with a harmonic profile

equal to or less than a K factor of 13 without exceeding specified

temperature ri se . Transformers with K factor of 13 shall be provided , if

K factor is not shown on contract drawing s. Table below applies to K-13

transformers only.

Harmonic

Fundamental

3r d

5th

7th

9th

11th

13th

15th

17th

K-13 (%)

100

70

42

5

3

3

1

0.7

0.6

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 22 00 - 4





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Installation of transformers shall be in accordance with the N EC , as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as shown on the drawings.

B . Install the transformers with adequate clearance at a minimum of 10 0 mm

(4 in che s) from wall and adjacent equipment for air circulation to

remove the heat produced by transfo rmers.

C . Install transformers on vibration pads designed to suppres s transformer

noise and vibrations .

D. Use flexible metal conduit to enclose the conductors from th e

transformer to the raceway syste ms.

3.2 SPARE PARTS

A . Deliver the following spare parts for the project to the Resi dent

Engineer two weeks prior to final insp ection:

1 . Six stand-off insulators .2 . Six insulated protective caps.

3 . One spare set of high voltage fuses for each size fuse used in the

project.

3.3 TRAINING

A . Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to adj ust , oper ate, and maintain syste ms. Refer

to Section 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIRE MENTS.

1 . Train Owner's management and maintenance personnel in interpreting

and using monitoring displays and in configuring and using software

and repo rts. Include troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and

maintaining equipm ent. Provide a minimum of 8 ho ur s' trainin g.

2 . Training Ai d: Use approved final versions of software and maintenance

manuals as training aids.

3 . Test and troubleshoot the system.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 22 00 - 5






MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 22 00 - 6




SECTION 26 23 00 – LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:


the low voltage indoor switchge ar.

1.2 RELATED WORK:


Requirement for Seismic Restraint for Nonstructural Components.




C . Section 26 05 7 1 , ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STU DY:

Coordination study of overcurrent protection devices.

D. Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SY STEM S: Conduct and

outlet boxes .

E . Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and Wirin g.

G. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS:


for possible fault current s.

1.3 FACTORY INSPECTION:

A . The Government shall have an option to witness factory te sts . All

expenses of the Government Representative's trip to witne ss the testing

will be paid by the Governmen t.

B . Notify the VA Central Office through the Resident Engineer not les s than

30 days prior to the scheduled factory tes ts.

C . Witness tests shall be a repeat of production tests as indicated in IE EE

C37.20 and ANSI C37.51. Tests shall includ e, but not be limited t o ,

power frequency dielectric , mechani cal, grounding of instrument

transformer c as e, electrical operation and control wi ring , calibration ,

control and wir ing, dielectric withst and, and no-load ope ration.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS:

A. Shop Drawings:1 . Sufficient informati on, clearly presented, shall be included to


2 . Include electrical ra tin gs, dimens ions, mounting det ails , mater ials,

required clearan ces, terminati ons, wei ght , temperature r is e, wiring

and connection diagrams, pla n, front, side , and rear elevations,

sectional vie ws , bus wo rk, circuit breaker frame s iz es , trip and

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 1





short-circuit r atin g, long-time , short- time, instantaneous and ground

fault set ting s, coordinated breaker and fuse cur ves , accessor ies, and

device nameplate data .

3 . Show the s iz e, ampere-rating, number of bars per phase and neutral in

each bus run (horizontal and vertical), bus s pacin g, equipment ground

bus, and bus material.

B. Manuals:

1 . Submi t, simultaneously with the shop d rawi ngs, companion copies of


sheets, wiring dia gra ms, and information for ordering replacement

parts.

a . Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified t o

facilitate instal lation, maintena nce, and operation .

b . Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of

equipment and the interconnection between the items of equipment.

c. Provide a clear and concise description of operat ion, which giv es ,

in de ta il , the information required to properly operate t he

equipment.

d. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of ma nuals


2 . Two weeks prior to final ins pection, deliver four copies of the final

updated maintenance and operating manuals to the Resident Engineer.

a . The manuals shall be updated to include any information

necessitated by shop drawing approval.

b . Complete "As Installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be

included which show all items of equipment and their

interconnecting wiring.

c. Show all terminal identification.

d. Include information for te sting , repa ir, trouble shoot ing,

assembl y, disassembly, and recommended maintenance inte rvals.

e . Provide a replacement parts list with current pri ces . Include a


testing and maintenance purp oses.

f. Furnish manuals in loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard

binder.

C. Certifications:



a . Certification by the Contractor that the assemblies have bee n

properly insta lled , adjusted and tes ted , including circuit breaker

settings.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 2





b . Certified copies of all of the factory design and production

tests, field test data sheets and reports for the assem blies.



supplements, and errata), form a part of this specification to th e

extent refe rence d. Publications are referenced in the text by basic


B . Institute of Engineering and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C37.13 Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures

C57.13 Instrument Transformers

C62.41 Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits


SG-3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Brea kers.

SG-5 Power Switchgear Assembl ies.


70 National Electrical Code (NEC ) .


977 Safety Fused Power Circuit Devices

1053 Ground Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A . Low voltage switchgear shall be in accordance with IE EE , NEM A, NFPA and

U L .

B . Provide complete switchgear including , but not limited to housi ng,

buses, draw out air circuit br eake rs, instruments and related

transfor mers, relays fuses and wirin g.

C . Switchgear dimensions shall not exceed the space provided a s shown on

the drawings.

D. Manufacturer’s nameplate shall include complete ratin gs of switchgear in

addition to date of manufact ure.

2.2 HOUSING:

A . Const ructi on: Provide housing of structural or formed steel frame braced

to maintain alignment and resist damage during s hipme nt, erect ion, and

by stresses resulting from short ci rcui ts. Enclose the frame on all

sides, to p, and bottom (except cable compartment) with sheet steel

covers, doors and panels and equip with interior bar rier s. Provide rear

access panels of the hinged type with provisions for padl ockin g. Provide

ventilating louvers where required to limit the temperature ris e of

current carrying pa rt s. Provide breakers with hinged covers and cutouts

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 3





for control mech anism . Protect all openings against entrance of falling

dirt, water or foreign matt er. Isolate each breaker in its own

comp artm ent. Metering transformers and instruments shall be similarly

isolated.

B . Painting: Enclosure shall be thoroughly cl eaned, phosphate treated and

primed by a phosphate or similar tre atm ent , and followed immediately

with a rust-inhibiting p ain t. Final finish coat shall b e the

manufacturers standard g ra y. Supply a quart of finish paint for touc h-up

purposes.

C . Breaker Compartment s: The breaker compartments shall include stationary

primary cont acts , stationary secondary contacts as requ ired, barr iers ,

and rails for the drawout elemen ts.

D. Cable Co mpartment: Provide adequate space for feeder cables and

connections including spare breakers or sp ace s.

2.3 BUSES :

A . Genera l: Arrange buses for 3 p has e, 4 wire dis tribution. The phase buses

(through b u s ) , neutral bu s , and ground bus shall be full capacity and

shall extend the entire length of the swit chge ar. Make provisions for

future extensions by means of bolt holes or other approved met hod . Brace

bus to withstand short circuit current available at the particular

locati on. No magnetic material shall be used between buses to form a

magnetic loop.

B . Material and Si ze : Buses and connections shall be hard-drawn copper of

98 percent conduc tivity . Bus size and arrangement shall be such that th e

temperature rise of the buses shall not exceed IEEE standards . Bus

connections to circuit breakers shall be co ppe r. Size feeder busing to

the line side of breakers based on I EE E. Bus laminations shall have a

minimum of 6 mm (1/4 inc h) spacin g.

C . Bus Connecti ons: Provide bolted or welded connectio ns. All contact

surfaces are of cop per . A minimum of two plated bolts per splice or

connection is required for nonwelded bus except where physical bu s size

permits only one bo lt ; the joint shall include an approved me an s, other

than fri ction , to prevent turn ing, twisti ng, or be nding. Bolts shall be

torqued to the values recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Neutral B us : Provide bare neutral bus mounted on insulated bus su pport s.

Provide neutral disconnect links to permit isolation of the neutral bus

from the common ground bus and service entrance conductors.

E . Ground B us : Provide an uninsulated 6 mm by 5 0 mm (1/4 inch by 2 i nch )

copper equipment ground bus bar the length of the switchgear and se cure

to each unit frame .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 4





F. Main Bonding Jum per: An uninsulated 6 mm by 50 mm (1/4 inch by 2 inc h)

copper bus shall interconnect the neutral and ground b us es , when the

secondary service equipment is incorporated within the switchgear to

establish the system common ground point.

2.4 INTERNALLY INTEGRATED SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES:

A . Integral Surge Suppressor:

1 . SPD (Surge Protective De vic es) shall be Component Recognized and

listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition to include Section

37.3 highest fault category testing on devices intended for service

entrance use . SPD shall also be UL 1283 listed .

2 . SPD shall be UL 67 list ed, installed by and shipped from th e

electrical distribution equipment manufacturer’s factory.

3 . SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of

protection; L-N, L-G, N-G , in WYE s yst ems , and L- L, L-G in DELTA

systems.

4 . SPD shall be modular in desi gn. Each mode shall be fused with a

200kAIC UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a t hermal

cutout devic e.

5 . SPD shall be integrally mounted to the bu s bars of the switchboard.

6. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible al arm . This

alarm shall activate upon a fault cond iti on. An alarm on/off switch

shall be provided to silence the ala rm. An alarm push to test switch

shall be provided as well.

7 . SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

a . Maximum surge current capability (single pulse rate d) per phase

shall be :

1 ) Service Entrance Switchboard 25 0 k A.

2 ) Distribution Panelboards 160 k A.

3 ) Branch Panelboards 160 kA .

4 ) Service Entrance MCC 240 kA specified .

5 ) Distribution Class MCC 160 k A.

b . UL 1449 Second Edition Listed and Recognized Component Suppression

Voltage Ratings (SV R’s ) for Service Entrance and Distribution

Location equipment shall not exceed the following:

c. Voltage Let-Thru values for Solidly Grounded Syst ems:

VOLTAGE

208Y/120

480Y/277

L-N

400V

800V

L-G

400V

800V

N-G

400V

800V

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 5





8 . SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of –50Db at 10 0 kHz with

an insertion ration of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A methodology.

9. SPD shall have the following diagnostic featu res: transient c ount er,

status lights on each p ha se , and one set of 1 NO and 1 N C auxiliary

dry contacts for alarming .

1 0 . SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five ye ar s, incorporating

unlimited replacements of suppressor part s if transients destroy them

during the warranty per iod. Warranty shall be the responsibility o f

the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be

supported by their respective field service division.

2.5 NAMEPLATES AND MIMIC BUS:

A . Nam epl ates : Provide laminated black phenolic resin with core with 6 mm

(1/4 in ch ) engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit breaker to

indicate the fe eder , panelboards and equipment serv ed. Plates shall be

mounted with plated screws on front of breaker or control station.

B . Mimic B us : Provide an approved mimic bus on front of each switchgear

assembly . Color shall be blue (480Y/277 Vol t) or black (208/120 Volt ) ,

either factory painted, plastic or metal st rip s. Plastic tape shall not

be us ed. Use symbols similar to a one line diag ram. (Refer to drawings).

Plastic or metal strips shall be mounted with plated sc rew s.

2.6 METERS AND INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

A . Instrument Tr ansformers: Comply with IEEE C 57. 13.

1 . Potential Tra nsfo rmer s: Secondary-voltage rating of 12 0 V and NEMA

accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W , X , and Y .

2 . Current Transformer s: Ratios as indicated ; burden and accuracy class

suitable for connected r ela ys, met ers , and instrume nts.

B . Power Circuit Monitoring and Control Sy stem : The Power Circuit Monitor

shall be a multi-functional, digi tal, data acquisition and control

dev ice . The Power Circuit Monitor shall be metered over 50 values and

extensive Min/Max data can be viewed on the LED dis play . Each Circuit

Monitor shall offer true RMS metering and communications standard.

Provide 0.2% accuracy true RMS metering and other powerful feature s such

as automatic relay co ntro l, waveform ca ptur e, on-board event and data

log gin g, and programmable logic for special applications like custom

data logging and control fun ctio n. On-board memory can be expanded t o

add 512 K or 102 4K. Provide input/output m odu les , status inp uts , a pulse

outp ut, relay outputs and analog inputs and outpu ts.

1 . Power Circuit Monitor shall be :

a . Certified ANSI C12.16 revenue accuracy

b . True RMS Metering through the 31 st harmonic

c. High acc uracy: 0.2% on current and voltage

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 6





d. Power quality readings displaye d: THD and K-Factor

e . Harmonic Analysis Data through 63rd harmonic

f. Automatic Alarm/Relay control

g. On-board event and data logging

h . Waveform capture

i . UL list ed, CSA Appr oved, CE Marketing, NOM Approved

j . MV-90 compatible

C . Relay s: Comply with IEEE C37.90, types and settings as i ndicated; with

test blocks and plug s.

D. Surge Arrest ers: Distribution cl as s, metal-oxide-varistor ty pe . Comply

with IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1:

1 . Install in cable termination compartments and connect in each phase

of circuit.

2 . Coordinate rating with circuit vol tage .

2.7 SPACE FOR FU TUR E:

A . Where "provision fo r" , "fut ure", or "sp ace" is noted on dr awin gs, equip

the compartment with ra il s, mounting b rack ets, supp orts , bus

conn ecti ons, and any appurtenances necessary for ready insertion of a

future breake r. A blank door shall close off the front of the

comp artm ent. Design buses for the breaker ampere rating as indicated on

the drawings.

2.8 BREAKER REMOVAL EQUIPMENT:

A . Furnish a portable elevating carriage or switchgear mounted devic e for

installation and removal of circuit break ers.

2.9 CONTROL WIRING:

A . Switchgear control wiring shall be 600 volt Class B stranded S IS .

Install all control wiring complete at the fac tor y, adequately bundled

and protected . All conductors size N o . 8 and s malle r, all conductors

across hi ng es , and all conductors for interconnection between shipping

units shall be Class C stranded. Size conductors in accordance with the

NEC. Provide separate control circuit fuses in each breaker compartment

and locate for ease of access and maintenanc e.

2.10 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

A . Genera l: Circuit breakers shall be dead f ron t, draw out, stored energy

type with solid state trip de vice s. Arcing contacts shall be renewa ble.

Circuit Breakers sh all be UL listed (Category PAQX ) .

B . Rati ng: Circuit breakers shall be 3 p ol e, 600 volts AC and be low , 60

cycle with indicated frame si ze , trip rating and system v oltag e.

Interrupting rating shall be without instantaneous tri p. Breakers shal l

have 30 cycle short time current ratings .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 7





C . Drawout Mou nti ng: Provide a racking mechanism to position and hold th e

breaker in the connected, test , or disconnected p ositio n. Provide an

interlock to prevent movement of the breaker into or out of the

connected position unless the breaker is tripped open.

D. Trip Devi ce s: Breakers shall be electrically and mechanically tr ip free

and shall have trip devices in each pol e. Unless otherwise i ndicated,

each breaker shall have over curr ent, short-circuit and integr al ground

fault trip dev ices . Trip devices shall be of the solid state type with

adjustable pick-up se ttin gs, with both long time and short time

elements, and integral trip unit testing pro visions . Devices shall have

time-delay band adjustment of min imum , inte rmed iate , and maximum

settin g. Long-time delay element shall have inverse time

characteristics. Main circuit breakers shall have short-time tr ip s, in

lieu of instantaneous trip s. Final sett ings , of pick-up and time bands

shall be as reflected by the Electric System Protective Device Study.

E . Position Indi cato r: Provide a mechanical indicator visible from the

front of the unit to indicate whether the breaker is open or closed.

F. Trip But ton : Equip each breaker with a mechanical trip button accessible

from the front of the do or , which shall permit tripping of the b reake r.

G. Padlo ckin g: Provisions shall be included for padlocking the breaker in

the open position.

H. Ope ration: Unless otherwise indicated on the draw ings , breakers 1600

ampere frame size and less shall be manually oper ated . Breakers larger

than 1600 ampere frame size shall be electrically operated.

I . Fused Circuit Bre ake rs: The fuses used with combination fused breakers

shall be high-interrupting capacity current-limiting type and

coordinated with the circuit break er. Fuses shall be on the line side of

the breaker on a common drawout carriage (except 3000 and 4000 ampere

breakers). Circuit breakers of 3000 and 4000 ampere frame size may have

their fuses in a separate compartment with drawout mou ntin g. A feature

shall be included which trips the breaker when any fuse b lo ws. An

interlock shall prevent the reclosure of the breaker until the blo wn

fuse is repl aced . A blown fuse indicator shall be provided on the front

of the b reake r. In the case of fuses in a separate comp artment, an

interlock shall be provided to require the breaker to be open before i t

is possible to open the fuse compartment do or.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install the switchgear in accordance with the NE C, as shown on the

drawin gs, and as recommended by the manufacturer.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 8





B . Anchor switchgear to the floor with plated 12.5 mm (1/2 in ch ) minimum

anchor bolts as recommended by the manuf actur er. // Anchor the

switchgear on two 100 mm (4 in ch ) minimum channel iron sills with plated

12.5 mm (1/2 in ch ) bol ts. Furnish sills to suit the switchgear.

Coordinate installation of sills with concrete pour of fl oo r. Sills

shall be level and grouted flush with fl oor .

3.2 INSTRUCTION:

A . Furnish the services of a competent instructor for one 4 hour period for

instructing personnel in the operation and maintenance of the switchgear

on the date requested by the Resident En gineer .

3.3 SPARE FUSES :

A . Furnish two spare sets of current-limiting fus es of each size and rating

for fused circuit brea kers. Each set shall consist of three curren t-

limiting fuses and three trigger fus es . A steel compartmented wall

mounted box or cabinet for fuse storage shall be provided and located inthe switchgear room where dire cted . Mark the cabinet with 6 mm (1 /4

in ch) high letters "SPARE FUSES ".

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 9






MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 23 00 - 10




SECTION 26 24 11 – DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION:


the distribution switchboa rds.

1.2 RELATED WORK:


Requirements for Seismic Restraint for Nonstructural Components.



section of Division 26 .

C . Section 26 05 7 1 , ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STU DY:

Coordination study of overcurrent protection devices.

D. Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SY STEM S: Conduits and

outlet boxes .

E . Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and wirin g.

G. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS:

Requirements for Personnel Safety and to provide a low impedance path

for possible fault current s.

1.3 FACTORY TES TS:

A . Design Te st s: Design tests shall have been performed on a type or style

of switchboard similar to that being furnished for this pro jec t. Tests

shall be in accordance with NEMA PB 2 and UL 89 1.

B . Production T es ts: Dielectric , mechanical o perati on, grounding of

instrument transformer c as es , electrical operation and control wiri ng,

and ground fault sensing equipment tests shall be performed on t he

switchboards provided for this pr oject . Tests shall be in accordance

with NEMA PB 2 and UL 89 1.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

Submit in accordance with Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS:

A. Shop Drawings:


determine compliance with drawings and specifications.2 . Include electrical r atin gs, dimens ions, mounting det ails , mater ials,

required cleara nces, terminations , wei ght , temperature r is e, wiring

and connection diagrams, pla n, front, side , and rear elevations,

sectional vie ws , bus wo rk, circuit breaker frame si ze s, trip and

short-circuit r atin g, long-time , short- time, instantaneous and ground

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 1





fault set ting s, coordinated breaker and fuse cur ves , accessor ies, and

device nameplate data .

3 . Show the s iz e, ampere-rating, number of bars per phase and neutral in

each bus run (horizontal and vertical), bus s pacin g, equipment ground

bus, and bus material.

B . Manuals:

1 . Submi t, simultaneously with the shop draw ings , companion copies of


shee ts, wiring dia gram s, and information for ordering replacement

parts.

a . Wiring diagrams shall have their terminals identified t o

facilitate instal lation, maintena nce, and operation .

b . Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of

equipment and the interconnection between the items of equipment.

c. Provide a clear and concise description of operat ion, which giv es ,

in de ta il , the information required to properly operate t he

equipment.

d. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of ma nuals


2 . Two weeks prior to final ins pection, deliver four copies of the final

updated maintenance and operating manuals to the Resident Engineer.

a . The manuals shall be updated to include any information

necessitated by shop drawing approval.

b . Complete "As Installed" wiring and schematic diagrams shall be

included which show all items of equipment and their

interconnecting wiring.

c. Show all terminal identification.

d. Include information for te sting , repa ir, trouble shoot ing,

assembl y, disassembly, and recommended maintenance inte rvals.

e . Provide a replacement parts list with current pri ces . Include a


testing and maintenance purp oses.

f. Furnish manuals in loose-leaf binder or manufacturer's standard

binder.

C. Certifications:



a . Certification by the Contractor that the assemblies have bee n

properly insta lled , adjusted and tes ted , including circuit

breakers settings.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 2





b . Certified copies of all of the factory design and production

tests, field test data sheets and reports for the assem blies.




refer enced . Publications are referenced in the text by basic


A . Institute of Engineering and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C37.13 Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures

C57.13 Instrument Transformers

C62.41 Surge Voltage in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits

C62.45 Surge Testing for Equipment connected to Low -

Voltage AC Power Circuits

B . National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):

PB-2 Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards.

PB-2.1 Instructions for Proper Handli ng, Installation,

Oper ati on, and Maintenance of Switchboards

AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Brea kers , Molded Case

Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures




67 Panelboards

489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit

Breakers Enclosures

891 Dead-Front Switchboards

1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters

1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A . Switchboards shall be in accordance with U L , NEM A, NE C, IE EE , and as

shown on the drawi ngs.

B . Switchboards shall be provided comp lete, ready for operation incl uding,

but not limited to hous ing, bu se s, circuit brea kers , instruments and

related t ransformers, fu se s, and wi ring.

C . Switchboard dimensions shall not exceed the space provided a s shown on

the drawings.

D. Manufacturer’s nameplate shall include complete ratin gs of switchboard

in addition to the date of manufacture.

E . Switchboard shall be listed as suitable for service entrance.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 3





2.2 BASIC ARRANGEMENT:

A . Type I : Switchboard shall be front accessible with the following

features:

1 . Device mounting:

a. Main br eaker : Individually mounted and compartmented.

b . Feeder breaker s: Group moun ted.

2 . Section alignment: As shown on the drawi ngs.

3. Accessibility:

a. Main section line and load termina ls: Front and si de .

b . Distribution section line and load term inals: Fro nt.

c. Through bus connection s: Front and e nd.

4 . Bolted line and load connecti ons.

5 . Full height wiring gutter covers for access to wiring terminal s.

6. Short Circuit Current Rating: As shown on the dr awing s.

4 . Short Circuit Current Rating: 65,000 amperes rms symmetrical , asshown on the drawi ngs.

2.3 HOUSING:

A . Provide a completely enc losed, free stan ding, steel enclosure not less

than the gage required by the AN SI and UL s tandar ds. The enclosure is to

consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to

form one metal enclosed rigid switchboard. The sid es , top and rear shall

be covered with removable screw on sheet steel plat es.

B . Provide ventilating louvers where required to limit the temperature rise

of current carrying pa rts . All openings shall be protected against

entrance of falling d ir t, wat er, or foreign matt er.

C . Group the meters and their control switches on a hinged front co ver .

Provide concealed hinges and l atc h.

D. Enclosure shall be thoroughly cleane d, phosphate t reated , and primed

with rust-inhibiting pa in t. Final finish coat to be the manu facturers

standard g ray . Provide a quart of finish paint for touch-up purp oses.

2.4 BUSES :

A . Gene ral: Buses shall be arranged for 3 pha se, 4 wire distribution. Main

phase buses (through b u s ) , full size neutral bu s , and ground bus shall

be full capacity the entire length of the switch board . Provide for

future extensions by means of bolt holes or other approved met hod . Brace

the bus to withstand the available short circuit current at th e

particular location and as shown on the dra wing s. No magnetic material

shall be used between buses to form a magnetic loop.

B . Material and Si ze : Buses and connections shall be hard drawn copper of

98 percent conducti vity. Bus temperature rise shall not exceed 65

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 4





degrees C (149 degrees F ) . Section busing shall be sized based on UL and

NEMA Switchboard S tandar ds.

C . Bus Connecti ons: All contact surfaces shall be c oppe r. Provide a minimum

of two plated bolts per s plic e. Where physical bus size permits only one

bolt, provide a means other than friction to prevent tur nin g, twisting

or ben ding. Torque bolts to the manufacturer's recommended va lue s.

D. Neutral B us : Provide bare or plated bus and mount on insulated bus

sup port s. Provide neutral disconnect link to permit isolation of neutral

bus from the common ground bus and service entrance conductors.

E . Ground B us : Provide an uninsulated 6 mm by 5 0 mm (1/4 inch by 2 i nch )

copper equipment ground bus bar sized per UL 891 the length of the

switchboard and secure at each section.

F. Main Bonding Jum per : Connect an uninsulated 6 mm by 50 mm (1/4 inch by 2

in ch ) copper bus between the neutral and ground buses to establish th e

system common ground poin t.

2.5 INTERNALLY INTEGRATED SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES:

A . Integral Surge Suppressor:

1 . SPD (Surge Protective De vic es) shall be Component Recognized and

listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition to include Section

37.3 highest fault category testing on devices intended for service

entrance use . SPD shall also be UL 1283 listed .

2 . SPD shall be UL 67 lis ted , installed by and shipped from the

electrical distribution equipment manufacturer’s factory.

3 . SPD shall provide surge current diversion paths for all modes of

protection; L-N, L-G, N-G , in WYE s yst ems , and L- L, L-G in DELTA

systems.

4 . SPD shall be modular in des ign . Each mode shall be fused with a

200kAIC UL recognized surge rated fuse and incorporate a t hermal

cutout devic e.

5 . SPD shall be integrally mounted to the bus bars of the switchboard.

6. Audible diagnostic monitoring shall be by way of audible al arm . This

alarm shall activate upon a fault cond iti on. An alarm on/off switch

shall be provided to silence the ala rm. An alarm push to test switch

shall be provided as well.

7 . SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

a . Maximum surge current capability (single pulse rate d) per phase

shall be :

1 ) Service Entrance Switchboard 25 0 k A.

2 ) Distribution Panelboards 160 kA

3 ) Branch Panelboards 160 kA

4 ) Service Entrance MCC 240 kA specified .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 5





5 ) Distribution Class MCC 160 kA

b . UL 1449 Second Edition Listed and Recognized Component Suppression

Voltage Ratings (SV R’s ) for Service Entrance and Distribution

Location equipment shall not exceed the following:

c. Voltage Let-Thru Values for Solidly Grounded Syst ems:

VOLTAGE

208Y/120

480Y/277

L-N

400V

800V

L-G

4 00V

800V

N-G

400V

800V

8 . SPD shall have a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of –50Db at 10 0 kHz with

an insertion ration of 50:1 using MIL-STD-220A met hodol ogy.

9. SPD shall have the following diagnostic featu res: transient c ount er,

status lights on each pha se, and one set of 1 NO and 1 NC auxiliary

dry contacts for alarmi ng.

1 0 . SPD shall have a warranty for a period of five ye ar s, incorporating

unlimited replacements of suppressor part s if transients destroy them

during the warranty per iod . Warranty shall be the responsibility of

the electrical distribution equipment manufacturer and shall be

supported by their respective field service division.

2.6 NAMEPLATES AND MIMIC BUS:

A . Nam epl ates : Provide laminated black phenolic resin with white core with

6 mm (1/4 inc h) high engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit

breaker (swit ch) to indicate the f eede r, panelboards and equipment

serve d. Mou nt, with plated s cre ws, on front of the b reake r.

B . Mimic B us : Provide an approved mimic bus on the front of the

switchboard. Color to be blue (480Y/277 volt ) or black (208Y/120 volt ) ,

either factory painte d, plast ic, or metal s tri ps. Plastic tape shall not

be us ed. Use symbols similar to a one line diag ram. (Refer to drawings).

Plastic or metal strips shall be mounted with plated sc rew s.

2.7 METERS AND INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

A . The Switchboard shall be metered using a Digital Power Meter with 0.25%

accuracy with the following features: A , V, kW , kVAR, kVA, PF , F, kW h,

kVA Rh, kV Ah , KYZ and RS-485 communication.2.8 PROVISION FOR FUTURE:

A . Where "provision f or ", "fut ure", or "sp ace" is noted on draw ings , the

space shall be equipped with bus connections to the future overcurrent

device with suitable insulation and bracing to maintain proper short

circuit rating and physical cle ara nce. Provide buses for the ampe re

rating as shown for the future devic e.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 6





2.9 BREAKER REMOVAL EQUIPMENT:

A . Where draw out circuit breakers are pro vide d, furnish a portable

elevating carriage or switchboard mounted device for installation and

removal of the breakers .

2.10 CONTROL WIRING:

A . Control wiring shall be 600 volt class B stranded S IS . Install all

control wiring complete at the factory adequately bundled and protected.

Wiring across hinges and between shipping units shall be Class C

stranded. Size in accordance with N EC . Provide control circuit fus es.

2.11 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

A . Type I Switch board : Provide UL listed and labeled molded case circuit

breakers in accordance with NEC and as shown on the dra wings . Circuit

breakers shall be the solid state adjustable trip t yp e.

1 . Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as

follows:a. Ampere setting (continuous).

b . Long time band.

c. Short time trip point .

d. Short time dela y.

e . Instantaneous trip point .

f. Ground fault trip point .

g. Ground fault trip dela y.

2 . Trip settings shall be as indicated on the d rawin gs. Final settings

shall be as shown on the electrical system protective device study.

3 . Breake rs, which have same ra ting , shall be interchangeable with each

other.

2.12 FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

A . Adjustable Trip Molded Case Circuit Brea kers:

1 . Provide molded c as e, solid state adjustable trip type circuit

breakers.

2 . Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics as

follows:

a. Ampere setting (continuous).

b . Long time band.

c. Short time trip poin t.

d. Short time dela y.

e . Instantaneous trip point .

f. Ground fault trip point .

g. Ground fault trip dela y.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 7





3 . Trip settings shall be as indicated on the drawi ngs. Final settings

shall be shown on the electrical system protective device study.

4 . Brea kers , which have same ra ting , shall be interchangeable with each

other.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A . Install switchboards in accordance with the NEC as shown on the drawings

and as recommended by the manufacturer.

B . Anchor switchboards to the floor with plated with 12.5 mm ( 1/2 i nch )

minimum anchor bolts as recommended by the manu factu rer. Anchor the

switchboards on two 10 0 mm (4 i nch ) minimum channel iron sills with

plated 12.5 mm (1/2 inc h) bo lts . Furnish sills to suit the s witchboard s.

Coordinate installation of sills with concrete pour of fl oo r. Sills

shall be level and grouted flush with fl oor .

3.2 INSTRUCTIONS

A . Furnish the services of a competent instructor for one 4 hour period for

instructing personnel in the operation and maintenance of the

switchboard on the date requested by the Resident Engineer.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 24 11 - 8




SECTION 26 24 16 – PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


panelboards.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Section 09 9 1 0 0 , PAINTING: Identification and painting of panelbo ards.

B . Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General


Section of Division 26 .

C . Section 26 05 7 1 , ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE ST UDY:

Requirements for the over current protective device s to be installed to

ensure proper equipment and personnel protection .

D. Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL S YSTE MS: Conduits

and outlet boxes .E . Section 26 05 21 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABL ES


F. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS TEMS :



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A . Submit in accordance with Section 2 6 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS.

B. Shop Drawings:1 . Sufficient informatio n, clearly presented, shall be included to



wiring diagrams accessories and weights of equipm ent. Complete

nameplate data including manufacturer’s name and catalog number.

C . Certification: Two weeks prior t o final in spection, submit four copies


1 . Certification that the material is in accordance with the drawings

and specifications has been properly instal led, and that the loadsare balanced.


Publications listed below (including am endmen ts, adde nda, revisi ons,

supplements and err ata ) form a part of this specification to the extent

refer enced. Publications are referenced in the text by the ba sic

designation onl y. Refer to latest edition of publication.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 24 16 - 1





A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

PB-1 Panelboards

AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Brea kers , Molded Case




70E Standard for Electrical Life Safety in the

Workplace



67 Panel boards

489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit

Breaker Enclosures

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS

A . Panelboards shall be in accordance with U L , NEM A, NE C, and as shown on

the drawings.

B . Panelboards shall be standard manufactured produ cts. All components of

the panelboards shall be the product and assembly of the sam e

manufacturer. All similar units of all panelboards to be of the same

manufacturer.

C . All panelboards shall be hinged “door in door” type wi th:

1 . Interior hinged door with hand operated latch or latches as required

to provide access to circuit breaker operating handles o nl y, not to

energized ports.

2 . Outer hinged door shall be securely mounted to the panelboard box

with factory bo lt s, scr ews , clips or other fasteners requiring a

tool for ent ry, hand operated latches are not accept able.

3 . Push inner and outer doors shall open left to rig ht.

D. All panelboards shall be completely factory assembled with molded case

circuit brea kers . Include one-piece remova ble, inner dead front cover

independent of the panelboard cover.E . Panelboards shall have main breaker or main lugs, bus s ize, voltage,

ph as e, top or bottom fee d, and flush or surface mounting as scheduled

on the drawings.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 24 16 - 2





F. Panelboards shall conform to NEMA PB -1 , NEMA AB-1 and UL 67 and have


1 . Nonreduced size copper or aluminum bus bars, complete with current

ratings as shown on the panel schedules connection straps bolted

together and rigidly supported on molded insulators.

2 . Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the

“distributed phase” or “phase sequence” typ e. Single-p hase, three-

wire panelboard busing shall be such that when any two adjacen t

single-pole breakers are connected to opposite pha ses , two-pole

breakers can be installed in any location. Three-p hase, four-wire

busing shall be such that when any three adjacent s ingle-pole

breakers are individually connected to each of the three different

phas es, two-or three-pole breakers can be installed a t any l ocatio n.

Current-carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be pla ted . Mains

ratings shall be as show n.

3 . Mechanical lugs furnished with panelboards shall be ca st , stamped or

machined metal alloys of sizes suitable for the conductors indicated

to be connected th eret o.

4 . Neutral bus shall be 100 % rate d, mounted on insulated su pport s.

5 . Grounding bus bar equipped with screws or lugs for the connection of

grounding wires.

6. Buses braced for the available short circuit curr ent, but not less

than 22,000 amperes symmetrical for 120/208 volt and 120/240 volt

panelboard s, and 14,000 amperes symmetrical for 277/480-volt

panelboards.

7 . Branch circuit panels shall have buses fabricated for bolt-on type

circuit breakers.

8. Protective devices shall be designed so that they can be easily

replaced.

9. Where designated on panel schedule "s pace s", include all necessary

bussi ng, device support and connections . Provide blank cover for

each spac e.

1 0 . In two section pane lboards, the main bus in each section shall be

full siz e. The first section shall be furnished with subfeed lugs

on the line side of main lugs on ly, or through-feed lugs for main

breaker type pa nel s, and with cable connections to the second

sec tio n. Panelboard sections with tapped bus or crossover bus are

not acceptable.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 24 16 - 3





1 1 . Series rated panelboards are not permitted.

2.2 CABINETS AND TRIMS

A. Cabinets:

1 . Provide galvanized steel cabinets to house pan elboards. Cabinets for

outdoor panels shall be factory primed and suitably treated with a

corrosion-resisting paint finish meeting UL 50 and UL 6 7 .

2 . Cabinet enclosure shall not have ventilating op ening s.

3 . Cabinets for panelboards may be of one-piece formed ste el or of

formed sheet steel with end and side panels we lded , rivete d, or

bolted as requ ired.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR PANELBOARDS

A . Breakers shall be UL 489 listed and label ed, in accordance with the

NEC, as shown on the drawi ngs, and as s pecified.

B . Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be bolt on type on phase bus bar

or branch circuit bar .

1 . Molded case circuit breakers for lighting and appliance branc h

circuit panelboards shall have minimum interrupting rating as

indicated but not less than :

a. 120/208 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmetric al.

b . 120/240 Volt Panelboard: 22,000 amperes symmet rical.

c. 277/480 Volt Panelboard: 14,000 amperes symmetric al.

2 . Molded case circuit breakers shall have automatic , trip fr ee ,

non-adjustable, inverse t im e, and instantaneous magnetic trips for

100-ampere frame or less. Magnetic trip shall be adjustable from 3X

to 10X for breakers with 600 ampere frames and hi gher . C.

Breaker features shall be as foll ows:

1 . A rugge d, integral housing of molded insulating m ateri al.

2 . Silver alloy contact s.

3 . Arc quenchers and phase barriers for each po le .

4 . Quick-m ake, quick-break, operating mecha nisms.

5 . A trip element for each po le , thermal magnetic type with long time

delay and instantaneous charact erist ics, a common trip bar for allpoles and a single operator .

6. Electrically and mechanically trip free.

7 . An operating handle which indicates O N, TRIPPED, and OFF posi tions .

a. Line connections shall be bolte d.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 24 16 - 4





b . Interrupting rating shall not be less than the maximum shor t

circuit current available at the line terminals//as indicated o n

the drawings, .

8 . An overload on one pole of a multipole breaker shall automatically

cause all the poles of the breaker to ope n.

9. Shunt trips shall be provided where indicated

2.4 SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A . Where separately enclosed molded case circuit breaker s are shown on the

dra win gs, provide circuit breakers in accordance with the applicable

requirements of those specified for panelboa rds.

B . Enclosures are to be of the NEMA types shown on the dr awing s. Where the

types are not sh own , they are to be the NEMA type most suitable for the

environmental conditions where the breakers are being installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Installation shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer’s

instruct ions, the NE C, as shown on the dr awin gs, and as specified.

B . Locate panelboards so that the present and future conduits can b e

conveniently conn ected . Coordinate the sizes of cabinets with

designated closet space .

C . In accordance with Section 0 9 91 0 0 , PAINTIN G, paint the panelboard

system vo lta ge, and feeder sizes as shown on the riser diagram in 1

inch block lettering on the inside cover of the cabinet do or . Paint the

words "LIFE SAFETY BR ANCH" , "CRITICAL BR ANCH" , or "EQUIPMENT SYSTEM" a s

applicable and the panel designation in one inch block letters on t he

outside of the cabinet do ors .

D. Install a typewritten schedule of circuits in each panelboard afte r

being submitted to and approved by the Resident Enginee r. Sched ules,

after appr oval , shall be typed on the panel directory cards and

installed in the appropriate panel boar ds, incorporating all applicab le

contract changes pertaining to that sched ule . Include the room numbers

and items served on the ca rds .

E . Mount the panelboard fully aligned and such that the maximum height of

the top circuit breaker above finished floor shall not exceed 198 0 mm

(78 inches). For panelboards that are too hi gh, mount panelboard s o

that the bottom of the cabinets will not be less than 150 mm (6 inch es)

above the finished f loor .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 24 16 - 5





F. For panelboards located in areas accessible to the pub lic , paint the

exposed surfaces of the tr ims , do or s, and boxes with finishes to match

surrounding surfaces after the panelboards have been installed.

G. Directory-card information shall be typewritten to indicate outlets,

lig hts , de vi ces , and equipment controlled and final room numbers served

by each circuit and shall be mounted in holders behind pr otective

covering.

H. Where new panels are to be installed in existing backb oxes, backboxes

shall have rust and scale removed from in sid e. Paint inside of

backboxes with rust preventive paint before the new panel interior is

installed. Provide new trim and doors for these pan els . Covers shall

fit tight to the box with no gaps between the cover and the b ox .

I . Provide ARC flash identification per NFPA 7 0E .

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010

26 24 16 - 6




SECTION 26 25 11 – BUSWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


the busways to form a complete coordinated s yste m.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Section 07 84 0 0 , FIRESTOPPING: Sealing around penetrations to maintain

the integrity of time rated construction.

B . Section 07 9 2 0 0 , JOINT SEALA NTS: Sealing around busway penetrations

through the building envelope to prevent moisture migration into the

building.

C . Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General


Division 2 6 .

D. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS:



1.3 SUBMITTALS



B . Shop Drawings:



2 . Include electrical rat ings , dimens ions, mounting details and

position, mounting method, vertical supports, materials, fire st ops ,

weather st op s, and layout of the busway runs.

3 . Show the detailed coordinated connection s to equipment terminations

such as switchgea r, switchboar ds, transformers and pane lboards.

C. Manuals:

1 . Provide complete maintenance and operating manual s including

technical data sh ee ts , and information for ordering replacement

parts.

2 . Two weeks prior to the final inspectio n, submit four copies of t he

manuals to the Resident Engineer .

D. Certific ations: Two weeks prior to final inspec tion, submit four copiesof the following to the Resident Engineer :

1 . Certification that the equipment has been properly installed,

adjusted , and test ed.



supplement and er rat a) form a part of this specification to the extent

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 25 11 - 1







B . Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ( U L ) :

857 Busways

C . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):



BU 1 Busways

BU 1.1 General Instructions for Handli ng, Installation,

Operation and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600

Volts or Less

BU 1.2 Application Information for Busway Rated 600

Volts or Less

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A . Busway shall be in accordance wit h UL 857 and NEMA BU 1 , BU 1.1 and BU

1.2.

B . Busway shall be rated as shown on the drawings for the positions in

which they are being installed, and have the following fea tures :

1 . For indoor locat ions, they shall be totally en closed, low impedance

type and moisture resista nt.

2 . For outdoor loca tions , they shall be totally encl osed, low imp edance ,

weatherproof, outdoor feeder type o nly .

3 . Ratings shall not b e less than required by the NEC and NEMA B U 1 and

not less than shown on the drawi ngs. Short circuit current ratings

shall not be less than 42,000 amps, as required by NEMA BU 1 or as

required for the available fault cu rren t, whichever is high er.

4 . Busway shall be 3 -phase, 4-wire, full neutral except where 3-phase ,

3-wire is shown on the draw ings.

5 . Busway shall include an internal ground bus b ar , not less than 5 0

percent of the phase bu s.

6. All bus bars for each busway shall be within a single ho using.

Paralleled or multiple busways will not be accepted.

7 . Bus Bars:

a. Shall be copper.

b . Bus bar and interconnection joints shall be silver plated,

constant high-pressure type with high stren gth , copper silicon

alloy bol ts, nuts and washers.

c. Shall b e completely insulated with flame-retar dant, track-

resist ant, self-extinguishing insulation.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 25 11 - 2





d. Temperature rises shall not exceed NEMA St andard s.

8. Housings:

a. Shall be steel or aluminum with continuous mounting ra il s.

b . Bus bar assemblies and housing shall be products of the same

manufacturer.

c. Shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted at the factory with primer

and the manufacturer's standard finish.

d. Shall have rustproof metal hardw are.

e . At busway entrances to bu ilding s, install external flanges and

weatherproofing.

f. For busways that pass through floors or firew alls, incorporate

fire stops within the busway housings and external flanges to

close the openings in the walls or floors adjacent to the busw ays.

g. Install expansion fittings in the busway runs in compliance with

the manufacturer's standard recommendations.9. Busway shall not be reduced in size at any poi nt.

C . Storage : All busway shall be stored at the job site as recommended in

NEMA BU 1.1.

D. Dimensions and Configuratio ns:

1 . Configure within the spaces designated for their instal latio n.

2 . Coordinate the routing of equipment installations by other trades to

avoid conflicts.

3 . Make final field measurements and check them with the shop d rawings

for the busways prior to authorization of fabrication of the busways.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install busways as required by the N EC , U L , manufacturer's

recommendations and as fo llow s:

B . Support the busways as required by the NEC with not less than 9 mm (3/ 8

inch ) steel rods.

C . Install side bracing to prevent swaying or movement of the bu sway s. In

seismic zon es , bracing shall be installed as per details on drawi ngs.

D. When t he installations are c omple te, inspect the busway joints and

eliminate any strains and stresses on the bus bars and housi ngs.

E . Coordinate all of the busway terminations to equipment to insure proper

phasi ng, connection and lugs.

F. Tighten all of the bolt connections in the busways with a torque wrench

as recommended by the manufacturer of the bu swa ys. After the busw ays

have been energized for not less than 30 days, repeat the torque wrench

tightening of all bolt connec tions.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 25 11 - 3





3.2 FIELD TESTS

A . Perform tests per NEMA BU 1.1 and as follo ws:

1 . After installation but prior to energizing , busways shall be tested

for continui ty, phasing and insulation resis tance.

2 . Insulation resistance shall be measured phase-to-phase and phase-to-

ground with a 500 volt megger and values shall not be less than one

megohm.

B . The contractor shall furnish the instrume nts, materials and labor for

these test s.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 25 11 - 4




SECTION 26 27 13 – ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies the furn ishing, complete install ation, and

connection of the electric meters for special lo ads .

1.2 RELATED WORK

Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTAL LATIONS: General

electrical requirements and items that is common to more than one


1.3 SUBMITTALS


INSTALLATIONS.

B . Shop Drawings:



2 . Include electrical rat ings , dimens ions, wei ghts , mounting details and

clearances required for servicing.

C . Manual s: Two weeks prior to the final inspectio n, submit four copies of

the following to the Resident Eng ineer:

1 . Complete mai nten ance , operating and testing manuals including wiring

dia gra ms, technical data sheets and information for ordering

replacement parts:



1 . Certification by the manufacturer that the meter conforms to t he

requirements of t he drawings and specific ations, and the meter has

been properly calibrated.

2 . Certification by the contractor that the meter has been properly

installed, adjusted, and t ested.






B . American National Standards Institute (ANSI):C12.1 Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering

C12.10 American National Standard for Watt-hour Meters

C . Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C37-90.1 Standard Surge Withstand Capability (S WC ) Tests

for Protection Relays and Relay Systems


MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 13 - 1







414 Standard for Safety Meter Sock ets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMETERING EQUIPMENT FOR SPECIAL LOADS

A . The equipment shall meter all of the single phase and three phas e

electrical service used by the equipment shown on the drawings

B . Polyphase watthour and recording demand/submetering equip ment :

1 . Shall be equal to the metering equipment used by the Electric Power

Company for metering the electrical service to the installation where

the special loads are located.

2 . Shall be microprocessor-based:

a . Microprocessor meters shall monitor the energy used on the ac

systems 480/277 volt s, 3 p hase.

b . The unit shall be able to transmit information to a local n etwor k,Energy Control Center .

c. The unit shall be provided with three built-in doughnut t ype

current transformer s.

d. The unit shall display the followi ng:

1) Watts.

2 ) Demand-Present.

3 ) Demand-Peak.

4 ) Watt-Hours.

e . The unit shall be provided with an adjustable demand window of 5-,

1 0 - , 1 5- , 3 0 - , or 60-minute intervals.

f. Accuracy of the meter shall be ±1 perc ent. All readings shall be

adjustable from a remote location.

g. Operating temperature ran ge: -40 degrees F to 140 degrees F

3 . Integrating demand intervals shall coincide with the power company's

meter.

4 . Multipliers shall be suitable for the sizes of the connected loa ds .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Installation shall be in accordance with the N EC , and as shown on the

drawings.

B . Install circuits and make connections as required for the metering

equipment.

3.2. DEMONSTRATION

A . At the final inspection in the presence of the VA representative,

demonstrate that the electric meter operates properly in all respe cts.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 13 - 2





1 . Test and adjust all controls and s afeti es. Replace or repair all

malfunctioning cont rols , safe ties, and equipment as soon as possible

to avoid any delay in the use of the equi pment.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 13 - 3






MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 13 - 4




SECTION 26 27 26 – WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


wiring devices.

1.2 RELATED WORK



Division 2 6 .

B . Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND B OXES FOR ELECTRICAL S YSTE MS: Conduits and

outlets boxe s.

C . Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CAB LES


D. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND B ONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTE MS:


ground for possible ground fault curren ts.1.3 SUBMITTALS



B . Shop Drawings:



2 . Include electrical ra tin gs, dimens ions, mounting de tail s,

construction mat erials , grade and termination i nformation.

C . Manual s: Two weeks prior to final ins pection, deliver four copies of the

following to the Resident Eng ine er: Technical data sheets and

information for ordering replacement units.


of the following to the Resident Engi nee r: Certification by th e

Contractor that the devices comply with the drawings and specifications,

and have been properly instal led, aligne d, and t ested.




refer enced . Publications are referenced in the text by basic designationonl y. Refer to latest edition of publication.




WD 1 General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices

WD 6 Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 26 - 1





D. Underwriter’s Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings

20 General-Use Snap Switches

231 Power Outlets


498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

943 Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECEPTACLES

A . Genera l: All receptacles shall be listed by Underwriters Laborato ries,

Inc., as hospital grade (green dot identif icatio n) and conform to NEMA

WD 1 . (EXCEPTION - Receptacle types which have no listing as ho spital

grade but are listed by UL in their respective categories or receptacles

indicated on the drawings as “not hospital grade”).

1 . Mounting straps shall be plated st ee l, with break-off plaster earsand shall include a self-grounding fe atu re. Terminal screws shall be

brass, brass plated or a copper alloy me tal .

2 . Receptacles shall have provisions for back wiring with separate metal

clamp type terminals (four mi n. ) and side wiring from four captively

held binding screws .

B . Duplex receptacles shall be single p hase , 20 a mpere , 120 v olt s, 2-pole,

3-w ire, and conform to the NEMA 5-20R configuration in NEMA WD 6. The

duplex type shall have break-off feature for two-circuit operat ion. The

ungrounded pole of each receptacle shall be provided with a separate

terminal.

1 . Bodies shall be ivory in col or.

2 . Switched duplex receptacles shall be wired so that only the top

receptacle is sw itched. The remaining receptacle shall be unswitched.

3 . Duplex Receptacles on Emergency Cir cuit :

a. Bodies shall be red in c olo r. Wall plates shall be red with the

word "EMERGENCY" engraved in 6 mm , (1/4 in ch) white lett ers.

b . In rooms without emergency powered general lig hti ng, the emergency

receptacles shall be of the self-illuminated type.

4 . Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Recep tacl es: Shall be an integral

unit suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box.

a . Ground fault interrupter shall be hospital grade and consist of a

differential current trans form er, solid state sensing circuitry

and a circuit interrupter swi tch . It shall be rated for operation

on a 60 H z , 120 vo lt , 20-ampere branch ci rcuit . Device shall have

nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of five milliamperes

and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any valu e

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 26 - 2





of ground leakage current above five milliamperes (+ or – 1

milliam p) on the load side of the de vice . Device shall have a

minimum nominal tripping time of 1/30th of a se cond. Devices shall

meet UL 943 .

5 . Safety Type Duplex Receptacles:

a. Bodies shall be gray in colo r.

b . Shall be hospital gra de, as above with the following additional

requirements.

1 ) Shall permit current to flow only while a standard plug is in

the proper position in the receptacle .

2 ) Screws exposed while the wall plates are in place shall be the

tamperproof type.

c. Shall be installed in the following locati ons:

1 ) Psychiatric rooms and w ar ds , O. T. area s, PMR areas and other

locations where psychiatric patients are not under constant

supervision.

2 ) Housekeeping quart ers, build ings, waiting areas and lobbies

where children might be presen t.

6. Isolated Ground Type Duplex Receptacles:

a. Bodies shall be orange in colo r.

b . Shall be hospital grade and UL listed as “Isolated Ground”.

7 . Duplex Receptacles (not hospital grade): Shall be the same as

hospital grade duplex receptacles except for the "hospital grade"

listing and as follow s.

a . Bodi es shall be brown phenolic compound supported by a plated

steel mounting strap having plaster ears.

b . Shall be NEMA WD 1 heavy duty ty pe .

C. Receptacles; 2 0 , 30 and 50 amper e, 250 v olts : Shall be complete with

appropriate cord grip plu g. Devices shall meet UL 23 1.

D. Weatherproof Receptacles : Shall consist of a duplex recepta cle, mounted

in box with a gask eted, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap

over each receptacle ope nin g. The cap shall be permanently attached t o

the cover plate by a spring-hinged f la p. The weatherproof integrity

shall not be affected when heavy duty specification or hospital g rade

attachment plug caps are inse rted . Cover plates on outlet boxes mounted

flush in the wall shall be gasketed to the wall in a watertight man ner.

E . Lamp Receptacles for Outlet Box Mountin g:

1 . For use on standard 75 mm (3 in ch) and 100 mm (4 in ch) outlet boxe s.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 26 - 3





2 . Ke yl ess , porcelain body and skirt supporting a medium screw sh ell

socket, and integral 3-wire grounding receptacle shall have screw

terminals and a minimum rating of 600 wat ts .

3 . Porcelain neck shall have shade holder groov e.

2.2 TOGGLE SWITCHES AND DIMMERS

A . Toggle switches shall be totally enclosed tumbler type with bodie s of

phenolic comp ound . Toggle handles shall be grey in color unless

otherwise spe cifie d. The rocker type switch is not acceptable and wil l

not be approved.

1 . Switches installed in hazardous areas shall be explosion proof type

in accordance with the NEC and as shown on the drawings .

2 . Shall be single unit togg le, butt con tact , quiet AC t yp e, heavy-duty

general-purpose use with an integral self grounding mounting strap

with break-off plasters ear s and provisions for back wiring with

separate metal wiring clamps and side wiring with captively held

binding screws.

3 . Shall be color coded for current ratin g, listed by Underwriters

Laborator ies, In c. , and meet the requirements of NEMA WD 1 ,

Heavy-Duty and UL 2 0 .

4 . Ratings:

a. 120 volt circu its: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts A C .

b . 277 volt circui ts: 20 amperes at 120-277 volts A C .

5 . The switches shall be mounted on the striker plate side of do ors .

6. Incorporate barriers between switches with multigang outlet boxes

where required by the NEC .

7 . Switches connected to isolated type electrical power syste ms shall be

double pole .

8 . All toggle switches shall be of the same manufacturer.

B . Dimmer s: Incandescent modular dimming sys tems .

1 . Incandescent dimming system shall be 2000 watt modular t yp e, with

capability for "slaving " larger loads from the "mast er" . System shall

have capability of adding additional "sla ves ", controlled from the

original basic dimmer "mas ter". All units shall track with "m aster ".

Control units shall be // single-phase manual control / /, //

three-phase manual motorized control // as shown on the dra wing s.

Dimmers shall have low and intensity adjustment and built-in

transient voltage protection and fused on the load si de . All remote

mounted units shall be completely enclosed in integral metal housing.

"Maste r", "Slaves " and controls shall be of the same m anufacturer.

All dimmers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratorie s, In c.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 26 - 4





C . Dimme rs: Incandescent lamp lo ads . Refer to drawings for additional

information. Dimmers shall include an “off” positi on. Dimmers shall

maintain full load rating even when two or more units are installed

adjacent to one ano ther. All wall-mounted dimmers shall be of the same

manufacturer.

D. Di mmer s: Fluorescent lamp l oad s. Refer to drawings for additional

information. Dimmers shall include an “off” positio n. Dimmers shall have

low end intensity adjustment and maintain full load rating even when t wo

or more units are installed adjacent to one ano the r. All wall-mounted

dimmers shall be of the same manufacturer. Dimming ballast shall be

provided for each F32 rapid start lamp or pair of l am ps. Dimmers shall

have adequate capacity for the load served and the environment in which

installed.

2.3 WALL PLATES

A . Wall plates for switches and receptacles shall be type 302 stainless

steel . Oversize plates are not acceptable.

B . Color shall be ivory unless otherwise specified.

C . Standard NEMA d esi gn, so that products of different manufacturers will

be interchangeable. Dimensions for openings in wall plates shall be

accordance with NEMA WD 1 .

D. For receptacles or switches mounted adjacent to each oth er, wall plates

shall be common for each group of receptacles or swit ches.

E . In psychiatric ar ea s, wall plates shall have tamperproof screws and

beveled edges.

F. Wall plates for d at a, telephone or other communication outlets shall be

as specified in the associated specification.

2.4 SURFACE MULTIPLE-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A . Assemblies shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 5 .

B . Shall have the following features :

1 . Enclosures:

a. Thickness of aluminum shall be not less than 1 mm (0.040 i nch )

steel for base and c ove r. Nominal dimension shall be 40 by 70 mm

(1-1/2 by 2-3/4 inch es) with inside cross sectional area not less

than 2250 square mm (3.5 square inches). The enclosures shall be

thoroughly cle ane d, phosphatized and painted at the factory with

primer and the manufacturer's standard baked enamel or lacquer

finish.

2 . Receptacles shall be d uple x, hospital gra de. See paragraph

'RECEPTACL ES' in this sectio n. Device cover plates shall be the

manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant finish and shall not

exceed the dimensions of the encl osure.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 26 - 5





3 . Unless otherwise shown on d rawi ngs, spacing of the receptacles along

the strip shall be (12 inche s) on cente rs.

4 . Wires within the assemblies shall be not less than No . 12 AWG cop per ,

with 600 volt rating s.

5 . Installation fittings shall be designed for the strips being

installed including be nds , off sets , device br acke ts, inside

couplings, wire c lip s, and elb ows.

6. Bond the stri ps to the conduit systems for their branch supply

circuits.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC and as shown as on the

drawings.

B . Ground terminal of each receptacle shall be bonded to the outlet box

with an approved green bonding ju mp er, and also connected to the greenequipment grounding conductor.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 27 26 - 6




SECTION 26 29 21 – DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


low voltage disconnect switches . Refer to Divisions 21 – 23 for unit

mounted devices.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . General electrical requirements and item s that is common to more than


ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION S.

B . Conduits for cables and wir ing: Section 26 05 3 3 , RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

C . Cables and wiri ng: Section 2 6 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (600 VOLTS AND BE LOW .

D. Motor rated toggle switch es: Section 26 29 1 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR

STARTERS.E . Requirements for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path

for possible ground fau lts : Section 2 6 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .

1.3 SUBMITTALS


INSTALLATIONS.

B . Shop Drawings:

1 . Include sufficient infor mati on, clearly presented to determine

compliance with drawings and specifications .


enclosure ty pes , fuse type and clas s.

3 . Show the specific switch and fuse proposed for each specific piece of

equipment or circuit .

C. Manuals:

1 . Provide complete maintenance and operating manuals for disconnect

switche s, including technical data s hee ts, wiring diag rams , and

information for ordering replacement pa rt s. Deliver four copies to

the Resident Engineer two weeks prior to final inspection.

2 . Identify terminals on wiring diagrams to facilitate maintenance and

operation.

3 . Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring and any inte rlocki ng.

D. Certification: Two weeks prior to final inspecti on, deliver to the

Resident Engineer four copies of the certification that the equipment

has been properly i nstalled, adjusted, and tested .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 29 21 - 1










B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

KS l Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution

Equipment Switches (600 Volts Ma ximum)




98 Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches

198C High-Interrupting-Capacity Fu se s, Current

Limiting Types

198E Class R Fuses977 Fused Power-Circuit Devices

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS

A . Shall be quick-m ake, quick-break type in accordance with UL 9 8 , NEMA K S

1 and NEC.

B . Shall have a minimum duty rati ng, NEMA classification General Duty (G D)

for 240 volts and NEMA classification Heavy Duty ( HD ) for 277/480 volt s.

C . Shall be horsepower ra ted.

D. Shall have the following feat ures :

1 . Switch mechanism shall be the quic k-make , quick-break ty pe .

2 . Copper bla des , visible in the OFF posit ion.

3 . An arc chute for each pol e.

4 . External operating handle shall indicate ON and OFF position and

shall have lock-open padlocking p rovision s.

5 . Mechanical interlock shall permit opening of the door only when t he

switch is in the OFF posit ion, defeatable by a special tool to permit

inspection.

6. Fuse holders for the sizes and types of fuses sp ecified.

8 . Solid neutral for each switch being installed in a circuit which

includes a neutral conducto r.

9. Ground Lugs: One for each ground conductor .

1 0 . Enclosures:

a. Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the switc hes.

b . Where the types of switch enclosures are not sh own , they shall be

the NEMA types which are most suitable for the env ironmental

conditions where the switches are being installe d. Unless

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 29 21 - 2





otherwise indicated on the p la ns , all outdoor switches shall be

NEMA 3R.

c. Shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard gray baked enamel

paint over pretreated steel (for the type of enclosure required).

2.2 LOW VOLTAGE UNFUSED SWITCHES RATED 600 AMPERES AND LESS

A . Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and

Less, but no fuse s.

2.3 LOW VOLTAGE FUSIBLE SWITCHES RATED OVER 600 AMPERES TO 1200 AMPERES

A . Shall be the same as Low Voltage Fusible Switches Rated 600 Amperes and

Less, except for the minimum duty rating which shall be NEMA

classification Heavy Duty ( H D ) . These switches shall also be horsepower

rated.

2.4 MOTOR RATED TOGGLE SWITCHES

A . Refer to Section 26 29 1 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE MOTOR STARTERS for motor rated

toggle switches .2.5 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A . Install nameplate identification sign s on each disconnect switch to

identify the equipment controlled.

B . Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core,

with engraved l ettering, a minimum of 6 mm (1/4 -inch) high. Secure

nameplates with screws .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install disconnect switches in accordance with the NEC and as shown on

the drawings.

B . Fusible disconnect switches shall be furnished complete with fuse s.

3.2 SPARE PARTS

A . Two weeks prior to the final inspec tion, furnish one complete set of

spare fuses for each fusible disconnect switch installed on the project.

Deliver the spare fuses to the Resident Enginee r.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 29 21 - 3






MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010




SECTION 26 32 13 – ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This section specifies the furnishing , complete installation , connection

and testing of the engine generator s ystem. This incl udes: air

filtrati on, starting system , generator c ontr ols, instrumentation,

lubricatio n, fuel syste m, cooling system and exhaust sy stem.

B . The engine generator system shall be fully automatic and s hall

constitute a unified and coordinated system ready for operation.

C . The engine generator system shall i nclu de, but not be limited to the

following:

1 . Diesel Engine.

2 . Lubrication Oil System .

3 . Fuel Oil System.

4 . Cooling System.

6. Intake and Exhaust Air System s.7 . Starting System.

8 . Generator.

9. Co ntro ls, Supervision and Dist ribution.

10.Outdoor Generator Enclosure with sub-base fuel tank.

1 1 . Spare Parts .

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COM PONE NTS: Seismic

requirements for non-structural equipment .

B . Section 23 05 4 1 , NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQU IPME NT: Requirements for pipe and equipment support and noise

control.

C . Section 23 07 1 1 , HV AC , PLUMBIN G, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION:

Requirements for hot piping and equipment insulation.

D. Section 2 2 1 1 0 0 , FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION: Cooling water-piping

requirements.

F. Section 2 6 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General



G. Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

(600 VOLTS AND BELOW: Cables and Wirin g.

H . Section 2 6 36 2 3 , AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITC HES: Requirements for

automatic transfer swi tches .

I . Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYS TEMS :



MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 1





J. Section 2 6 2 4 1 1 , DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS : Requirements for secondary

distribution switchboard s.

K. Section 2 6 2 3 0 0 , LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR: Requirements for secondary

distribution switchgear .


A . The supplier of the diesel-engine generator se t shall be responsible for

satisfactory total operation of the system and its certif icati on. This

supplier shall have had experience with three or more installations o f

systems of comparable size and complexity in regards to coordinating,

engineering, testing and supervising. Each of these installations shall

have been in successful operation for three or more ye ar s. Prior to

review of su bmittal s, the Department of Veterans Affairs reserves the

right to:

1 . Have the manufacturer submit a list of locations of similar

installations.

2 . Inspect any of these installations and operations of engine-generator

set, and question the user concerning the installations without the

presence of the supplier.

B . Factory authorized representative sh all be capable of providing

emergency maintenance and repairs at the project site within 8 hours

maximum of not ification.

C . Engine generator and auxiliary components shal l be supplied from a

single manufacturer.

D. Noise level developed by the generator set shall be as herein specified.

E . Factory Te st : The Government shall have the option of witnessing th e

following tests at the fact ory . The Government will pay all expenses for

the Government representative's trip to witness these tes ts . Contractor

shall notify the Resident Engineer 15 days prior to date of testing.

Manufacturer shall furnish load b an ks , testing instruments and all othe r

equipment as necessary to perform these tests.

1 . Load T es t: Shall include six hours of continuous operation; four

hours while the set is delivering 100 percent of the specified KW and

two hours while delivering 110 percent of the specified K W. During

this test record the following data at 20-minute interv als:

Time

KW

Voltage

Amperes

Engine RPM

Water Temperature In

Water Temperature Out

Oil Temperature In

Oil Temperature Out

Fuel Pressure

Oil Pressure

Ambient Temperature

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 2





2 . Quick Start Te st : Record time required for the engine generator set

to develop specified vo lta ge, frequency and KW load from a sta ndstill

condition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


INSTALLATIONS.

B . Shop Drawings:

1 . Sufficient inform ation, clearly p resented, shall be included to


2 . Data shall be submitted in the following form:

a. Technical data sheets (TDS): These include published performa nce,

rating and derating cur ves , published rat ings , catalog cuts,

pictures, manufacturer's specif ications, material composition , and

gauge thi ckness.

b . Description of operation ( D O ) : Manufacturer's literatures an d, if

suitable, diagrams.

c. Calculations (CALC): Detailed engineering calculations with all

equatio ns, gra phs , assumptio ns, and approximations sho wn, and data

sources referenced.

d. Certification (CERT): Written confirmation as to the document's

accurac y, and genuineness.

e. Shop Drawings (S D ) : Scaled drawings showing plan vie ws , side

views, elevations and cross sections .

f. Diagrams (DGM): These include control system diag rams , elementary

diagra ms, control sequence diagrams or ta ble , wiring diagra ms,

interconnections diagrams (between local control c ubic les, remote

annunciator p ane ls, remote derangement pan els , remote monitoring

panels, remote exercising panel and underground fuel storage

tanks), wireless connection diag rams , illustrative d iagr ams, flow

diagra ms, and other like ite ms.

3 . Prior to f abrication, submit for approval the following data for each

engine-generator s e t , transfer device and control and supervisory

equipment:

a. Engine generator s et : TD S, SD/ / including subtransient reactance

and short-circuit current capacity.

b . Engine jacket water hea ters : TDS

c. Muffler assembly: TDS , SD

d. Motor-operated damper ass embl y: TDS

e. Integral sub-base fuel tan k: TDS , CALC

f. Batteries, racks and charge r: TD S, CALC

g. Torsional Vibr ation: CERT

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 3





h . Control and Supervisory Equipment : T DS , DG M, DO , SD

i. Performance:

1 ) Voltage regulating equipmen t: TDS

2 ) Frequency regulating equipment : TDS

3 ) Voltage and frequency dips and recovery times due to specified

motor load ing: CALC

4 ) Antifreeze derating: TDS

5 ) Ambient derating: TDS

m j . Vibration i solat ors: T DS , CALC

n k. Sound power level data for the packaged outdoor gene rato r.

C. Manuals:


complete maintenance and operating manuals of the engine generator

set and auxiliaries including technical data she ets , wiring di agra ms,

and informati on, such as telephone num ber , fax num ber, and web si te s,

for ordering replacement parts .

2 . Two weeks prior to the final inspection, submit four copies of t he

updated maintenance and operating manual to the Resident Engineer:

a. Include complete "As installed" diag rams , which indicate all items

of equipment and their interconnecting wiring.

b . Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each of th e

items of e quipme nt, including "As installed" revisions of the

diagrams.

c. The wiring diagrams shall identify the terminals to facilitate

installation, maintenance, operation and testin g.

d. Complete lists of spare parts and special tools recommended for

two years of normal operation of the complete sy stem.

D. Certifications:

1 . Prior to fabrication of the engine-generator se t, submit the

following for ap prov al, to the Resident Enginee r:

a . A certification in writing that a diesel engine of the same mode l

and configurati on, with the same b or e, str oke , number of

cyli nde rs, and equal or higher BMEP and RPM ratings as the

proposed diesel engine has been operating satis factor ily, with

connected loads of not less than 75 percent of the specified

KW/KVA rati ng, for not less than 2,000 hours without any failure

of a cranksha ft, camsh aft, pist on, va lve , injector or governor

system.

b . A certification in writing that devices and circuits will b e

incorporated to protect the voltage regulator and other components

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 4





of the auxiliary electrical power system during operation of t he

diesel engine-generator set at speed s other than the rated RPM

while performing maint enan ce. Include thorough descriptions with

submittal of any prec auti ons, which will be necessary to pro tect

the voltage regulator and other components of the system during

operation of the diesel engine-generator set at spee ds other than

the rated RPM .

2 . Prior to installation of the engine-generator set at the job site,

submit four copies of the following to the Resident Engineer :

a . Certified test da ta , alternator temperature rise test and strip

chart rec ord ing s, and photographs showing test setup and

equipment.

3 . Two weeks prior to the final inspec tion, submit four copies of t he

followin g, to the Resident Enginee r:

a . Certified test report by the manufacturer of the engine-generator

set that the auxiliary electrical power system conforms to th e

requirements of the drawings and specifica tions.

b . Certified report of field tests from the contractor that th e

engine-generator set and major auxiliaries have been properly

installed, adjusted and tested.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A . Equipment shall withstand the mechanical str esses caused by rough

handling during shipment in addition to the electrical and mecha nical

stresses, which occur during operation of the syst em. Protect radiator

core with wood she et.

B . Store the equipment in a location approved by the Resident Engi nee r.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A . Shall conform to the arrangements and details shown on the dr awing s. The

dime nsio ns, enclosures and arrangements of the engine-generator set

shall permit the operating personnel to safely and conveniently opera te

and maintain the system in the space designated for installation.

B . Unless specified oth erwi se, each component of the engine-generator

system shall be capable of operating as specified herein at ____ m eters

(1000fee t) above sea level in a outdoor enclosure which will have

average ambient air temperatures ranging from a minimum of ____degrees C

(20 degrees F ) in winter to maximum of ___ degrees C (110 degrees F ) in

summer.





MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 5





B . American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Refer to latest edition

of publication.

C37.5 0 Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers used In

Enclosures-Test Procedures

C . American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM):

A53/A53M Standard Specification for Pi pe , St eel , Blac k,

and Hot–Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Sea mles s.

B88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

B88M Specification for Seamless Copper water Tube

(Metric)

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C37.13 Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used In

Enclosures

C37.90.1 Surge Withstand Capability (SW C) Tests for

Relays and Relay Systems Associated with

Electric Power Apparatus

E . National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case


ICS 6 Industrial Control and Syst ems: Enclosures

ICS 4 Terminal Blo cks ,

MG 1 Motor and Generators

MG 2 Safety Standard and Guide for Sel ecti on, Installation

and use of Electric Motors and Generators

PB 2 Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards

SG 3 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers-Power

Switching Equipment

SG 5 Power Switchgear Assemblies

25 0 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum)

F. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA):

ATS Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and

Systems

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Co de .

37 Installations and Use of Stationary Combustion

Engine and Gas Turbines



110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power

Systems.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 6





H. Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :


14 2 Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and

Combustible liquids

208 5 Insulated Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and

Combustible Liquids

22 00 Stationery Engine Generator Assemblies

1236 Battery Charges for Charging Engine-Starter

Batteries

467 Grounding and Bonding Equipme nt.

489 Molded-Case Circuit Brea kers , Molded-Case

Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

508 Industrial Control Equipment


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A . The engine generator system shall be in accordance with NF PA, UL , NEMA

and ANSI, and as specified and as shown on the drawing s.

B . Provide a factory-assembled, wire d, (except for the field connections),

comple te, fully automatic diesel engine-generator system .

C . Published Rati ng:

1 . Shall be not less than 1000 KW Standby at 2 77Y/480 volts, 3-phase, 4-

wire, 60 Hz and 0.80 power fact or.

2 . Shall be capable of operating continuously for two consecutive

hours within any 24-hour period o f operation at 110 percent of its

specified rating without damage .

D. Ass embl e, connect and wire the equipment at the factory so that only the

external connections need to be made at the construction si te .

E . Unit shall be factory painted with manufacturer's primer and standard

finishes.

F. Coordinate the components of the system and their arr angements ,

electrically and mechanically.

G. Connections between components of the system shall conform to t he

recommendations of the manufacturer of the diesel engine-generator set.

H. Cou pling s, sha fts , and other moving parts shall be enclosed and guarded.

Guards shall be met al, ruggedly constructed, rigidly fastened and

readily removable for convenient servicing of the equipment without

disassembling any pipes and fitting s.

I . Generator set and cooling system shall be furnished with extended life

antifreeze solution to protect the system from freezing at all times.

J. Generator set shall have the following fe ature s:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 7





1 . Factory-mounted on a comm on, rigi d, welde d, structural steel ba se .

2 . The maximum engine-generator set vibration in the horizontal,

vertic al, and axial directions shall be limited to 0.15mm with an

overall velocity limit of 2 4 mm/sec RM S, for all speed s.

3 . The isolators shall be constrained with restraints capable o f

withstanding static forces in any direction equal to twice the we ight

of the supported equipm ent.

4 . Automatic st ar t, accelerate to the specified RPM and deliver the

specified KW/KVA output at 60 Hz within 10 seconds after a single

pole contact closes in a remote devic e.

5 . Recover rapidly from instantaneous changes between no load and t he

specified KW/KVA r ating , and the reverse changes of loa d, without

damage.

6. Shall be capable of operating satisfactorily as specified for n ot

less than 10,000 hours between major overhaul s.

7 . Engine-generator set shall be statically and dynamically balanced a t

the factory in order to comply with the maximum vibration velocity

specified in paragraph 3.1.D.

2.2 DIESEL ENGINE

A . Coupled directly to a generat or.

B . Minimum 4-cylinders.

C . Operating speed shall be 1800 RP M.

D. BMEP for the diesel e ngi ne, while the engine-generator set is delivering

100 percent of its specified out put , shall not exceed the following

maximum limits:

E . The minimum cubic inch displacement of the engine shall not be less than

the value calculated from the following equation:

Displacement = BHP_x_K_

BMEP x RPM

Where BHP = Specified KW + R

0.746 x G

K = 396,000 for 2-cycle engines

K = 792 ,000 for 4-cycle enginesBMEP = Values specified above

RPM = 1800

G = generator efficiency expressed as a decimal

R = horsepower of radiator fan

R = O , when electric motor driven radiator fan is herein

specified

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 8





F. The engine shall be able to start in a 4.5 degrees C (40 degrees F )

ambient temperature while using N o . 2 diesel fuel oil without the use of

starting aids such as glow plugs and ether injec tions.

G. Fuel oil consumption o f the engine rate shall not exceed

pounds of fuel oil per BHP per hour when it delivers 100 percent of it s

specified KW/KVA rating.

H . Equipped with electric heaters for maintaining the engine’ s coolant

temperature in the range of 32- 38 degrees C (90-100 degrees F) as

recommended by the manufacturer.

1 . Install thermostatic contr ols, contac tors, and circuit breaker

protected circuits for the heater s.

2 . The heaters shall operate continuously except while the engine is

operating or the water temperature is at the predetermined level.

2.3 GOVERNOR

A . Isochronous; electronic or hydraulic ty pe .

B . Steady-state speed band at 60 Hz shall not exceed plus or minus 1/3 of

one percent.

C . At 60 H z , when load changes equal to 25 percent of the specified KW/KVA

ra tin g, frequency change shall not exceed two percent and it sha ll

recover to 60 Hz within three second s.

D. At 6 0 H z , when load changes equal to 100 percent of the specified KW/KVA

ra tin g, frequency change shall not exceed eight percent and it sh all

recover to 60 Hz within five secon ds.

E . While the engine is runni ng, manual speed adjustments may be ma de .

2.4 LUBRICATION OIL SYSTEM

A . Pressurized ty pe .

B . Positive-displacement pump driven by engine crankshaft.

C . Full-flow strainer and full-flow or by-pass filter s.

D. Filters shall be cleanable or replaceable type and shall remove

particles as small as 3 microns without removing the additives in t he

oil. For by-pass fi lte rs, flow shall be diverted without flow

interruption.

E . Extend lube oil sump drain line passing out through the skid base and

terminate it with a drain valve and plug.

F. Provide a 120-volt oil heater for exterior generator s et .

2.5 FUEL OIL SYSTEM

A . Shall comply with NFPA 37 and NFPA 3 0 , and have the following fea tures :

1 . Injection pum p(s) and nozzl es.

2 . Plungers shall be carefully lapped for precision fit and shall no t

require any packing .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 9





3 . Filters or scr een s, which require cleaning or replaceme nt, will not

be permitted in the injection system assemblies.

4 . Return surplus oil from the injectors to the main storage tank by

gravity or a pump .

5 . Filter System:

a . Dual primary filters shall be located between the main fuel oi l

storage and day tan k.

b . Secondary filters (engine mounte d) shall be located so the oil

will be thoroughly filtered before it reaches the injection system

assemblies.

c. Filters shall be cleanable or replaceable type and shall entrap

and remove water from oil as recommended by the engine

manufacturer.

B . Sub-Base Fuel Tan k:

1 . Capacity of the day tank shall be not less tha n:

a . 8 hours fuel consumption based on 1 00 % load for generator s et .

2 . Shall be welded st ee l, UL appro ved.

3 . Se cu re , pipe and connect the tank adequately for maximum protection

from fire haz ard s, including oil lea ks .

4 . Incorporate a ve nt , drain coc k, shutoff coc ks . Terminate the vent

piping outdoors with mushroom vent cap.

C . Piping Sys tem: Black s te el, standard w eig ht, ASTM A-53 pipe and

necessary valves and pressure gages between :

1 . The engine and the day tank as shown on the drawin gs.

2 . The day tank and the supply and return connections at the underground

storage tank as shown on the drawi ngs. Connections at the engine

shall be made with flexible piping suitable for the fuel furnished.

3 . See fuel oil piping diagram on the dra wings .

2.6 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

A . Liquid-cooled, closed lo op , with radiator mounted on the engine

generator set and integral engine driven circulating pump a s shown on

the drawings.

B . Cooling capacity shall not be less than the cooling requirements of t he

engine-generator set and it s lubricating oil while operating

continuously at 110 percent of its specified rating.

C . Coolant shall be extended life antifreeze sol ution , 50 percent ethylene

and 50 percent soft wat er , with corrosion inhibitor additive a s

recommended by the manufacturer

D. Radiator core tubes material shall be as recommended by the engi ne

manufacturer.

E . Fan shall be driven by multiple belts from engine shaft .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 10





2.7 AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS

A. Air Intake:

Provide an engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry filter and

dirty filter indicato r.

B . Exhaust System:

1 . Where turbo-charges are re quired, they shall be engine-mounted,

driven by the engine ga se s, securely braced against vibration and

adequately lubricated by the engine's filtered lubrication system .

2 . Exhaust Muffler:

a . Shall be Critical grade type and capable of the following nois e

attenuation:

Octave Band Hertz(Mid Frequency)

31

63

125

500

1000

2000

4000

8000

Minimum db Attenuation(.0002 Microbar Reference)

5

10

27

37

31

26

25

26

3 . Pressure drop in the complete exhaust system shall be small enough

for satisfactory operation of the engine-generator set while it is

delivering 110 percent of its specified r ating .

4 . Exhaust pipe siz e, from the engine to the muff ler, shall be a s

recommended by the engine manu factu rer. Pipe size from muffler to air

discharge shall be two-pipe sizes larger than engine exhaust pi pe .

5 . Connections at the engine exhaust outlet shall be made with a

flexible exhaust p ip e. Provide bolted type pipe flanges welded to

each end of the flexible sect ion.

C . Condensate drain at muffler shall be made with schedule 4 0 black steel

pipe through a petcoc k.

D. Exhaust Piping and Sup ports : Black steel pi pe , ASTM A-53 standard weight

with welded fitt ings . Spring type han gers , as specified in Section 23 05

4 1 , NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQU IPM ENT , shall

support the pip e.

E . Insulation for Exhaust Pipe and Muff ler:

1 . Calcium silicate minimum 75 mm (3 in ches ) thic k.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 11





2 . Insulation shall be as specified in Section 23 07 1 1 , HV AC , PLUMBI NG,

AND BOILER PLANT INS ULATION.

3 . The installed insulation shall be covered with aluminum jacket 0.4 mm

(0.016 inc h) thick. The jacket is to be held in place by bands of

(0.38 mm ) (0.015 inc h) thick by 15 mm (0.5 i nch ) wide alum inum.

4 . Insulation and jacket are not required on flexible exhaust sections.

2.8 ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM

A . Shall start the engine at any position of the f lywhe el.

B . Electric cranking mo tor :

1 . Shall be engine-mounted.

2 . Shall crank the engine via a gear driv e.

3 . Rating shall be adequate for cranking the cold engine at the volta ge

provided by the battery sys tem , and at the required RPM during fiv e

consecutive starting attempts of 10 seconds cranking each at 10

second inter vals, for a total of 50 seconds of actual cranking

without damage.

C . Batte ries: 24 volt electric with the following feat ures:

1 . Batteries shall be nickel-cadmium high discharge rate typ e.

2 . Each battery cell shall have minimum and maximum electrolyte level

indicators, and flip top flame arrestor vent c ap .

3 . Batteries shall have connector covers for protection against external

short circuit s.

4 . With the charger disconne cted, the batteries shall have sufficient

capacity so that the total system voltage does not fall below 8 5

percent of the nominal system voltage with the following demands:

a. Five consecutive starting attempts of 10 seconds cranking at 10

second intervals for a total of 50 seconds of actual cranking

(the fifth starting attempt will be manually initiated upon

failure of a complete engine cranking cycle).

5 . Battery racks shall be metal with an alkali resistant finish and

thermal insulation, and secured to the fl oor .

6. Battery shall operate continuously for 12 hou rs and be able to

provide the cranking power described in 2.8.B.3 without charging.

D. Battery Charge r:

1 . The charger shall maintain one percent voltage regulation from n o

load to full load for line voltage variation of 10 percent and

frequency variation of ± 3 Hz from 60 H z .

2 . The charger shall maintain a nominal float voltage of 1.4 vdc and a

nominal equalizing voltage of 1.6 vdc.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 12





3 . The charger shall be capable of continuous operation in an ambi ent

temperature of –20 to 60 degrees C (-30 to 104 degrees F ) without

dera ting . The charger shall be convection cooled and housed in a NEMA

2 5 0 , Type 1 encl osu re. The charger shall have a hinged front door and

all components shall be accessible from the f ron t.

4 . Provide both AC and DC transient prot ecti on. Charger shall be able to

recharge a fully discharged battery without tripping AC protective

dev ice s. AC circuit breaker shall not trip under any DC load

condition including short circuit on output terminals.

5 . The charger shall be capable of recharging the fully discharged

battery in 12 hour s and simultaneously power the Supervisory and

Control panel .

6. The charger shall have fused AC input and DC output prot ecti on, and

shall not discharge the batteries when AC power fail s.

7 . The charger shall have the following ac cessories :

a. On-Off control switch with pilot lig ht.

b . Hand adjustable 0 to 24 hour equalize charge timer .

c. AC power failure alarm lig ht.

d. High DC voltage alarm li ght .

e . DC voltmeter – 5 percent accuracy.

f. DC Ammeter – 5 percent accur acy.

2.9 GENERATOR

A . Synchron ous, amortisseur w indin gs, bracket-bearing, self-venting,

rotating-field type connected directly to the engine.

B . Lifting lugs designed for convenient connection to and removal from the

engine at the construction si te.

C . Integral poles and sp ide r, or individual poles dove-tailed to the

spider.

D. Insulation shall be as required for the ambient temperature and other

requirements designated in the pa ragraph, DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SE T,

in this section.

E . Designed for sustained short circuit currents in conformance with NEMA

Standards.

F. Designed for sustained operation at 12 5 percent of the RPM specified for

the generator set without damage .

G. Telephone influence factor shall conform to NEMA Standards.

H . Furnished with brushless excitation system or static-exciter-regulator

assembly.

I . Nameplates attached to the generator and exciter shall show t he

manufacturer's n am e, equipment id entification, serial n umbe r, voltage

ratin gs, field current ra ting s, KW/KVA output rat ing s, power factor

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 13





rati ng, time ra ting , temperature rise r atin gs, RPM r atin gs, full load

current ratin g, number of phases and frequen cy, and date of manufactur e.

J. At full loa d, the efficiency shall be not less tha n:

1 . 89 percent for sets specified from 60 KW to 17 5 K W.

2 . 92 percent for sets specified over 175 K W.

K . The neutral shall be electrically isolated from equipment ground and

terminated in same junction box as the phase conduct ors.

2.10 EQUIPMENT FOR CONTROLS , SUPERVISION AND DISTRIBUTION

A . Shall include Engine Generator Control Cubicle (s) Remote Annunciator

Panel.

1 . Control Equipment shall be in accordance with UL 5 08 , NEMA ICS-4,

ICS-6 and ANSI C37 .90. 1.

2 . Panels shall be in accordance with UL 5 0 .

3 . Cubicles shall be in accordance with UL 89 1 .

4 . Incorporate all of the items required to fulfill the requirements i n

the specifications and on the drawi ngs.

5 . Components:

a. Shall be heavy duty , industrial typ e.

b . Electrical contacts shall be precious metal surf aced.

c. Only heavy duty solid-state components will be accepted.

6. Coordinate controls with the automatic transfer devic es shown on the

drawin gs, so that the systems will operate as specifie d.

7 . Cubicles and Pan els :

a. Code gauge st eel ; manufacturer's recommended heavy gauge steel

with factory primer and light gray finish.

b . Doors shall be gasketed and be attached with concealed or semi-

concealed hi ng es , and shall have a permanent means of latching in

closed position.

c. Panels shall be wall mounted or incorporated in other equipment a s

indicated on the drawings or as specified.

d. Cubicle design shall be of frame construction free standing sh eet

metal cab ine t, floor supported with front and rear access open ings

for air circulation.

e . Door locks for panels and cubicles shall have identical keying to

operate from a single key .

f. Panel installation shall be suitable for convenient maintenance

and opera tion. Overall heights of the cubicles shall not exceed

2.5 meters (90 inches).

8 . Wiring: Insulated, rated at 600 vol ts, UL approved.

a. Install the wiring in vertical and horizontal runs, neatly

harnessed.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 14





b . Terminate all external wiring at heavy d uty , pressure t yp e,

terminal block s.

9. Clearly and permanently label the equ ipm ent , wiring terminals and

wires.

1 0 . Laminate or mount under Plexiglas appropriate wiring diagrams and

mount them within the frame on the inside of the cubicles and pa nel s.

1 1 . The system shall be designed and manufactured employing the mo st

modern technology to insure maximum reliability and lon gevi ty. It

shall be arranged for automatic and manual starting , and sto pping.

13 . All indicating lamps and switches shall be accessible and mounted o n

the cubicle doors .

1 4 . Electronic governor control pa ne l, voltage regulat or, control pan el ,

motorized voltage adjusting potentiom eter, and associated components

shall be shipped to the generator control switchboard manufacturer

for assem bly, mounting and/or inter-wiring in the switchboard.

Detailed drawings outlining proper interconnection and physical

mounting data shall also be furnished to the generator switchboard

manufacturer to facilitate proper design and interfac ing. The engine

generator set supplier shall furnish these items as soon as pos sible .

15 . All meters shall be solid-state switchboard ty pe , 112 mm (4-1/2

inches), 1 percent accuracy transformer rated for 600 volt service.

Ammeters and voltmeters shall be furnished with phase selector

swi tche s. Metering shall include necessary current and potential

transformers and instrument fuse s.

1 6. The repetitive accuracy of the monitors shal l be as stated over an

environmental temperature range of 0 to 45 degrees C (32 to 113

degrees F ) and voltage range of 70 to 11 0 percent of nomin al. The

accuracy shall not exceed the following limits:

Voltage Monitors

Current Monitors

Frequency Monitors

Power Monitors

+ 2 percent of set point


+ 0.2 H z .


1 7 . The manufacturer shall coordinate the interfacing of the control

systems with all related equipment supplied in accordance with other

sections of the project specification.

B. Engine Generator Control Cubicle

1 . Starting and Stopping Controls :

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 15





a . A three-p ositi on, maintained-contact type selector switch with

positions marked "AUTOMATIC" , "OFF " and "MA NUAL". Provide flashing

amber light for "OFF" and "MANUAL" positi ons.

b . A momentary contact pushbutton switch with positions marked

"MANUAL STA RT" and "MANUAL ST OP" .

c. Selector switch in "AUTOM ATIC" position shall cause the engine to

start automatically when a single pole contact in a remote devi ce

close s. When the generator's output voltage increases to not less

than 90 percent of it s rated v olta ge, and its frequency increases

to not less than 58 H z , the remote devices shall transfer the load

to the ge nerator. An adjustable time delay r ela y, 0 to 15 minute

ran ge , shall cause the engine generator set to continue operating

without any load after completion of the period of operation with

lo ad . Upon completion of the additional 0 to 15 minute

(adjustable) period, the engine generator set shall st op.

d. Selector switch in "O FF" position shall prevent the engine from

starting either automatically or manual ly. Selector switch in

"MANUAL" position shall cause the engine to start when the manual

start pushbutton is also depressed momentarily.

e . With selector switch in "MANUAL" position , depressing the "MANUAL

STOP" pushbutton momentarily shall stop the engine after a cool

down period.

f. A maintained co nta ct , red mushroom head pushbutton switch marked

"EMERGENCY ST OP" will cause the engine to stop without a cool down

period independent of the position of the selector switch.

2 . Engine Cranking Controls :

a . The cranking cycles shall be controlled by timer that will be

independent of the battery voltage fluctuations.

b . Shall crank the engine through one complete cranking cyc le,

consisting of four starting attempts of 10 seconds each and 1 0

seconds between each attempt .

c. Total actual cranking time for the complete cranking cycle s hall

be 40 seconds during a 7 0 second inte rval.

d. Cranking shall terminate when the engine starts so the starting

system will not be dama ged. Termination of the cranking shall b e

controlled by self-con tained , speed-sensitive sw itc h. The switch

shall prevent re-cranking of the engine until after the eng ine

stops.

e . After the engine has stopped the cranking control shall rese t.

3 . Supervisory Con trols :

a. Overcrank:

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 16





1 ) When the cranking control system completes one cranking cy cle ,

four starting att empt s, without starting the eng ine , the

"OVERCRA NK" signal light and the audible alarm shall b e

energized.

2 ) The cranking control system shall lock -out , and shall require a

manual rese t.

b . Coolant Temperature :

1 ) When the temperature rises to the predetermined first stage

level, the "HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - FIRST STAGE" signal

light and the audible alarm shall be energized.

2 ) When the temperature rises to the predetermined second stag e

level, which shall be low enough to prevent any damage to the

engine and high enough to avoid unnecessary engine shutdowns,

the "HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - SECOND ST AGE " signal light and

the audible alarm shall be energized and the engine shall stop.

3 ) Difference between the first and second stage temperature

settings shall be approximately -1 2 degrees C (10 degrees F ) .

4 ) Permanently indicate the temperature settings near the

associated signal light .

5 ) When the coolant temperature drops to below 21 degrees C (70

degrees F ) , the "LOW COOLANT TEMPERA TURE" signal light and the

audible alarm shall be energiz ed.

c. Low Coolant L eve l: When the coolant level falls below the minimum

level recommended by the manufa cturer, the "LOW COOLANT L EVEL"

signal light and audible alarm shall be energized.

d. Lubricating Oil Pressur e:

1 ) When the pressure falls to the predetermined first stage le ve l,

the "OIL PRESSURE - FIRST STA GE" signal light and the audible

alarm shall be ene rgized.

2 ) When the pressure falls to the predetermined second stage

level, which shall be high enough to prevent damage to the

engine and low enough to avoid unnecessary engine shutdowns,

the "OIL PRESSURE - SECOND ST AGE " signal light and the audible

alarm shall be energized and the engine shall stop.

3 ) Difference between the first and second stage pressure se ttings

shall be approximately 15 percent of the oil pre ssure.

4 ) Permanently indicate the pressure settings near the associated

signal ligh t.

e . Overspeed:

1 ) When the engine RPM exceeds the maximum RPM recommended by th e

manufacturer of the eng ine , the engine shall sto p.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 17





2 ) Simultaneously, the "OVERSPEED" signal light and the audible

alarm shall be energized .

f. Low Fuel - Day Tan k:

1 ) When the fuel oil level in the day tank decreases to less than

the level at which the fuel oil transfer pump should start to

refill the tan k, the "LOW FUEL DAY TANK" light and the audible

alarm shall be ene rgized.

g. Low Fuel - Main Storage Tan k:

1 ) When the fuel oil level in the storage tank decreases to less

than 1/3 of total tank capa city , the "LOW FUEL-MAIN STORAGE

TANK” signal light and audible alarm shall be energized.

h . Reset Alarms and S igna ls: Overcrank , Coolant Temperat ure, Coolant

Level, Oil Pres sure, Overspeed, and Low Fuel signal lights and the

associated audible alarms shall require manual re se t. A

momentary-contact silencing switch and pushbutton shall silence

the audible alarm by using relays of solid state devices to

seal-in the audible alarm in the de-energized condition

Elimination of the alarm condition shall automatically release the

sealed-in circuit for the audible so that it will be automatically

energized again when the next alarm condition oc cu rs . The signa l

lights shall require manual reset after elimination of th e

conditi on, which caused them to be energi zed. Install the audible

alarm just outside the generator room in a location as directed by

the Resident Eng inee r. The audible alarm shall be rated for 85 dB

at 3 meter (10 feet ) .

i . Generator Breaker Signal Ligh t:

1 ) Molded case circuit breaker and conta ctor: A flashing green

light shall be energized when the generator circuit breaker is

in either the "OPEN" or "TRIPPED" position.

2 ) Power circuit brea ker: A flashing green light shall be

energized when the generator circuit breaker is in the "OPEN"

or "TRIPPED" position.

3 ) Simultaneously, the audible alarm shall be energized.

4 . Monitoring Devices :

a . Electric type gauges for the cooling water temperatures and

lubricating oil pre ssur es. These gauges may be engine mounted with

proper vibration isolati on.

b . A running time indi cato r, totalizing not less than a 9,999 hour,

heavy duty and an electric type tachometer.

c. Volt meter, ammet er, and their selector swit ches , frequency m ete r,

kilowatt me te r, manual adjusting knob for the output voltage and

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 18





the other items shown on the drawings shall be mounted on the

front of the generator control pane ls.

d. Install potential and current transformers as r equired.

e . Individual signal lig hts :

1 ) OVER-CRANK

2 ) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - FIRST STAGE

3 ) HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - SECOND STAGE

4 ) LOW COOLANT TEMPERATURE

5 ) OIL PRESSURE - FIRST STAGE

6 ) OIL PRESSURE - SECOND STAGE

7 ) LOW COOLANT LEVEL

8 ) GENERATOR BREAKER

9 ) OVERSPEED

10 ) LOW FUEL - DAY TANK

11 ) LOW FUEL – MAIN STORAGE TANK

f. Lamp Te st : "Lamp Test " momentary contact switch shall momentarily

actuate the alarm buzzer and all the indicating lamps.

5 . Power switching and overcurrent protection shal l be accomplished with

molded case circuit breakers .

a . Molded Case Circuit Breakers shall have the following fea tures :

1 ) Solid state adjustable trip type circuit breaker s.

2 ) Shall be in accordance with UL 489 and NEMA AB- 1.

3 ) Trip units shall have field adjustable tripping characteristics

as follows:

a ) Ampere setting (continuous).

b ) Long time band.

c ) Short time trip point .

d ) Short time delay.

e ) Instantaneous trip poi nt.

4 ) Trip setting shall be as indicated on the drawi ngs.

6 ) Electrically and mechanically trip fr ee .

7 ) Manual operating handle with lock-open padlocking p rovisio ns,

and position indicators on the front of the br eaker .

8 ) Rear stud connection for both line and load sid es.

9 ) Shall include type " a " and " b " auxiliary contacts for

interfacing with controls .

6. Automatic Voltage Regula tor:

a . Shall maintain the generator's output voltage within plu s or minus

one percent for load variations between no load and full load.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 19





b . Shall correct voltage fluctuations rapidly and restore the output

voltage to the predetermined level with a minimum amount of

hunting.

c. Shall include voltage level rheostat located inside the control

cubicle.

d. Provide a 3-phase automatic voltage regulator immune to waveform

distortion.

7 . Govern or: Specified herein before in Article 2.3 "GOVERNOR".

8 . The voltage regulator and other components of the auxiliary

electrical power system shall be protected during operation of t he

diesel engine-generator set at spee ds other than the rated RPM wh ile

performing maintenance by a power monitoring system which monitors

single phase and three phase fa ul ts . A time-delay relay shal l shut

down the engine when the alternator thermal capacity is exceeded.

2.11 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

A . Remote annunciator panel shall be installed at the Engineering Control

Center.

B . The annunciator shall indicate alarm conditions of the emergency or

auxiliary power source as foll ows:

1 . Individual visual signals shall indicate:

a . Which generator is operating to supply power to lo ad?

b . Which battery charger is malfunctioning?

c. When main storage tank is l ow .

2 . Individual visual signals plus a common audible alarm shall warn of

the following:

a. "LOW LUBRICATING OIL PRESSURE - FIRST STAGE."

b . "LOW COOLANT."

c. "EXCESSIVE COOLANT TEMPERATURE - FIRST STAGE."

d. LOW FUEL - DAY TANK."

e . "OVERCRANK" (failure to start).

f. "OVERSPEED."

C . The annunciator shall also have the following feat ures:

1 . One pushbutton momentary contact swi tch. Label switch "LAMP - TES T" .

Initiating this switch shall momentarily actuate the alarm buzzer and

all the indicating lam ps .

2 . Audible Alarm: There shall be an audible alar m, rated for 85 dB at 10

feet, which shall become actuated whenever an alarm condition occurs.

A momentary-contact acknowledge pushbutton shall silence the audible

alar m, but not clear the alarm l amp . Elimination of the alarm

condition shall automatically release the seal-in circuit for the

audible alarm and extinguish the alarm lamp.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 20





2.12 EXERCISING CONTROL PANEL

A . Incorporate exercising controls so as to allow testing of each remotely

located transfer switch from the Engine-Generator Control Cubicle.

1 . For each transfer swi tch, incorporate red and green la mp s, indicating

the position of the transfer s witch .

2 . For each transfer swi tch, incorporate a two position contact s witch .

Label switch po sition : "Test and "A utomatic". The "Test " position

shall simulate an outage of normal power at the transfer sw itch . The

"Autom atic" position shall place the transfer switch in normal

operation.

2.13 SOUND ATTENUATED ENCLOSURE

A . The emergency generator set and related equipment shall be housed in a n

outdoor weatherproof enc losu re. The generator will function properly

without overheating in the ambient conditions specifie d. Enclosure

shall be weatherproof and sound attenuated (maximum 85 dBA at 152 5 mm(five fe et ) from any si de , top and bottom to no more than 75 dBA when

measured at 15 meters (50 fe et ) horizontally from any part of the

encl osur e) Sound ratings shall be based on full load condition of

engine/generator in a single unit operation co ndit ion . Airflow

configuration of the unit will be intake through rear of unit and

discharge air vertically u p . Enclosure shall be suitable for winds up to

193 kmh (120 m p h ) ; roof load shall be equal to or greater than 200 kg/sq

m (40 lbs per sq . f t ) . Non-distributed loading as required.

B . The enclosure shall meet the following requ irements:

1 . The exterior finish shall be guaranteed for a period of 10 years to

be free from any defects when properly maintained.

3 . Radiator exhaust outlet shall be ducted through the end of th e

enclosure.

4 . All exterior surfaces shall be factory painted with industrial

enamel.

5 . Unit shall have sufficient guards to prevent entrance by small

animals.

6. Batteries to fit inside enclosure and along side the engine pro vide

protective shi eld. (Batteries under the generator are not

acceptable.)

7 . Exhaust System: The silencer shall be critical g rad e, mounted and

thermally insulated inside the enc losu re. Insulation must be provided

for the si lencer, flex and all discharge pip ing. The weight of the

silencer shall not be supported by engi ne. The exhaust pipe size

shall be sufficient to insure that exhaust backpressure does not

exceed the maximum limitations specified by the engine manufacturer.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 21





The exhaust silencer outlet roof penetration shall be sealed t o

prevent the entrance of ra in, snow and sl eet . A stainless steel

bellowed flex shall be pr ovided.

2.14 SPARE PARTS

A . For each engine-generator s et :

1 . Six lubricating oil filter s.

2 . Six primary fuel oil filte rs.

3 . Six secondary fuel oil filter s.

4 . Six intake air filter s.

B . For each battery ch arger :

1 . Three complete sets of fuse s.

2 . One complete set of indicating lam ps.

C . For each control and supervisory p ane l:

1 . Three complete sets of fuse s.

2 . One complete set of indicating lam ps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install concrete bases of dimensions shown on the drawings for packaged

engine-generator sets.

B . Installation of the engine generator set shall comply with

manufacturer's written instructions and with NFPA 110.

C . Mounting

1 . Support the base of engine-generator set on vibration isola tors, each

isolator bolted to the floor (pad ) , generator base bolted to

isolator.

2 . Install sufficient number of isolators so that the floor (pa d)

bearing pressure under each isolator is within the floor (pad)

loading specification.

3 . Install equal number of isolators on each side of the

engine-generator set's ba se.

4 . Locate isolators for approximately equal load distribution and

deflection per iso lat or. Base of the engine-generator se t shall be

drilled at the factory for the isolator bol ts.

5 . Isolators shall be shipped loose with the engine-generator se t.

6. All connections between the engine-generator s et and exterior

syste ms, such as fuel li ne s, electrical conn ections , and engine

exhaust system and air exhaust shro ud, shall be flexi ble.

D. Balance:

1 . The vibration velocity in the hori zontal, vert ical , and axial

directions shall not exceed 16.25 mm (0.65 in ch) per second peak at

any specific freque ncy. These limits apply to main structural

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 22





components such as the engine block and the generator frame at the

bearings.

2 . Balance the engine-generator set statically and dynamically at the

factory in order to comply with the maximum specified vibratio n

velocity.

E . Connect all components of the essential electrical power system so that

they will continue to be energized by the auxiliary electrical pow er

system during failures of the normal electrical power supply system.

F. Install piping between diesel engine and remote components of cooli ng,

fuel and exhaust syst ems.

G. Flexible connection between radiator and exhaust shroud at the w all

damper:

1. Install noncombustible flexible connections made of 20-ounce

neoprene-coated fiberglass fabric approximately 150 mm (six inches)

wide.

2 . Crimp and fasten the fabric to the sheet metal with screws 50 mm (two

inc h) on cente r. The fabric shall not be st ressed, except by the air

pressure.

H. Exhaust System Insulatio n:

1 . Adhesive and insulation materials shall be applied on cl ea n, dry

surfaces from which loose sc al e, and construction debri s has been

removed by wire bru shing.

2 . Fill all c rac ks, voids and joints of applied insulation material with

high temperature 1093 degrees C (2 000 degrees F ) insulating cement

before applying the outer cove ring.

3 . The installation shall be ne at , thermally and structurally tight

without s ag , neatly finished at all hangers or other penetrations and

shall provide a smooth finish surf ace.

4 . Insulation and jacket shall terminate hard and tight at all anchor

points.

5 . Insulate completely from engine exhaust flexible connection through

roof or wall con struction, including m uffle r.

3.2 START UP AND TESTING

A. Provide the services of a factory-authorized, factory-trained

representative of the diesel engine-generator set manufacturer to

inspect field-assembled co mpo nen ts, and equipment installation and

supervise the field tests

B . When the complete auxiliary electrical power system ha s been installed

and prior to the final inspection , tests all components of the system in

the presence of the Resident Engineer for proper operation of t he

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 23





individual components and the complete system and to eliminate

electrical and mechanical defects .

C . Furnish fuel oi l, lubricating oi l, anti-freeze liqui d, water treatment

and rust inhibitor and load bank for testing of the diesel

engine-generator se t.

D. Field Tests for the Diesel Engine-Generator S et :

1 . Test the engine generator set for eight hours of continuous op eration

as follows:

a. First six hours while the set is delivering 100 percent of its

specified KW ratin g.

b . Last two hours while the set is delivering 110 percent of it s

specified KW ratin g.

c. If during the 8-hour continuous test a failure oc cur s, either the

diesel engine shuts down or the full KW rating of the load bank is

not achieve d, the test is null and voi d. The test (s) shall be

repeated until the satisfactory results are attained at n o

additional cost to the gov ernment.

2 . Record the following test data at 30-minute intervals:

a. Time of d ay , also reading of running time ind icator.

b . K W.

c. Voltage on each phase .

d. Amperes on each phase .

e. Engine RPM .

f. Frequency.

g. Engine water temperature .

h . Fuel pressure

i. Oil pressure.

j . Outdoor temperature

k. Average ambient temperature in the vicinity of the diesel en gine .

l . Average ambient temperature in the vicinity of the starting

batteries.

3 . Demonstrate that the generator set will attain proper vol tage ,

frequency and will accept 100 percent block load within 10 se conds

from a cold start after the closing of a single contact.

4 . Furnish a resistance type load for the testing of the generator:

a . When approved in writing by the Resident Engineer prior to the

tes tin g, the Contractor may use connected loads in the building

(resistant plus other ty pes) as part of the test load provided the

Contractor assumes complete responsibility for the use of t he

connected l oa ds , including personnel injuries and property dam age.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 24





b . Test loads shall always include adequate resistance to as sure

stability of the loads and equipment during all of the testing

operations. The test load KW ratin g:

1 ) Shall not be less than 110 percent of the specified KW rating

of the largest generator se t.

2 ) Shall not be less than 35 percent of the sum of the specified

KW ratings of the all generator sets in a paralleling sys tem .

E . Battery and Starting System Test:

1 . Demonstrate that the batteries and cranking motor are capable of 5

starting attempts of 10 second cranking each at 10 second i ntervals

with the battery charger turned off.

F. Test local and remote pa nels : Simulate engine failures while checking

for proper operation of each indicating la mp , alarm device and reset

but ton . (It is recommended that one VA inspector be located in the

generator room and another at the site of remote pan els . By means of

telephone or walki e-ta lkie s, the inspectors should be assured of proper

operation and coordination of these panels.)

G. At the completion of the field t es ts , fill the underground storage tank

with fuel of grade and quality as recommended by the manufacturer of th e

engine.

H. When any defects are detected during the t es ts , correct all the

deficiencies and repeat all or part of the 8-hour continuous test as

requested by the Resident Eng ine er, at no additional cost to the

Government.

I . Provide test and inspection results in writing to the Resident Eng ine er.

3.3 INSTRUCTIONS AND FINAL INSPECTIONS

A . Laminate or mount under Plexiglas a set of operating instructions f or

the system and install instructions within a frame mounted on the w all

near the diesel engine-generator set a s requested by the Resident

Engineer.

B . At the final inspection in the presence of a VA representative,

demonstrate that the complete auxiliary electrical power system operates

properly in every respect .

C . Furnish the services of a comp ete nt, factory-trained engineer or

technician for five , 4-hour periods for instructions to VA personnel in

operation and maintenance of the equ ipm ent , on the dates requested by

the Resident Engine er.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 32 13 - 25





This page is intentionally left blank

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 2010




SECTION 26 36 23 – AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This section specifies the furn ishing, complete installation , and

connection of automatic transfer switches.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COM PON ENTS : Seismic

requirements for non-structural equipme nt.

B . ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATO RS: Requirements for elevator operatio n.

C . HYDRAULIC ELEVA TORS: Requirements for elevator oper ation.

D. Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: General

electrical requirements and ite ms that is common to more than one


E . Section 26 05 7 1 , ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE S TUDY :

Requirements for coordinated electrical system.

F. Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES(600 VOLTS AND BELOW): Cables and Wirin g.

G. Section 26 32 1 3 , ENGINE GENERATOR S: Requirements for emergency power

generation.

H. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS:

Requirements for personal safety and to provide a low impedance path for

possible ground fault curren ts.


A . Factory authorized representative shal l maintain a service center

capable of providing emergency maintenance and repair services at the

project site within 8 hour maximum response tim e.

B . Automatic transfer swi tch , bypass/isolation switch and annunciation

control panels shall be products of same manufactur er.

C . Comply with OSHA – 29 CFR 1910.7 for the qualifications of the testing

agency.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


INSTALLATIONS.

B . Shop Drawings:

1 . Sufficient informati on, clearly presented, shall be included todetermine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2 . Include electrical ratings (including withstand), dimensions,

weights, mounting d eta ils, conduit entry provisions front v ie w, side

vie w, equipment and device arrangeme nt, elementary and

interconnection wiring d iagr ams, and acces sories.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 1





3 . Complete nameplate d at a, including manufacturer's name and catalog

number.

4 . A copy of the markings that are to appear on the transfer switch es

when installed.

C. Manuals:


complete maintenance and operating and maintenance manuals including

technical data she ets , wiring diagrams and informat ion, such as

telephone n umbe r, fax number and web si te s, for ordering replacement

parts.

2 . Two weeks prior to final ins pection, submit four copies of a final

updated maintenance and operating manual to the Resident Engineer .

a. Include complete "As installed" diag rams , which indicate all items

of equipment and their interconnecting wiring.

b . Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each of th e

items of e quipme nt, including "As installed" revisions of the

diagrams.

c. The wiring diagrams shall identify the terminals to facilitate

installation, maintenance, operation and testin g.

D. Certifications:

1 . Submi t, simultaneously with the shop draw ings , a certified test

report from a recognized independent testing laboratory that a

representative sample has passed UL 1008 (Prototype testing).

2 . Additionally when transfer switches are used with power air circuit

breakers having short-time trip elements without instantaneous trip

elements provide a certified test report showing tha t the sample has

passed the additional withstand requirements of this specification.

Method of test shall be in accordance with UL 10 08 . Main contact

separation as measured by an oscillograph voltage trace acros s the

contacts will not be allowed during this te st . Welding or burning of

contacts is unacceptable.

3 . Two weeks prior to final inspection , submit four copies of the

following to the Resident Engine er:

a . Certification that no design changes have been made to the swit ch

or its components since last certified by UL or as tested by an

independent laborator y.

b . Certification by the manufacturer that the equipment conform s to

the requirements of the drawings and sp ecifications.

c. Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been

properly instal led, adjusted , and teste d.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 2





d. A certified test report from an independent laboratory that a

representative sample has passed the ANSI surges withstand t est

for transfer switches which incorporate solid-state components.

e . Certification from the manufacturer that the automatic transfer

switch(s), accesso ries, and components will withstand the seismicforces and that the unit will be fully operational after the

seismic event at the project site .




refer enced . Publications are referenced in the text by designation o nl y:


B . Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

446 Recommended Practice for Design and Maintenance

of Emergency and Standby Power Systems

C37.90.1 IEEE Surge Withstand Capability (SW C) Tests for

Protective Relays and Relay Systems


250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum).

ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures

IC3 4 Industrial Control and Syst ems: Terminal Blocks

MG 1 Motors and Genera tors, Revision 1

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):70 National Electrical Code (NE C)


110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems



508 Industrial Control Equipment


1008 Transfer Switch Equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. General:

1 . Comply with U L, NEMA, NE C, ANSI and NFPA.

2 . Automatic transfer switches are to be electrically operated,

mechanically held open contact ty pe , without integral overc urrent

prot ecti on. Transfer switches utilizing automatic or non-automatic

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 3





molded case circuit breakers as switching mechanisms are n ot

acceptable.

3 . The unit shall be completely factory-assembled and wired so that only

external circuit connections are required in the fi eld . The unit

shall inc lude , but not be limited t o , operating me chanism, main

contacts, auxiliary contacts, timers , pilot light s, switches, and

auxiliary sensing devices .

4 . Each transfer switch shall be equipped with bypa ss/ isolation sw itc h.

The switch shall be part of the transfer sw itch.

5 . Shall be ASCO 300 Series or equal by Zenith or Rus selectric.

B. Ra tings, Markings and T est s:

1. Ratings:

a. P ha se, volt age, ampere ratin g, number of p ol es , withstand rating

shall be as shown on the dra wing s. The ampere rating shall be for

100 percent continuous load cu rrent .

b . Transfer switches are to be rated for total system transfer on

emergency systems.

c. Ratings shall be with non-welding of contacts during th e

performance of withstand and closing tests.

d. Maximum automatic transfer switch rati ng: 800 amper es

2 . Markings:

a. Markings shall be in accordance with UL 100 8.

b . Markings for the additional withstand test hereinafter specified

shall be included in th e nameplate da ta.

3. Tests:

a. Transfer switches shall be tested in accordance with UL 10 08 . The

contacts of the transfer switch shall not weld during the

performance of withstand and closing tests when used with th e

upstream overcurrent devi ce.

b . Where used with molded case circuit breakers or power air circui t

breakers with long-time and instantaneous t ri p, transfer switch

withstand and closing rating shall equal or exceed the av ailable

short circuit current shown on the draw ings , but shall not be less

than the following:

Switch Rating Withstanding(Amperes) Amperes

(RMSSymmetrical)

CircuitPower Factor

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 4





Up to 100

101 to 260

261 to 400

410 to 600

601 to 12001201 to 4000

22,000

35,000

42,000

50,000

65,00085,000

Per UL

Per UL

Per UL

Per UL

Per ULPer UL

4 . Additional Withstand Tes t:

a. See paragraph 1.4.D.1 for certification of "Withstand Test."

b . Where used with power air circuit breakers with long-time and

short-time trips without instantaneous tr ip , transfer switch

withstand rating shall be based on the available short circu it

current (RMS symmetrical) for a duration of ten cycl es.

5 . Surge Withstand Te st :

a. Transfer switches utilizing solid-state devices in sensi ng,

relayin g, operatin g, or communication equipment or circuits shall

comply with ANSI C37. 90.1 .

C. Housing:

1 . Enclose transfer switches in steel cabinets in accordance with U L

508, or in a switchboard assembly in accordance with UL 8 9 1 , as shown

on the dra wings . NEMA ICS 6 Type as indicated on the drawin gs.

2 . Do ors : Shall have three-point latching mechanism.

3 . Padlocking Provis ions: Provide chain for attaching a padlock . Attach

chain to the cabinet by welding or riveting .

4 . Fini sh: Cabinets shall be given a phosphate tr eatmen t, painted with

rust inhibiting pri me r, and finish painted with the manufacturer's

standard enamel or lacquer fini sh.

2.2 FEATURES

A . Transfer switches shall include the following featur es:

1 . Operating Mech anism:

a. Actuated by an electrical ope rator.

b . Electrically and mechanically interlocked so that the main contact

cannot be closed simultaneously in both normal and emergency

position.

c. Normal and emergency main contacts shall be mechanically locked i n

position by the operating linkage upon completion of transfer.

Release of the locking mechanism shall be possible only by nor mal

operating action.

d. Shall not include a neutral positio n.

e . Contact transfer time shall not exceed six c ycl es.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 5





f. Do not use as a current carrying pa rt . Components and mechanical

interlocks shall be insulated or grounded.

2 . Contacts:

a. For switches 400 amperes and l arge r, protect main contacts by

separate arcing contacts and magnetic blowouts for each p ol e. Arc

quenching provisions equivalent to magnetic blowouts will be

considered acceptab le.

b . Current carrying capacity of arcing contacts shall not be used in

the determination of the transfer switch ra tin g, and shall be

separate from the main contact s.

c. Main and arcing contacts shall be visible for inspection with

cabinet door open and barrier covers removed.

3 . Manual Operator:

a. Capable of operation in either direction under no load.

b . Capable of operation by one perso n.

c. Provide a warning sign to caution against operation when

energized.

4 . Replaceable Parts:

a. Include the main and arcing contact individually or as un it s,

rela ys, and control devices.

b . Switch contacts and accessories are to be replaceable from th e

front without removing the switch from the cabinet and witho ut

removing main conductors .

5 . Sensing Rela ys:

a . Provide voltage-sensing rela ys in each phase of the normal power

supply.

b . Provide adjustable voltage and frequency sensing relay s in one

phase of the auxiliary power supply .

6. Controls:

a . Control module shall provide indication of switch status –

emergency, norm al, and be equipped with alarm diagnostic

circuitry.

b . Control module shall control operation of the transfer sw itc h. The

sensing and the logic shall be controlled by a microprocessor

equipped with digital communication and battery back up. The

control shall comply with IEEE 4 7 2.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A . Transfer switches shall include the following accessori es:

1 . Indicating Lights of different col ors :

a. Green Signal light for normal source posi tion.

b . Red Signal light for emergency source position.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 6





2 . Laminated black phenolic nameplates with white letters to indicate

transfer switch positio n.

B . Manual Test Switch for simulating normal source fai lure .

C . Engine starting contact s.

D. Time delay relay to accomplish the function as specified.

E . Auxiliary Contacts :

1 . Provide contacts for connection to elevator controll ers, one closed

when transfer switch is connected to no rm al , and one closed when

transfer switch is connected to emergency.

2 . Provide additional contacts as necessary to accomplish the functions

shown on the draw ings , specified, and designated in other sections of

these specifications and one spare normally open and normally closed

contact.

3 . Contacts shall have a minimum rating of ten amperes and be positi ve

acting on pickup and drop out.

F. In-Phase Band Moni tor: Monitor shall control the operation of the

transfer sw itc h. It shall monitor the voltage and frequency of the

normal and emergency v oltag e.

G . Auxiliary Re lay : Provide an auxiliary pre-signal relay on al l automatic

transfer s witc hes, which will feed elevator loads for use as elevator

control.

2.4 TRANSFER SWITCH OPERATION

A . Engine Sta rt: A voltage decr ease, at any transfer sw itch , in one or more

phases of the normal power source to less than 70 percent of norm al

shall start the engine-generator unit after a time delay of two to thr ee

sec ond s. The time delay shall be field adjustable from zero to fifteen

seconds.

B . Transfer to Emergency (Emergency System Loads): Transfer switches for

emergency system loads shall transfer their load s from normal to

emergency source when frequency and voltage of the engine-generator unit

have attained 90 percent of rated va lu e. Only those switches with

deficient normal source voltage shall trans fer.

C . Transfer to Emergency (Equipment System Loads): Transfer switches for

equipment system loads shall transfer their load s to the generator on a

time delayed staggered ba si s, after the emergency system switches have

trans ferred . Total delayed transfer time of an equipment system s witches

shall not exceed two minu tes. Time-delay relays shall b e field

adjustable zero to two minute s.

D. Retransfer to Normal (All Loads): Transfer switch shall retransfer the

load from emergency to normal source upon restoration of normal supply

in all phases to 90 percent or more of normal vo ltag e, and after a time

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 7





de lay . The time delay shall be field adjustable from five to tw enty-five

minutes (preset for twenty-five minutes). Should the emergency source

fail during this t im e, the transfer switch shall immediately transfer t o

the normal source whenever it becomes a vailabl e. After restoring to

normal sou rce , the generator shall continue to run for five minutes

unloaded before shut do wn . Time delay shall be adjustable from zero t o

fifteen minutes.

E . Exercise Mo de : Transfer to emergency power source shall be accomplished

by remote manual test switches on a selective ba sis . //

2.5 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES (BP/IS)

A . Provide two-way bypass/isolation manual type swit ches. The BP/IS shall

permit load by-pass to either normal or emergency power source and

complete isolation of the transfer sw itc h, independent of transfer

switch pos itio n. The switches shall conveniently and electrically bypass

and isolate automatic transfer swit che s, which could not otherwise be

safely maintained without disruption of crit ical lo ad s. Bypass and

isolation shall be possible under all conditions including wher e the

automatic transfer switch may be removed from ser vic e. Bypass/Isolation

switches shall comply with NFPA 11 0 , and shall be factory tested .

B . Ope rati on: The bypass/isolation switch shall have provisions for

operation by one person through the movement of a maximum of two ha ndles

at a common dead front panel in no more than 15 seconds or less. Provide

a loc k, which must energize to unlock the bypass swi tch, to prevent

bypassing to a dead sour ce. Provide means to prevent simultaneous

connection between normal and emergency sources.

1 . Bypass to normal (or emergency): Operation of bypass handle shall

allow direct connection of the load to the normal (or emergency)

source, without load interruption or by using a break-before-make

des ign , or provide separate load interrupter contacts to momentarily

interrupt the load .

a . Assure continuity of auxiliary circuits necessary for proper

operation of the syst em.

b . A red indicating lamp shall light when the automatic transfer

switch is bypass ed.

c. Bypassing source to sou rce: If the power source i s lost while in

the bypass posi tion, bypass to the alternate source shall be

achievable without re-energization of the automatic transfer

switch service and load connecti ons.

2 . Isolatio n: Operation of the isolating handle shall isolate all live

power conductors to the automatic transfer switch without

interruption of the load .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 8





a. Interlocking: Provide interlocking a s part of the bypass/

isolation switch to eliminate personnel-controlled sequence of

oper ati on, and to prevent operation to the isolation position

until the bypass function has been c ompleted.

b . Padlo cking : Include provisions to padlock the isolating handle i n

the isolated p osition .

c. Visual verification: The isolation blades shall be visible in the

isolated position .

3 . Testing: It shall be possible to test (normal electrical o peration)

the automatic transfer switch and engine generator with the isolation

contacts cl ose d, and the load bypassed without interruption of power

to the load.

C . Ratin gs: The electrical capabilities and ratings of the bypass/isolation

switch shall be compatible with those of the associated automatic

transfer s witc h, including any required additional withstand t est s.

D. Enclosure Constr uctio n: Enclosure construction shall be in accordance

with UL sta nda rds . The bypass/isolation switch shall be mounted in a

separate enclosure or separate compartment from the automatic transfer

swi tch . NEMA ICS 6 enclosure rating shall match automatic transfer

switch.

E . Dia gra ms: The manufacturer shall provide specific information on the

interconnection and installation of the bypass/isolation switch and

automatic transfer switch .

F. The bypass/isolation switch shall also meet all the requirements as

specified for an automatic transfer switch.

2.6 . SPARE PARTS

A . Provide six control fuses for each automatic transfer switch o f

different rating.

B . Provide six pilot lamps of each type use d.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Install automatic transfer swit ch( s) in accordance with the NFPA and as

shown on the drawi ngs.

B . Level and anchor the automatic tran sfer (s) switch to floor or wall.

C . Ground equipment as shown on the drawings and as required by NFPA 7 0 .

3.2 START UP AND TESTING

A . After the complete system has been inst alle d, and before energizing th e

syste m, check all components of the syste m, including insulation

resista nce, phase to phase and phase to g round , complete electrical

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 9





circuitry and safety features according to the manufacturer’s written

instructions

B . After energizing cir cui ts, test the interlocking sequence and operation

of the complete sys tem , including time delays of transfer from norm al

source to emergency and back to normal so urc e, pick-up and voltage dro p,

and function of bypass/isolation switch in the presence of the Resident

Engineer prior to the final in spection.

C . When any defects are detected, correct the defects and repeat the test

as requested by the Resident Eng ine er, at no additional cost to the

Government.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A . At the final inspection in the presence of a VA repres entative,

demonstrate that the complete auxiliary electrical power system operates

properly in every resp ect . Coordinate this demonstration with the

demonstration of the engine-generator set.

3.4 TRAINING

A . Furnish the services of a comp ete nt, factory-trained engineer or

technician for one four-hour period for instructing VA personnel in

operation and maintenance of the equ ipm ent , including review of th e

operation and maintenance ma nu al , on a date requested by the Resident

Engine er. Coordinate this training with that of the generator training .

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 36 23 - 10




SECTION 26 42 00 – CATHODIC PROTECTION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A . This section specifies complete galvanic sacrificial anode type cathodic

protection systems for underground steel stru ctu res , including oi l

tanks, oil piping systems and outside steam distribution sy st ems . The

section also includes devices to electrically isolate the system being

protected.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A . Section 23 05 1 1 , COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC AND STEAM GENERATION.

B . Coating on underground steel casings for steam distribution syst ems :

Section 33 63 0 0 , STEAM ENERGY DISTRIBUTION


A . The Contractor shall be regularly engaged in the installation and

testing of cathodic protection syst ems . Contractor's personnel shall be

experienced and shall be supervised by an engineer who is accredited a s

a Corrosion Specialist by NACE International (organization of corrosion

engineers). All calc ulat ions , design and testing shall be performed by

or supervised by the Corrosion Spec iali st. All procedures shall conform

to recommendations of NACE RP0169 unless specified otherwi se.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A . Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 2 3 , SHOP DRAW INGS , PRODUCT DA TA,

AND SAMPLES.

B . Furnish catalog cuts and shop drawings of following it ems :

1. Anodes.

2 . Cable and wire.

3 . Test stations.

4 . Terminal boxes .

5 . Isolating flanges, unions, coatings, casing s eals .

6. Exothermic welding dev ices .

7 . Cable splice kits.

8 . Layout drawi ngs, wiring diagram s.

9. Test instruments.

1 0 . Dielectric tape.

1 1 . Test connection poi nts .C . Accreditation of Corrosion Specialists by NACE International.

D. Calc ulations, from field su rvey , performed by Corrosion Sp ecialist.


A . The publications listed below form a part of this specification to t he

extent refer enced . The publications are referenced in the text by bas ic


MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 42 00 - 1





B . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conduct ors, Har d,

Medium Hard, or Soft

D124 8 Polyethylene Plastic Extrusion Materials for

Wire and Cable

G57 Field Measurement of Soil Resistivity Using the

Wenner Four-Electrode Method

C . American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS ½ through

24

D. NACE International (The Corrosion Socie ty)( NACE) :

RP0169 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or

Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

ANODESA . T yp e: Magnesium, factory-packed in cloth bag or box containing prepared

backfill mixtu re, with lead wi res .

B. Construction:

1 . Alloy Specifications:

Element

Aluminum

Manganese

Zinc

SiliconCopper

Nickel

Iron

Other

Magnesium

Percent-(Option-1)

5.0 - 7.0

0.15 Min.

2.0 - 4.0

0.30 Max.

0.10 Max.

0.003 Max.

0.003 Max.

0.30 Max.

Remainder

Percent-(Option-2)

0.010 Max.

0.50 - 1.30

0.05 Max.

0.05 Max.

0.02 Max.

0.001 Max.

0.03 Max.

0.30 Max.

Remainder

2 . Co re : Perforated galvanized st ee l, maximum 0.148 kg per meter

(0.10-pounds per linear foot) , one end accessible in a recess for

lead wire connection.

3 . Lead Wir e: Number 12 solid c oppe r, 3000 mm (10 feet ) long, high

molecular weight polyethylene ins ulat ion, ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class

C , Category 5, Grade E5.

4 . Lead Wire Attachment to Co re: Silver-solder. Fill anode recess with

electrical potting compoun d.

5 . Packaging: Permeable cloth bag or box with backfill mixture

completely surrounding anode 15 mm (1/2 inch ) minimum.

MDE 10335 – March 31, 2010

26 42 00 - 2





a. Grain S iz e: Pass through 20-mesh screen -- 100 pe rcent ; retained

by 100-mesh screen -- 50 percent .

b . Components:

Ground Hydrated Gypsum

Powdered Wyoming Bentonite

Anhydrous Sodium Sulphate

75 percent

20 percent

5 percent

c. We ight : Weight requirements are listed on the dr awing s. Listings

refer to alloy weight onl y.

2.2 INSULATED CABLE

A . Typ e: One cond uctor, stranded, annealed co pper , high molecular weight

polyethylene insulation and jacket.

B . Serv ice: Buried in corrosive soi ls . Header ca bl e, test l ea ds , bonding

cable.

C. Construction:

1. Table:

MINIMUM THICKNESS OF INSULATION AND JACKET

AWG-SIZE

No. 8

No. 6

No. 4

No. 2

No. 1

No. 1/10

NUMBER-OF-STRANDS

7

7

7

7

19

19

mm (inches)

2.8 (7/64)

2.8 (7/64)

2.8 (7/64)

2.8 (7/64)

3.2 (8/64)

3.2 (8/64)

2 . Insulation: ASTM D1248, Type 1, Class C, Category 5 , Grade E5 .

3 . Conductors: ASTM B 8 .

2.3 CABLE CONNECTIONS

A . Typ e: Connections between cables and p ip es , casings or structures shall

be exothermic fusion-welding proc ess using copper oxi de , aluminum and

vanadium welding material in graphite mol ds . Connections between ca bles

and between cables and leads shall be corrosion-resistant split bolts.

B . Insulation of Cable-to-Cable Con nect ions : Epoxy-resin splice kits with

two-part resi n, mol d, sealing ma stic .

C . Coating of Cable Connections to Protected Str uct ures : Field-applied

coating similar to that on the protected structure.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 42 00 - 3





2.4 TEST STATIONS

A . Type : Weatherproof, located at g rad e, or aboveground if so sho wn.

Enclosed terminals for anode le ad s, test le ad s, and leads attached to

protected sys tem. Connection points for test in struments .

B . Construction:

1 . Housing: High-impact resistant plast ic. Provide means to anchor

housing below g rad e. Locking cover for terminal board. Yellow c olo r.

2 . Terminal Boar d: High-impact resistant plastic bo ard, cadmium or

zinc-plated hardw are, accessible from front and r ea r, sufficient

terminals for all required c onnection s.

2.5 DIELECTRIC TAPE

A . Vinyl plastic electrical ta pe , 0.18 to 0.25 mm (7 - 10 mil s) thick,

pressure-sensitive ad hesive .

2.6 WARNING TAPE

A . 50 mm ( 2 inc hes) wide , detectable with metal detec tor, mylar-encasedaluminum , orange col or, imprinted "Cathodic Protection Cable Be low".

2.7 DIELECTRIC INSULATION

A . Type s: Insulating gas ket s, sleeves and washers for pipe flange s,

insulating unions for threaded p ip e, casing seals between pipes or

conduits and wall slee ves, dielectric coatings for systems contacting

concrete.

B . Serv ice: Stea m, condensate and oil piping systems as sho wn.

C . Flange Applications:

1 . Gaskets and Sleeves and Washers for Bol ting: Steam se rvic e, rated for

193 °C (360 °F); steam condensate service rated for 100 °C (212 ° F ) ;

oil s ervi ce, oil-resistant rated for 66 °C (150 °F). Provide steel

back-up washers on insulated wa sher s.

2 . Flan ges: Conform to ASME B16.5, 1025 kPa (150 psi) weld ne ck.

D. Union Applications: Minimum 1200 kPa (175 psi) , designed for service at

the temperature of the fluid in the p ip e, designed for type of flui d.

E . Wall Penetr ation: Rated for dielectric se rvic e, 66 °C (150 °F) for oil

service, 121 °C (250 °F) for steam serv ice, 100 °C (212 °F) for steam

condensate se rvice , tight water and air seal a t 3 m (ten fe et) of water

he ad , factory-built device consisting of EPDM or silicone rub ber

segments linked together. Acceptable manufacturers: Metraflex

Metraseal, Thunderline Link -Seal .

F. C oatin gs: Designed for cold applic ation, service temperature of carrier

pipe, high electrical resistivit y.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 42 00 - 4





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Anod es: Install in native soil, 900 mm (3 fe et ) minimum from protected

struc ture, below centerline of protected s tructu re, and at locations

show n. Backfill shall be native soil. Install anodes adjacent to fuel

tanks horizontally.

B . Cables and Anode Lead s:

1 . Bur ial : 600 mm (2 feet) minimum below finished gra de , 150 mm (6

inc h) minimum separation from other underground struct ures, backfill

material in contact with cable free of rocks and deb ris .

2 . Continuity Bo nds : Use cable to connect adjacent protected st ructur es,

and protected structures separated by non-welded conne ctor s. Provide

25 percent additional length as slack to allow differential movement

of protected sys tems .

3 . Connections: Provide cl ean , bri ght , bare metal surface at allconnection points .

4 . Warning T ap e: Install 150 mm (6 i nche s) below gr ade , directly above

cables.

C . Test Stati ons: Install where shown or as directed by Resident Engineer

(RE)/Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR), anchor

firm ly, terminal board 600 mm (2 fe et) minimum above grade for above

grade un it s. Connect all anodes and protected structure to the test

stations.

D. Dielectric Insulatio n:

1 . Gen era l: Provide complete dielectric insulation between protected and

unprotected systems and between protected systems and structures

which could ground the cathodic protect ion. Required insulation

points include all pipe entrances to bu ildin gs, manh oles , and pits.

2 . Flan ges: Install in locations open to view after completion of

construction. Provide insulating g ask ets , insulating sleeves on all

bolts, insulating washers under bolt heads and nuts.

3 . Union s: Install in locations open to view after completion of

construction. Unions not permitted in pipe sizes over 50 mm (2

inches).

4 . Wall Penetration Se al s: Install in space between pipes and wall

sleeves at building and manhole wall s.

5 . Coatings : Completely coat all pipe or conduit areas that are in

contact with concret e.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A . Provide system with a calculated design life exceeding 40 yea rs .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 42 00 - 5





B . Pre-construction Su rve y: The Corrosion Specialist shall perform a so il

resistivity survey using the Wenner Four-Pin Method a s described in ASTM

G57. Survey entire length of proposed protected system at the structure

dept h. Also survey native-state structure-to-soil pot entia l, soil p H ,

and presence of stray curren ts.

C . Calc ulat ions : The Corrosion Specialist shall perform engineering

calculations to verify the design of the system sh ow n. The ca lculations

shall follow a format published by a recognized corrosion ex per t. Inform

the Government of any recommended changes in the system design shown.

D. Field Inspections During Constru ction: The corrosion specialist shal l

inspect the work at least twice to ascertain that there is no groundin g,

short cir cuit s, coating dama ge, and that installation is in accordance

with requirements.

E . Final Inspection:

1 . Performed by Corrosion Specialist; witnessed by RE/COTR.

2 . Test Instruments:

a. Digital Volt-Ammeter with impedance of 7-10 mega-ohms/volt.

b . Saturated copper-copper sulfate reference electrode.

c. Other instruments as requir ed.

3 . Procedu res: Conform to NACE RP01 69.

4 . Test Results Required for Acceptan ce:

a . Potential of minus 0.85 v olt between protected structure and

reference electrode .

b . Minimum shift of minus 300 millivolts upon application of

protective cur ren t. Voltage measured between protected structure

and reference electro de.

c. Minimum shift of minus 100 millivolts upon interruption of

protective cur ren t. Voltage measured between protected structure

and reference electro de.

d. Amperage value sufficient that anode life 40 years can b e

calculated. Provide calculation s.

5 . Test Repo rt: Prov ide, to RE/CO TR, complete report showing all test

measureme nts, calculation s, list of instruments use d.

3.3 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A . Provide one set of reproducible drawings showing dimensioned locations

of all a nod es, cab les , test stat ions , and also anode we ight s. Provide

identification of test stations and anodes keyed to test reports.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 42 00 - 6




SECTION 26 51 00 – INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


the interior lighting systems .

1.2 RELATED WORK


requirements that are common to more than one section of Division 2 6 .

B . Section 26 05 2 1 , LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


C . Section 26 2 7 2 6 , WIRING D EVIC ES: Wiring devices used a s part of the

lighting systems.

D. Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYST EMS:




A . Refer to Paragra ph, QUALIFICATIONS, in Section 26 05 1 1 , REQUIREMENTS

FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .

B . Refer to Paragr aph, GUARANT Y, in Section 00 72 0 0 , GENERAL CON DITIONS .

1.4 SUBMITTALS



B . Shop Drawings:

1 . Sufficient inform ation, clearly p resented, shall be included to


2 . Include electrical r atin gs, dimens ions, mounting det ails , mater ials,

required c learan ces, terminations , wiring and connection d iagr ams,

photometric dat a, ballasts, lens es, louvers, lam ps, and controls.

3 . When catalog data and/or shop drawings for fluorescent fixtures are

submitted for ap pro val , photometric data from an independent testing

laboratory shall be included with the sub mit tal , indicating averag e

brightness and efficiency of the fi xtu re, as specified in

specification or as shown on the dra win gs. Coefficient of utilization

data will not be considered a suitable subst itute.

C. Manuals:1 . Submi t, simultaneously with the shop drawings companion copies of


sheets, and information for ordering replacement parts.

2 . Two weeks prior to the final inspectio n, submit four copies of t he

final updated maintenance and operating ma nua ls , including any

changes, to the Resident Enginee r.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 1





D. Certifications:


following certifications to the Resident Engineer:

a . Certification by the Contractor that the equipment has been

properly inst alled, adjusted, and teste d.

b . Include with shop draw ing s, certification from the man ufacturers

that all electronic high-frequency ballasts meet the transient

protection required by IEEE C62.41, Ca t. A . Include with initial

shop drawing submitta l.






B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

C78.1 Fluorescent Lamps - Rapid-Start Types -

Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

C78.2 Fluorescent Lamps - Preheat-Start Types -

Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

C78.3 Fluorescent Lamps - Instart Start and Cold -

Cathode Types - Dimensional and Electrical

Characteristics

C78.376 Chromaticity of Fluorescent Lamps (ANSI/NEMA

C78/376-96)

C . Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CB M ) :

Requirements for Ballast Certification.

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

C62.4 1 Recommended Practice on Surge Voltage in Low

Voltage AC Power Circuits

E . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):


101 Life Safety Code

F. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)

C82.1 Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications

C82.2 Method of Measurement of Fluorescent Lamp

Ballasts

C82.4 Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low -

Pressure Sodium Lamps

C82.11 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts

G. Underwriters Laboratories, In c. ( U L ) :

496 Edison-Base Lampholders

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 2





542 Lampholde rs, Star ters , and Starter Holders for

Fluorescent Lamps

84 4 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous

(Classified) Locations

924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment

935 Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts

1029 High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts

1598 Luminaires

H. Federal Communications Commission (FCC ) :

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR ) , Title 4 7 , Part 18

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES)

A . Shall be in accordance with NFPA 7 0 , UL 1598 and shall be as shown on

drawings and as specif ied.

B . Sheet Metal :1 . Shall be formed to prevent warping and sa gging. Housing, trim and

lens frame shall be tr ue , straight (unless intentionally curv ed) and

parallel to each other as desi gned.

2 . Wireways and fittings shall be free of burrs and sharp edges and

shall accommodate internal and branch circuit wiring without damage

to the wiring.

3 . Where lighting fixtures are detailed with minimum 20 gauge ho using ,

minimum 22 gauge housings will be acceptable provided they ha ve

strengthening embossed rib and break forma tio ns, which give the

equivalent rigidity of a 20 gauge ho using.

4 . When install ed, any exposed fixture housing surf ace, trim fr ame , door

frame and lens frame shall be free of light lea ks; lens doors shall

close in a light tight manner .

5 . Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly without binding

when the fixture is in the installed po sition , and latches shall

function easily by finger action without the use of t ool s.

C . Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally

installed po sit ion , and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or

wireway covers unless so specified.

D. Lamp Sockets:

1 . Fluorescent: Lampholder contacts shall be the biting edge type or

phosphorous-bronze with silver flash contact surface type and shall

conform to the applicable requirements of UL 5 4 2 . Contacts for

recessed double contact lampholders and for slimline lampholders

shall be silver pla ted. Lampholders for bi-pin l am ps , with the

exception of those for " U" type lam ps , shall be of the telescoping

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 3





compression t yp e, or of the single slot entry type requiring a

one-quarter turn of the lamp after inser tion.

2 . Incan desce nt: Shall have porcelain enclosures and conform to the

applicable requirements of UL 49 6.

3 . High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.): Shall have porcelain enclosures .

E . Recessed incandescent fixtures mounted in an insulated ceiling shall be

listed for use in insulated cei lings .

F. Fluorescent fixtures with louvers or light transmitting panels shall

have hi nge s, latches and safety catches to facilitate s af e, convenient

cleaning and relam ping . Vapor tight fixtures shall have pressure

clamping devices in lieu of the latches .

G. Mechanical Safety : Lighting fixture closures (lens do or s, trim fr ame ,

hinged hous ings , etc .) shall be retained in a secure manner by captive

screws, cha ins , captive hinges or fasteners such that they cannot be

accidentally dislodged during normal operation or routine maintenance.

H. Metal Finishes:

1 . The manufacturer shall apply his standard finish (unless oth erwise

specifie d) over a corrosion resistant pri mer, after cleaning to free

the metal surfaces of r us t, gre ase , dirt and other de posit s. Edges of

pre-finished sheet metal exposed during fo rmi ng, stamping or shearing

processes shall be finished in a similar corrosion resistant m anner

to match the adjacent surface(s). Fixture finish shall be free of

stains or evidence of rusting , blistering, or f laking .

2 . Interior light reflecting finishes shall be white with not less than

85 percent reflect ances, except where otherwise shown on the drawin g.

3 . Exterior finishes shall be as shown on the dra wings .

I . Provide all lighting fixtures with a specific means for grounding t heir

metallic wireways and housings to an equipment grounding conductor.

J. Light Transmitting Components for Fluorescent Fixtures:

1 . Shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water whi te, annealed,

crystal glass .

2 . Flat lens panels shall have not less than 3.2 mm (1/8 in ch) of

average thick ness. The average thickness shall be determined by

adding the maximum thickness to the minimum unpenetrated t hickness

and dividing the sum by 2 .

3 . Unless otherwise specifi ed, len ses , diffusers and louvers shall b e

retained firmly in a metal frame by clips or clamping ring in such a

manner as to allow expansion and contraction of the lens witho ut

distortion or cracking .

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 4





K. Lighting Fixtures in Hazardous Ar eas : Fixtures shall be suitable for

installation in flammable atmospheres (Class and Gro up ) as defined in

NFPA 70 and shall comply with UL 84 4 .

L . Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for

compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixt ure.

Assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtu res are prohibited

except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures.

Fixtures shall be designed for lamps as specified.

2.2 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS

A . Where applicabl e, fluorescent lamps and ballasts shall comply with the

National Energy Policy Act of 19 92 .

B . Ballasts shall comply with NEMA 82 .1 , 82.2 and 82.11, NFPA 7 0 , and UL

935 unless otherwise specified.

C . Lamp types F32T8 and F32T8/U shall be operated by electronic program

sta rt, high frequency balla sts.

D. Electronic high-frequency bal lasts :

1 . Ballasts shall operate the lamps at a frequency between 20 and 60 K Hz

from an input frequency of 60Hz.

2 . Ballast package:

a. Si ze : The ballast case shall be sized to be physically inter

changeable with standard core-and-coil ballasts and suitable for

standard mounting in new or existing lighting fixtures.

b . Case mar kin g: Mark the ballast to indicate the required supply

voltage, frequency, RMS curren t, current surge during startin g,

input wa tt s, and power factor at the design center v olta ge, open

circuit volta ge, crest factor and efficacy.

3 . Performance:

a. Light output:

1 ) At the design vo ltag e, the light output shall be at least equal

to that obtained by a core-and-coil ballasted system meeting

ANSI, NEMA and CBM stan dar ds. The comparison test shall b e

measured in the same fixture at 25 degrees C (plus or minus one

degr ee) ambient room temperatu re.

2 ) Tests shall be made in fixtures designed only for the number of

lamps being teste d.

3 ) For other applications (higher amb ient s, et c.) the tests should

be operated with equivalent lamp wall temperatures plu s or

minus 4 degrees C .

b . Efficacy: The efficacy of the high-frequency, electronically

ballasted system shall be at least 15 percent greater than the

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 5





equivalent CBM core-and-coil ballasted system (see "Light output"

above).

c. Star ting : The ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining

operation of lamps at an ambient temperature of 10 degrees C ( 50

degree F ) or more for an input voltage of plus or minus 10 percent

about the center design voltage unless otherwise indi cated . The

ballast shall never be started in the instant start mode at any

temperature.

d. Operation:

1 ) The ballast shall safely and reliably operate in a room ambie nt

temperature from 10 degrees C (50 degree F ) to 40 degrees C

(105 degree F ) .

2 ) The light output shall not vary by more than plus or minus 5

percent for a plus or minus 10 percent variation of the input

voltage about the center design v oltag e. Light output shall

remain constant for a plus or minus 5 percent variation of the

input voltag e.

3 ) The ballast shall operate the lamps in a manner that will not

adversely curtail the normal life of the la mp.

e . Transient prot ecti on: The ballast shall comply with IEEE C62.41,

Cat. A .

f. Fli cker: The flicker shall be less than 5 percent and without

visible flicker.

g. No ise : The audible noise levels should be equivalent to or better

than the Class A rating of CBM certified ballasts.

h . Electromagnetic Interference (E MI ) and Radio Frequency

Interference (RFI ) : The EMI and RFI limits shall meet the

requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rul es and

Regulations (CFR 47 Part 1 8 ) .

i . Rated li fe : The ballast shall have a rated life of 10 years or

30,000 hours (based on a 10 hour d a y ) .

j . The two-lamp ballast shall safely operate two F32T8 R S , 3 2 - watt

lamps or two F32T8/U l am ps. The single lamp ballast shall safely

operate one F32T8 RS , 32-watt lamp or one F32T8/U l am p.

k. Power facto r: Not less than 95 percent .

l. Reliability:

1 ) Label s: Ballasts must be labeled or listed by UL and C BM/ET L.

2 ) Submi t, simultaneously with shop dr awin gs, a certified test

report by an independent testing laboratory showing that the

electronic ballasts meet or exceed all the performance

requirements in this specification.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 6





m . Total harmonic distortion ( THD ) shall be less than 10 per cent.

F. Ballasts for lighting fixtures controlled by dimming devices shal l be

the elec tronic, high frequency type as specified her ein, equipped for

dimming and conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer of t he

associated dimming devices to assure satisfactory operation of the

lighting system.

G. All ballasts serving straight or "U " type lamps shall be mounted by four

non-turning studs (or captive bol ts ) equipped with lock washers and nuts

or locking type nuts, or by four thread cutting ( TC ) sheet metal screws

which are firmly secured against the fixture body (or wi rew ay) to

maximize dissipation of heat and minimize noi se. Exceptio n: electronic

high-frequency ballast s may be mounted at a minimum of two po in ts , one

at each end of un it .

H. Ballasts shall be serviceable while the fixture is in its normally

installed po sit ion , and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or

wireway covers unless so specified.

I . To facilitate multi-level lamp swit ching, lamps within fixture shall be

wired with the outermost lamp at both sides of the fixture on the same

bal las t, the next inward pair on another ballast and so on to the

innermost lamp (or pair of lamps). Within a given r oom , each switch

shall uniformly control the same corresponding lamp (or lamp p ai rs ) in

all fixture units that are being controlled.

J. Where three-lamp fixtures are indicat ed, unless switching arrangements

dictate otherw ise, utilize a common two-lamp ballast to operate the

center lamp in pairs of adjacent units that are mounted in a con tinuous

ro w. The ballast fixture and slave-lamp fixture sha ll be factory wired

with leads or plug devices to facilitate this circuiting. Individually

mounted fixtures and the odd fixture in a row shall utilize a

single-lamp ballast for operation of the center lamp.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FIXTURES:

A . Shall comply with NEMA 82.4 and UL 102 9.

B . Shall have individual overcurrent protection sized in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommendations.

C . Shall have integral thermal protection where the fixture is recessed in

an interior ceilin g.

D. Shall be the constant wattag e, pulse start high power factor type or the

reactor high power factor ty pe . Capacitors shall not contain PCB

(Polychlorinated Bip heny l) fluids or other fluids recognized as

hazardous when discharged into the environment.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 7





E . Shall have not less than Class B sound ratings for interior fixt ures ,

when avail able. Ballasts which are not available with Class B ratings

shall be of the next standard rati ng.

2.4 LAMPS

A. Fluorescent L amps :

1 . Rapid start fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANS I C78.1; preheat-

start type shall comply with ANSI C78.2; and instant-start and cold-

cathode lamps shall comply with ANSI C78.3.

2 . Chromacity of fluorescent lamps shall comply with ANSI C78. 376.

3 . The lamps shall include the F32T8, F32T8/U 32 watt energy saving type

and EPACT approved F40T 12 type if specifically required by contract

drawings for special applications.

4 . Except as indicated b elow , lamps shall be energy saving t yp e, have a

color temperature between 35 00 and 4100°K, a Color Rendering Index

(CR I) of not less than 7 5 , and an initial lumen output not less than

2800. "U " tube lamps shall have the same color temperature and C RI

limits as the abov e.

a. In utility areas (E lectrical, Communication and Mechanical)

Service rooms and closets), maintenance closets and non-medical

storage spa ces , utilize energy saving light-white lamp s.

b . In areas with ambient temperatures below 60 degrees use the 4 0

watt version of the lamp abo ve.

c. Over the beds in Intensive Ca re , Coronary C ar e, Recover y, Life

Suppo rt, and Observation and Treatment a re as; Electromyographic,

Autopsy (Necropsy), Surgery , and certain dental rooms

(Examination, Oral Hygiene , Oral Surg ery, Recovery, Labs,

Treatm ent, and X-Ra y) use color corrected lamps having a CRI of 90

or above and a correlated color temperature between 5000 and

6000°K.

d. Other areas as indicated on the dra wings .

B . High Intensity Discharge Lamps :

1 . Mercury vapor lamps shall be ANSI type " DX ". Lamps in open or

louvered fixtures mounted less than 4500 mm (15 fe et) above the

finished floor (or gr ade ) shall be of the safety type in which t hearc will automatically extinguish if the outer glass envelope becomes

broken.

2 . Multi-vapor lamps shall be as defined on the detail drawin gs.

3 . High pressure sodium lamps shall be as defined on the deta il

drawings.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 8





C . Compact Fluorescent L amp s: Shall be 4100°K, 10,000 hours average rated

life, and as scheduled on drawin gs.

2.5 OCCUPANT SENSOR LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS

A . Genera l: An active or passive sensor shall be utilized to control the

"On-O ff" actuation of fluorescent or incandescent lighting lo ad s. It

shall provide control of an isolated set of contacts on exposure to a

perceived change in environmental conditions indicating the presence or

absence of one or more per sons . It shall maintain the contacts closed in

the presence of continued changes (due to human pre senc e) at similar

intensity and r at e. It shall open the contacts at a nominal time after

the changes cease.

B . Passive Sensor System : Sensor(s ) shall react to changes of radiated

infrared en erg y, indicating the activity of one or more human bodies in

the area covere d:

1 . Range of detec tion: The sens or(s) shall provide effective coverage ofa r oo m, sensing the presence of one or more people in the room in

order to turn the lights o n . The ceiling mounted sensor's area of

coverage shall be approximately a 420 0 mm (14 f eet ) diameter circle

at 1800 mm (6 f eet ) awa y. Provide sufficient units to give full

coverage as measured 75 0 mm (30 in ches ) above the fl oor . A

field-of-view adjustment feature shall be provided to allow

orientation to various room operating conditions.

2 . Sensor placem ent: Locate the senso r(s) in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings by avoiding

nuisance activation due to sudden temperature or air flow changes.

Locate the units within 1800 mm (6 fee t) horizontally of work

stations or major points of acti vity , including the center of room

entrance doors .

C . Active Sensor Sy stem: Sensor(s) shall react to reflective changes to

generated ultrasonic radiation (crystal cont rolle d, 24 to 42kHz),

indicating the activity of one or more persons in the area covered.

1 . Range of d etection: On ceilings below 3600 mm (twelve f eet ) in

hei ght , a single direction sensor shall cover approximately a 9 x 9 m

(30 feet x 30 fe et) area; a two directional unit a 18 x 9 m (60 feet

x 30 fe et) area ; and a two-way corridor unit a total distance of 27 m

(90 feet ) . The sensors shall be equipped with a concealed but

accessible sensitivity control to tune the unit to specific room

conditions.

2 . Sensor placem ent: Locate the senso r(s) in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations to maximize energy savings by avoiding

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 9





nuisance activation due to predictable non-human motion activities.

Give particular attention to work station or major areas of activity

and the coverage of room entrance do ors .

D. Timing/Function: Shall not be user adj ustable. Lighting shall remain on

with one or more persons within the covered ar ea . The system shall b e

factory set to maintain lights on for a minimum of 8 minutes and not

longer than 12 minutes after the area of coverage is vacate d. For

testing p urpo ses, there shall be a means t o change the pre-set time

delay to 30 seconds or less.

E . Control Uni t: The system shall have a switching rela y(s) capable of

switching the fluorescent or incandescent loads as required. Contacts

shall be rated at a minimum of 15 Amps at voltages to 2 7 7 , with expected

cycles of operation in excess of 10 0K . Power derived from a curre nt

limiting 24 volt transformer shall power the system and t he unit must be

packaged for installation on a standard 200 mm x 200 mm (4 inch x 4

in ch) NEMA box enclosu re. The unit shall be wired through a conventional

wall switch to provide an over-ride system "O ff " and active "Off-O n"

functioning.

F. Field Wir ing: The wiring between the control unit and sens or(s) shall be

an insulated multi-conducto r, #22 gauge Poly Vinyl Chloride (PV C)

jacketed cable.

2.6 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING FOR INDOOR LIGHTING S YSTEMS

A . Shall be rated for continuous-duty servi ce.

B . Electric contacts shall be precious metal sur face.

C . Magnetic contactors and relays shall be electrically-operated and

mechanically-held.

D. Characteristics of the components and the total resistances of t he

circuits throughout the systems shall be such that the systems will

operate satisfactorily in every respect while the branch circuit power

supply voltage to each system is within a 105-130 volt range at 6 0 Hz .

E . Wall switches shall be the momentary contact type suitable for mounting

in a single gang outlet box space and compatible with the standard

design wall plates as spec ified.

F. Where shown on the draw ings, incorporate the components in panelboards

behind separate doors and mount them on sound absorbing materials.

G. Install circuit breaker or fuse protection for the control circuit s.

H. Low voltage remote control system shall b e DC t yp e, operating at not

greater than 30 v olt s, and meeting the requirements for Class 2 circuits

in Article 725 of the NE C.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 10





2.7 RADIO-INTERFERENCE-FREE FLUORESCENT FIXTURES

A . Shall be specially designed for suppressing radio-frequency energy

produced within the fix tures . The Rules and Regulations of FCC (CFR 4 7 ,

Part 18 ) shall apply.

B . Lenses shall have a light-transparent layer of met al permanently bonded

to th em , and in positive contact with the steel housing or equal to

prevent the radio-frequency interferences from passing through the

lenses. The effective light transmittance of the lenses shall be no t

less than 75 percent .

C . Install line filters within the body of the fixtures and wired in se ries

with the supply circuit conductors to eliminate the transmission of

radio frequency energy into the supply circuit.

2.8 FLUORESCENT BEDLIGHT FIXTURES

A. Requirements:

1 . Fixed or movable arms are not acceptab le.2 . Exposed surfaces shall remain cool to the to uch.

3 . Major portion of the light shall be directed upwards and ou twards

through l ens es. Balance of the light shall be directed downwards

through lenses to produce low brightness surfaces with minimum

contrast as viewed by the patients from their normal viewing a ngles

in bed.

4 . Shall provide not less than 110 lx (10 footcandles ) (avera ge) of

general room illumination measured 750 mm (30 inc hes ) above the

floor.

5 . Shall provide 330 lx (30 footcandles) on the reading surfaces for the

patients while in a normal prone or normal sit-up position in bed .

B . Provide 4-pos ition, pull cord switch on the fluorescent bedlight within

easy reach of the patient while in a normal prone position in be d. The

switches shall enable the patient to control the upward and downward

portion of the light separately and simult aneous ly, to include an off

posit ion, except in single bed rooms where the switch shall enable the

patient to energize and de-energize the downward light o nl y. In the

single bed ro om s, provide a 2-position pull cord switch for "on-off "

control of the downward lamp s.

C . Bedlight fixtures shall be rated for 120 volt oper ation.

2.9 X-RAY FILM ILLUMINATORS

A . Shall be the high-intensity t yp e, flush-mounted in the wa lls . Multiples

of the basic unit may be combined in a common housing.

B . Shall have the following feat ures :

1 . Fluorescent lig hti ng, designed to provide uniform diffusion of th e

light.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 11





2 . Box dimensions approximately 525 mm (21 inc hes) high , 350 mm (14

inches) wide and 100 mm ( 4 inches) deep.

3 . Frame shall be satin chrome-plated bras s or stainless steel and shall

extend approximately 40 mm (1-1/2 inc hes) from the edges of the b ox .

4 . Viewing glass shall b e the heat res istant , borosilicate type or 100

percent virgin acrylic plastic and not less than 3 mm (1/8 inch)

thick.

5 . Viewing glass shall have adequate dimensions so the films will not

overlap the frame and will be positioned with respect to the light

source for even illumination without shado ws.

6. An ON-OFF switch .

7 . Power supply voltage shall be 120 volt s, 60 H z .

C . Fluorescent lamps shall be th e cool -white , rapid-start ty pe .

D. Ballast shall be low leakage type with leakage not exceeding 3 0

microamperes.

2.10 EXIT LIGHT FIXTURES

A . Exit light fixtures shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 10 1 and

UL 924 .

B . Housing and Can opy:

1 . Shall be made of cast or extruded aluminum , or rolled ste el.

2 . Optional steel housing shall be a minimum 20 gauge thick or

equivalent strength aluminum.

3 . Steel housing shall have baked enamel over corrosion resis tant, matte

black or ivory white prime r.

C . Door frame shall be cast or extruded al uminum, and hinged with la tch.

D. Finish shall be satin or fine-grain brushed aluminum.

E . There shall be no radioactive material used in the fixtur es.

F. Fixtures:

1 . Inscription panels shall be cast or stamped aluminum a minimum of

2.25 mm (0.090 inc h) thi ck, stenciled with 150 mm ( 6 in ch) high

letters, baked with red color stable plastic or fibe rgl ass. Lamps

shall be luminous red Light Emitting Diodes (L ED ) mounted in center

of letters on red color stable plastic or f ibergla ss. The LED shall

be rated minimum 25 years li fe ; maximum of 3.5 watts for single fac e

and 7 watts for double-faced fixtures that do not use diffuser pa nels

in front of the LEDs. LED exit light fixtures that use diffuser

panels shall require a maximum of 1.0 watt per fixture for single or

double face fixtur es.

2 . Double-Faced Fi xtu res : Provide double-faced fixtures where required

or as shown on drawi ngs.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 12





3 . Directional Arr ows : Provide directional arrows as part of the

inscription panel where required or as shown on dra win gs. Directional

arrows shall be the "chevro n-type" of similar size and width as the

letters and meet the requirements of NFPA 10 1 .

G. Volt ages: Fixtures shall be wired for 277-volt operation .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A . Installation shall be in accordance with the NE C, manufacturer's

instructions and as shown on the drawings or specified.

B . Align , mount and level the lighting fixtures uniforml y.

C . Avoid interference with and provide clearance for eq uip ment . Where the

indicated locations for the lighting fixtures conflict with the

locations for equi pme nt, change the locations for the lighting fix tures

by the minimum distances necessary as approved by the Resident Engineer.

D. For suspended lighting fi xtu res , the mounting heights shall provide t heclearances between the bottoms of the fixtures and the finished floor s

as shown on the drawings .

E . Fluorescent bed light fixtures shall be attached to the studs in th e

walls. Attachment to gypsum board only is not acceptable.

F. Lighting Fixture Supports :

1 . Shall provide support for all of the fixt ures. Supports may be

anchored to channels of the ceiling cons truct ion, to the struc tural

slab or to structural members within a part ition, or above a

suspended ceiling .

2 . Shall maintain the fixture positions after cleaning and relamping.

3 . Shall support the lighting fixtures without causing the ceiling o rpartition to deflec t.

a . In addition to the ab ove , the following i s required for fixtures

exceeding 9 kg (20 p ounds ) in we ight . No te : Ceiling types are

defined in ASTM Standard C63 5-6 9.

1 ) Where fixtures mounted in "Intermediate" and "Heavy Dut y"

ceilings weigh between 9 kg and 25 kg ( 20 pounds and 56 poun ds)

provide two 12 gauge safety hangers hung slack between diagonal

corners of the fixture and the building struc ture.

2 ) Where fixtures weigh over 25 kg (56 p ound s) they shall be

independently supported from the building structure by approved

han ger s. Two-way angular bracing of hangers shall be provided

to prevent lateral motion .

b . Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting

fix tur es, they must have a carrying capacity equal to that of the

main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to the main runners.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 13





4 . Surface mounted lighting fixtur es:

a . Fixtures shall be bolted against the ceiling independent of t he

outlet box at four points spaced near the corners of each un it .

The bolts (or stud-clips) shall be minimum 6 mm (1/ 4-2 0) bo lt ,

secured to main ceiling runners and/or secured to cross runners.

Non-turning studs may be attached to the main ceiling runners and

cross runners with special non-friction clip devi ces designed f or

the pur pose , provided they bolt through the r unn er, or are also

secured to the building structure by 12 gauge safety hangers.

Studs or bolts securing fixtures weighing in excess of 25 kg (5 6

poun ds) shall be supported directly from the building st ructure .

b . Where ceiling cross runners are installed for support of lighting

fixtures they must have a carrying capacity equal to that of the

main ceiling runners and be rigidly secured to the main runners.

c. Fixtures less than 6.8 kg (15 poun ds) in weight and occupying less

than 600 mm x 6 00 mm (two square fee t) of ceiling area ma y, (when

designed for the pur pos e) be supported directly from the outl et

box when all the following conditions are me t.

1 ) Screws attaching the fixture to the outlet box pass through

round holes (not key-hole sl ots ) in the fixture bo dy.

2 ) The outlet box is attached to a main ceiling runner (or cro ss

runn er) with approved hardwa re.

3 ) The outlet box is supported vertically from the building

structure.

d. Fixtures mounted in open construction shall be secured directly t o

the building structure with approved bolting and clamping devices.

5 . Single or double pendent-mounted lighting fixt ures:

a . Each stem shall be supported by an approved outlet bo x, mounted

swivel joint and canopy which holds the stem captive and pro vides

spring load (or approved equ ival ent) dampening of fixture

osci llat ions . Outlet box shall be supported vertically from the

building structure .

6. Outlet boxes for support of lighting fixtures (where permitted ) shall

be secured directly to the building structure with approved devic es

or supported vertically in a hung ceiling from the building structure

with a nine gauge wire han ger , and be secured by an approved devic e

to a main ceiling runner or cross runner to prevent any horiz ontal

movement relative to the ceiling .

G. Furnish and install the specified lamps for all lighting f ixtures

installed and all existing lighting fixtures reinstalled under this

project.

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 14





H . Coordinate between the electrical and ceiling trade s to ascertain that

approved lighting fixture s are furnished in the proper size s and

installed with the proper devices (hange rs, cl ip s, trim fra mes ,

flanges), to match the ceiling system being installed.

I . Bond lighting fixtures and metal accessories to the grounding system as

specified in Section 26 05 2 6 , GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS.

J. At completion of proj ect, relamp all fixtures which have failed/burned-

out l amp s. Clean all fi xture s, len ses , diffusers and louvers that have

accumulated dust/dirt during construction.

- - - E N D - - -

MDE 10335 – March 3 1 , 201026 51 00 - 15






Documents

DIV 26